Yamaha Tyros5 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: Tyros5

Categorie: Digitale piano's

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

DIGITAL WORKSTATION

Tyros5-76 Tyros5-61

Reference Manual

This Reference Manual explains advanced features of the Tyros5 that are not explained in the

Owner’s Manual. Please read the Owner’s Manual first, before reading this Reference Manual.

C.S.G., DMI Development Division

Published 02/2014 PO-B0

2 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Contents

* Each chapter in this Reference Manual corresponds to the relevant chapters in the Owner’s Manual.

1 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 4

Voice Types (Characteristics) .................................................................................................................. 4

Selecting GM, XG and Other Voices ....................................................................................................... 6

Touch Response and Effect-Related Settings ......................................................................................... 7

Pitch-Related Settings ........................................................................................................................... 10

Editing Voices (Voice Set) ..................................................................................................................... 12

Editing Organ Voices (Organ World) ..................................................................................................... 17

Editing Ensemble Voices (Ensemble Voice Edit)...................................................................................19

2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 25

Selecting the Chord Fingering Type ...................................................................................................... 26

Style Playback Related Settings ............................................................................................................ 28

Memorizing Original Settings to a One Touch Setting ........................................................................... 30

Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) .................................................................................................. 31

3 Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance – 46

Multi Pad Creating (Multi Pad Creator) .................................................................................................. 46

Multi Pad Editing .................................................................................................................................... 48

4 Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – 50

Editing Music Notation Settings ............................................................................................................. 51

Editing Lyrics/Text Display Settings....................................................................................................... 53

Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback ............................................................. 54

Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat Settings, Channel Settings, Guide Function) ................. 55

Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) ................................................................................................. 59

5 Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files – 76

Recording Your Performance ................................................................................................................ 76

Converting a file ..................................................................................................................................... 80

Editing the Recorded Data (Multi Track Recording File)........................................................................ 82

Re-recording the Multi Track Recording File ......................................................................................... 84

Setting the Start/End Points of the Audio (Multi Track Recording File) ................................................. 87

Playlist Mode.......................................................................................................................................... 88

6 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Settings for Your Performance – 91

Creating a Set of Favorite Records........................................................................................................ 91

Editing Records...................................................................................................................................... 92

Saving the Records as a Single File (Music Finder File) ....................................................................... 93

7 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 95

Editing a Registration Memory............................................................................................................... 95

Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) ........................................................................................... 96

Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration Sequence)....................................... 97

8 Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing – 100

Vocal Harmony and Talk Setting ......................................................................................................... 100

Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk) .................................................................. 101

Setting and Editing Vocal Harmony Types .......................................................................................... 104

Editing the Synth Vocoder Types......................................................................................................... 111

Tyros5 Reference Manual 3

9 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 115

Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters .......................................................................................................... 115

Editing FILTER Parameters ................................................................................................................. 116

Editing TUNE Parameters.................................................................................................................... 117

Editing EFFECT Parameters ............................................................................................................... 118

Editing EQ Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 122

Editing Master Compressor Settings ................................................................................................... 123

Line Out Settings ................................................................................................................................. 124

Block Diagram...................................................................................................................................... 125

10 Utility – Making Global Settings – 126

CONFIG 1 ............................................................................................................................................ 126

CONFIG 2 ............................................................................................................................................ 128

MEDIA.................................................................................................................................................. 129

OWNER ............................................................................................................................................... 130

SYSTEM RESET ................................................................................................................................. 131

11 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 133

Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings ..................................................................................................... 133

MIDI Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 136

MFC10 Settings ................................................................................................................................... 142

Connecting to a Network (Bundled USB Wireless LAN Adaptor) ........................................................ 144

Appendix 148

Expansion Pack Related Operations ................................................................................................... 148

Index 150

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different

from those on your instrument. Note that all display examples shown in this manual are in English.

• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Using the PDF manual

• To quickly jump to items and topics of interest, click on the desired items in the “Bookmarks” index to the left of

the main display window. (Click the “Bookmarks” tab to open the index if it is not displayed.)

• Click the page numbers that appear in this manual to go directly to the corresponding page.

• Select “Find” or “Search” from the Adobe Reader “Edit” menu and enter a keyword to locate related information in

the document.

The names and positions of menu items may vary according to the version of Adobe Reader being used.

NOTE

4 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Voices

– Playing the Keyboard –

Contents

Voice Types (Characteristics) ........................................................................... 4

Selecting GM, XG and Other Voices................................................................ 6

Touch Response and Effect-Related Settings .................................................. 7

• Setting the Touch Response of the Keyboard............................................... 7

• Using Keyboard Harmony/Echo .................................................................. 8

Pitch-Related Settings ..................................................................................... 10

• Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument........................................... 10

• Scale Tuning............................................................................................... 10

• Changing the Part Assignment of the TRANSPOSE Buttons ................... 11

Editing Voices (Voice Set)................................................................................ 12

• Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays...................................... 13

• Disabling Automatic Selection of Voice Sets (Effects, etc.) ...................... 16

Editing Organ Voices (Organ World) ............................................................ 17

Editing Ensemble Voices (Ensemble Voice Edit)........................................... 19

The particular type of Voice is indicated at the upper left of the Voice name in the Voice Selection display. The defining

characteristics of these Voices and their performance advantages are described below.

Voice Types (Characteristics)

S.Art!

(Super Articulation)

These Voices provide many benefits with great playability and expressive control in real time.

For example, with the Saxophone Voice, if you play a C and then a D in a very legato way, you will

hear the note change seamlessly, as though a saxophone player played it in a single breath.

Similarly with the Concert Guitar Voice and play the D note strongly, the D note would sound as a

“hammer on,” without the string being plucked again. Depending on how you play, other effects

such as “shaking” or breath noises (for the Trumpet Voice), or finger noises (for the Guitar Voice)

are produced.

For details on how to best play each S.Art! Voice, call up the information window (pressing the

[6 ] (INFO) button in the Voice Selection display).

S.Art2!

(Super Articulation2)

For wind instrument Voices and Violin Voices, a special technology called AEM (see below) has

been used, which features detailed samples of special expressive techniques used on those specific

instruments—to bend or slide into notes, to “join” different notes together, or to add expressive

nuances at the end of a note, etc. You can add these articulations by playing legato or non-legato, or

by jumping in pitch by around an octave. For example, using the Clarinet Voice, if you hold a C

note and play the Bb above, you’ll hear a glissando up to the Bb. Some “note off” effects are also

produced automatically when you hold a note for over a certain time. Each S.Art2! Voice has its

own default vibrato setting, so that when you select a S.Art2! Voice, the appropriate vibrato is

applied regardless of the Modulation wheel position. You can adjust the vibrato by moving the

Modulation wheel.

For details on how to best play each S.Art2! Voice, call up the information window (pressing the

[6 ] (INFO) button in the Voice Selection display).

Live! These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly authentic, rich

sound—full of atmosphere and ambience.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 5

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

For a list of preset Voices of this instrument, refer to the “Voice List” in the Data List, available at the online Yamaha

Library.

Cool! These Voices use sophisticated programming to capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of

electric instruments.

Sweet! These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology—and fea-

ture a finely detailed and natural sound.

Drums Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds

from the keyboard.

SFX Various special effect sounds and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you

play the sounds from the keyboard.

Live! Drums These are high-quality drum sounds that take full advantage of Stereo Sampling and Dynamic Sam-

pling.

Live! SFX These are various high-quality special effect sounds and percussion sounds that take full advantage

of Stereo Sampling and Dynamic sampling.

Organ Flutes! These authentic organ Voices let you adjust the various footages and craft your own original organ

sounds. See page 17 for details.

MegaVoice These Voices make special use of velocity switching. Each velocity range (the measure of your

playing strength) has a completely different sound.

For example, a guitar MegaVoice includes the sounds of various performance techniques. In con-

ventional instruments, different Voices having those sounds would be called up via MIDI and

played in combination to achieve the desired effect. However, now with MegaVoices, a convincing

guitar part can be played with just a single Voice, using specific velocity values to play the desired

sounds. Because of the complex nature of these Voices and the precise velocities need to play the

sounds, they’re not intended for playing from the keyboard. They are, however, very useful and

convenient when creating MIDI data—especially when you want to avoid using several different

Voices just for a single instrument part.

S.Art!, S.Art2! and Mega Voices are not compatible with other instrument models. For this reason, any Song or Style you’ve created on this instrument using these Voices

will not sound properly when played back on the instruments which do not have these types of Voices.

S.Art!, S.Art2! and Mega Voices sound differently depending on keyboard range, velocity, touch, etc. Hence, if you apply a HARMONY/ECHO effect, change the transpose

setting or change the Voice Set parameters, unexpected or undesired sounds may result.

The characteristics of S.Art2! Voices (default vibrato setting and articulation effects applied by the [ART] buttons) are effective for real-time performance; however, these

effects may not be completely reproduced when you play back a MIDI Song which has been recorded using S.Art2! Voices.

Converting the Voices of a MIDI Song to MegaVoices (MEGAEnhancer)

MEGAEnhancer is a software program that converts XG/GM song data (Standard MIDI File) to song data specially

enhanced to be played back using an instrument or tone generator containing MegaVoices. With the use of the

sophisticated MegaVoices, MEGAEnhancer automatically makes conventional song files with guitar, bass, and other

parts sound much more realistic and authentic. MEGAEnhancer can be downloaded from the Yamaha website.

http://download.yamaha.com/

NOTE

6 Tyros5 Reference Manual

This instrument features Voices provided specially for Style playback and XG/GM compatibility. These Voices cannot

be called up directly from the VOICE category selection buttons. However, they can be called up as described below.

1 Press the PART SELECT button corresponding to the Part you want to use.

2 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons (other than the [ORGAN WORLD],

[ENSEMBLE] and [EXPANSION/USER] buttons) to call up the Voice Selection display.

3 Press the [8 ] (UP) button to call up the Voice categories.

4 Press the [2 ] (P2) button to display Page 2.

5 Press the desired [A]–[J] button to call up the Voice Selection

display of GM&XG Voices, GM2 Voices, etc.

6 Select the desired Voice.

AEM Technology

When you play the piano, pressing a “C” key produces a definite and relatively fixed C note. When you play a wind

instrument, however, a single fingering may produce several different sounds depending on the breath strength, the

note length, the adding of trills or bend effects, and other performance techniques. Also, when playing two notes con-

tinuously—for example “C” and “D”—these two notes will be smoothly joined, and not sound independent as they

would on a piano.

AEM (Articulation Element Modeling) is the technology for simulating this characteristic of instruments. During

performance, the most appropriate sound samples are selected in sequence in real time, from huge quantities of sam-

pled data. They are smoothly joined and sounded—as would naturally occur on an actual acoustic instrument.

This technology to smoothly join different samples enables the application of realistic vibrato. Conventionally on

electronic musical instruments, vibrato is applied by moving the pitch periodically. AEM technology goes much fur-

ther by analyzing and disaggregating the sampled vibrato waves, and smoothly joins the disaggregated data in real

time during your performance. If you move the Modulation wheel when you play the S.Art2! Voice (using AEM

technology), you can also control the depth of the vibrato, and still maintain remarkable realism.

Selecting GM, XG and Other Voices

You can also find the “Legacy” folder in

this display. This folder contains previ-

ous Yamaha keyboards’ Voices (such as

Tyros, Tyros2, Tyros3, Tyros4, etc.) for

data compatibility with other models.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 7

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

Setting the Touch Response of the Keyboard

Touch Response determines how the sound responds to your playing strength. The

touch response type becomes the common setting for all Voices.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [E][F] KEYBOARD/PANEL

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired parameter: “1 INI-

TIAL TOUCH” or “2 AFTER TOUCH.”

3 Use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to set the touch response.

1 INITIAL TOUCH

2 AFTER TOUCH

Touch Response and Effect-Related Settings

Some Voices are purposely designed

without touch response, in order to

emulate the true characteristics of the

actual instrument (for example, conven-

tional organs, which have no touch

response).

NOTE

Touch Response is applied to the

checkmarked parts.

[1 ]/

[2 ]

TOUCH Determines the Initial Touch Response type.

HARD 2: Requires strong playing to produce high volume. Best for players with a

heavy touch.

HARD 1: Requires moderately strong playing for higher volume.

MEDIUM: Standard Touch Response.

SOFT 1: Produces high volume with moderate playing strength.

SOFT 2: Produces relatively high volume even with light playing strength. Best for

players with a light touch.

[4 ] TOUCH OFF

LEVEL

Determines the fixed volume level when Touch is set to “OFF.”

[5 ]–

[8 ]

LEFT–RIGHT3 Turns Initial Touch on or off for each keyboard part.

[1 ]/

[2 ]

TOUCH Determines the After Touch response type.

HARD: Relatively strong After Touch pressure is needed to produce changes.

MEDIUM: Produces a fairly standard After Touch response.

SOFT: Allows you to produce relatively large changes with very light After Touch

pressure.

[5 ]–

[8 ]

LEFT–RIGHT3 Turns After Touch on or off for each keyboard part.

8 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Using Keyboard Harmony/Echo

You can select the desired Harmony/Echo effect from a variety of types.

1 Turn the [HARMONY/ECHO] button on.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [F] HARMONY/ECHO

3 Use the [1 ]–[3 ] buttons to select the Harmony/Echo

type.

The Harmony/Echo types are divided into three groups (Harmony Types, Multi

Assign Type, and Echo types), depending on the particular effect applied.

4 Use the [4 ]–[8 ] buttons to select various Harmony/Echo settings.

The available settings differ depending on the Harmony/Echo type.

When the [MONO] button is turned to

on or you use the S.Art!/S.Art2! Voices,

the Harmony/Echo effect may not work

properly.

NOTE

The available Harmony/Echo types dif-

fer when an Ensemble Voice is selected.

NOTE

[4 ] VOLUME This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It deter-

mines the volume level of the Harmony/Echo notes generated by the Harmony/Echo

effect.

] SPEED This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type

above. It determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill effects.

] ASSIGN Determines the keyboard Part that the effect is assigned.

AUTO: Applies the effect to the part for which PART ON/OFF is on. When more

than one parts are on, the RIGHT 1 part is given priority over the RIGHT 2/3 part.

In a similar way the RIGHT 2 part is given priority over the RIGHT 3 part.

MULTI: When more than one parts are on, the note played on the keyboard is

sounded by the RIGHT 1 part and the harmonies (effect) are divided to the RIGHT

1, RIGHT 2 and RIGHT 3 parts. When only one part is on, the note played on the

keyboard and effect are sounded by that part.

R1–R3: Applies the effect to the selected part (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 or RIGHT 3).

] CHORD NOTE

ONLY

This parameter is available when one of the Harmony Types is selected. When this is

set to “ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to the notes (played in the right-hand

section of the keyboard) that belongs to a chord played in the chord section of the key-

board.

] TOUCH LIMIT This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It deter-

mines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. This allows

you to selectively apply the harmony by your playing strength, letting you create har-

mony accents in the melody. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key

strongly (above the set value).

3 4

Harmony Types (see below)

Multi Assign Type (see below)

Echo Types (see below)

This parameter is not available for the Multi Assign type.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 9

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

 Harmony Types

The harmony effect is applied to the note played in the right-hand section of the

keyboard according to the chord specified in the chord or left-hand section shown

below.

You can make these different Split Point settings according to your performance

preferences.

 Multi Assign Type

The Multi Assign effect automatically assigns the notes of chords you play on the

right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (Voices). For example, if you

play a three-note chord, the first note you press is played by the RIGHT 1 Voice,

the second by the RIGHT 2 Voice, and the third by the RIGHT 3 Voice. The Multi

Assign effect is not affected by the [ACMP] and LEFT part on/off status.

 Echo Types

The Echo, Tremolo or Trill effect is applied to the note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time

with the currently set tempo, regardless of the [ACMP] and the LEFT part on/off status. Keep in mind that Trill

works when you hold down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously (or the last two notes, if more than two

notes are held), and it plays those notes alternately.

The “1+5” and “Octave” settings are not

affected by the chord.

The actual operation depends on the

Split Point settings. For more informa-

tion, refer to “Specifying Chords with

Your Right Hand while Playing Bass

with Your Left Hand” in the Owner’s

Manual.

NOTE

Chord section for Style playback

and Harmony effect

Chord section for

Style playback and

Harmony effect

LEFT Voice and chord section

for Harmony effect

Split Point Split Point

RIGHT 1–3 Voices

LEFT Voice

Split Point

(for Style playback)

Split Point

(for the Voice)

10 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument

You can fine-tune the pitch of the entire instrument such as the keyboard, Style and Song parts (except the keyboard

part played by the Drum Kit or SFX Kit Voices, and audio playback)—a useful feature when playing the Tyros5 along

with other instruments or CD music.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE  TAB [E][F] MASTER TUNE

2 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to set the tuning in 0.2 Hz steps.

Press both [] and [] buttons (of 4 and 5) simultaneously to reset the value to the factory setting of 440.0 Hz.

Scale Tuning

You can select various scales for playing in custom tunings for specific historical periods or music genres.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE  TAB [E][F] SCALE TUNE

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired scale.

Preset Scale types

Pitch-Related Settings

The tuning of each note for the currently

selected scale is shown.

EQUAL The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step

evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in music today.

PURE MAJOR, PURE

MINOR

These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad

chords (root, third, fifth). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies—such as choirs

and a cappella singing.

PYTHAGOREAN This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of per-

fect fifths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unsta-

ble, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads.

MEAN-TONE This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major

third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th cen-

tury. Handel, among others, used this scale.

WERCKMEISTER,

KIRNBERGER

This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were

themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of

this scale is that each key has its own unique character. The scale was used extensively dur-

ing the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when performing period

music on the harpsichord.

ARABIC1, ARABIC2 Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 11

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

3 Change the following settings as necessary.

Changing the Part Assignment of the TRANSPOSE Buttons

You can determine to which parts the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons are applied.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [E][F] KEYBOARD/PANEL

2 Use the [B] button to select “4 TRANSPOSE ASSIGN.”

3 Press the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to select the desired part assignment.

The assignment can be confirmed by the pop-up window called up via the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons.

To register the Scale Tune settings to

Registration Memory, be sure to check-

mark the SCALE item in the REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY CONTENTS display.

NOTE

[2 ] BASE NOTE Determines the base note for each scale. When the base note is changed, the pitch of

the keyboard is transposed, yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the

notes.

[3 ]–

[5 ]

TUNE Select the desired note to be tuned by using the [3 ] buttons and tune it in cents by

using the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons.

[6 ]/

[7 ]

PART SELECT Select the part to which the Scale Tune setting is applied by using the [6 ]/

[7 ] buttons. Then press the [8 ] button to add a checkmark or press the [8 ]

button to remove the checkmark.

[8 ] MARK ON/OFF

KEYBOARD The TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect the pitch of keyboard played Voices, Style playback

(controlled by the performance in the chord section of the keyboard), and Multi Pad play-

back (when Chord Match is on, and left-hand chords are indicated)—but they do not affect

Song playback.

SONG The TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect only the pitch of Song playback.

MASTER The TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect the overall pitch of the instrument, except audio

playback.

In musical terms a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone. (100 cents equal one semitone.)

NOTE

12 Tyros5 Reference Manual

The Voice Set function allows you to create your own Voices by editing some parameters of the existing Voices. Once

you’ve created a Voice, you can save it as a file to internal memory (User drive) or external devices for future recall.

1 Select the desired Voice (other than an Organ World Voice/Ensemble Voice).

Organ World Voices/Ensemble Voices have different editing methods than described here. For instructions on edit-

ing the Organ World Voices, see page 17. For instructions on editing the Ensemble Voices, see page 19.

2 Press the [5 ] (VOICE SET) button to call up the VOICE SET display.

3 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the relevant setting page.

For information on the available parameters in each page, see the “Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Dis-

plays” on page 13.

4 As necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) to be edited and edit

the Voice by using the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons or sliders.

By pressing the [D] (COMPARE) button, you can compare the sound of the edited Voice with the original

(unedited) Voice.

5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Voice.

For details on the Save operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual, Basic Operations.

Editing Voices (Voice Set)

The settings will be lost if you

select another Voice or turn the

power to the instrument off with-

out executing the Save operation.

NOTICE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 13

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays

The Voice Set parameters are organized into five different pages. The parameters in

each page are described separately, below.

 COMMON Page

 CONTROLLER Page

1 MODULATION

The MODULATION wheel can be used to modulate the parameters below as well as the pitch (vibrato). Here, you

can set the degree to which the MODULATION wheel modulates each of the following parameters.

The available parameters differ depend-

ing on the Voice.

NOTE

[1 ] VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current edited Voice.

[2 ]/

[3 ]

TOUCH SENSE Adjusts the touch sensitivity (velocity sensitivity), or how greatly the volume

responds to your playing strength.

DEPTH: Determines the velocity sensitivity, or how much the level of the Voice

changes in response to your playing strength (velocity).

OFFSET: Determines the amount by which received velocities are adjusted for the

actual velocity effect.

[4 ]/

[5 ]

PART OCTAVE Shifts the octave range of the edited Voice up or down in octaves. When the edited

Voice is used as any of the RIGHT 1–3 parts, the R1/R2/R3 parameter is available;

when the edited Voice is used as the LEFT part, the LEFT parameter is available.

[6 ] MONO/POLY Determines whether the edited Voice is played monophonically or polyphonically.

This setting can also be made from the VOICE EFFECT [MONO] button on the

panel.

[7 ] PORTAMENTO

TIME

Determines the pitch transition time when the edited Voice is set to MONO above.

64 127

127

64 127

127

Actual Velocity for

tone generator

Depth = 127 (twice)

Depth = 64 (normal)

Depth = 32 (half)

Depth = 0

TOUCH SENSE DEPTH

Changes to velocity curve according to

VelDepth (with Offset set to 64)

Received Velocity

(Actual KeyOn speed)

TOUCH SENSE OFFSET

Changes to velocity curve according to

VelOffset (with Depth set to 64)

Actual Velocity for

tone generator

Received Velocity

(Actual KeyOn speed)

Offset = 96 (+64)

Offset = 127 (+127)

Offset = 64 (normal)

Offset = 32 (-64)

Offset = 0 (-127)

Depends

on offset

Depends

on offset

Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard

to the next.

NOTE

[2 ] FILTER Determines the degree to which the MODULATION wheel modulates the Filter Cut-

off Frequency. For details about the filter, see below.

[3 ] AMPLITUDE Determines the degree to which the MODULATION wheel modulates the amplitude

(volume).

[5 ] LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which the MODULATION wheel modulates the pitch, or

the vibrato effect.

[6 ] LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which the MODULATION wheel modulates the Filter mod-

ulation, or the wah effect.

[7 ] LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which the MODULATION wheel modulates the amplitude,

or the tremolo effect.

14 Tyros5 Reference Manual

2 AFTER TOUCH

After Touch can be used to modulate the parameters below. Here, you can set the degree to which After Touch

modulates each of the following parameters.

 SOUND Page

FILTER

Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking or passing a specific frequency

range. The parameters below determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency

range. In addition to making the sound either brighter or mellower, Filter can be used to produce electronic, syn-

thesizer-like effects.

The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the

sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound character-

istics of natural acoustic instruments—such as the quick attack and

decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano

tone.

[2 ] FILTER Determines the degree to which After Touch modulates the Filter Cutoff Frequency.

See below for details about Filter.

[3 ] AMPLITUDE Determines the degree to which After Touch modulates the amplitude (volume).

[5 ] LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which After Touch modulates the pitch, or the vibrato effect.

[6 ] LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which After Touch modulates the Filter modulation, or the

wah effect.

[7 ] LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which After Touch modulates the amplitude, or the tremolo

effect.

[1 ] BRIGHT

(Brightness)

Determines the cutoff frequency or effec-

tive frequency range of the filter (see dia-

gram). Higher values result in a brighter

sound.

[2 ] HARMO.

(Harmonic Content)

Determines the emphasis given to the

cutoff frequency (resonance), set in

BRIGHT. above (see diagram). Higher

values result in a more pronounced effect.

Volum e

These frequencies are

“passed” by the filter.

Cutoff

range

Frequency

(pitch)

Cutoff Frequency

Volum e

Frequency (pitch)

Resonance

Time

Level

Key on Key off

Sustain

Level

ATTACK DECAY RELEASE

[3 ] ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played.

The lower the value, the quicker the attack.

[4 ] DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly lower level than

maximum). The lower the value, the quicker the decay.

[5 ] RELES. (Release) Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released. The

lower the value, the quicker the decay.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 15

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

VIBRATO

Vibrato is a quavering, vibrating sound effect that is produced by regu-

larly modulating the pitch of the Voice.

 EFFECT / EQ Page

1 REVERB DEPTH / CHORUS DEPTH / DSP DEPTH / PANEL SUSTAIN

2 DSP

3 EQ

Determines the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands. For information about EQ, refer to page 122.

 HARMONY Page

Same as in the [FUNCTION]  [F] HARMONY/ECHO display. See “Using Keyboard Harmony/Echo” on

page 8.

Pitch

DELAY

SPEED

DEPTH

Time

[6 ] DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more pro-

nounced Vibrato.

[7 ] SPEED Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect.

[8 ] DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start

of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset.

[1 ]/

[2 ]

REVERB DEPTH Adjusts the reverb depth.

[3 ]/

[4 ]

CHORUS DEPTH Adjusts the chorus depth.

[5 ] DSP ON/OFF Determines whether the DSP effect is on or off.

This setting can also be made from the VOICE EFFECT [DSP] button on the panel.

[6 ] DSP DEPTH Adjusts the DSP depth.

If you want to re-select the DSP type, you can do so in the “2 DSP” menu explained

on page 15.

[7 ] PANEL SUSTAIN Determines the sustain level applied to the edited Voice when the VOICE EFFECT

[SUSTAIN] button on the panel is turned on.

[1 ]–

[4 ]

DSP TYPE Selects the DSP effect category and type. Select a type after selecting a category.

[5 ]–

[8 ]

VARIATION Two variations are provided for each DSP type. Here, you can edit the VARIATION

on/off status and the variation’s parameter value setting.

[5 ] ON/OFF Turns the DSP Variation on or off for the selected Voice. This setting can also be made

from the VOICE EFFECT [VARIATION] button on the panel. (This button is effec-

tive only when the [DSP] button is on.)

PARAMETER Displays the variation parameter. (This differs depending on the effect type and can-

not be changed.)

[6 ]–

[8 ]

VALUE Adjusts the value of the DSP variation parameter.

16 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Disabling Automatic Selection of Voice Sets (Effects, etc.)

Each Voice is linked to its default VOICE SET parameter settings. Usually these settings are automatically called up

when a Voice is selected. However, you can also disable this feature by the operation in the relevant display as

explained below. For example, if you want to change the Voice yet keep the same Harmony effect used with the

previous Voice, set the HARMONY/ECHO parameter to OFF (in the display explained below).

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET  TAB [E][F] VOICE SET

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired keyboard part.

3 Use the [4 ]–[7 ] buttons to turn on or off of each item for the selected Part.

When the button is set to ON, the corresponding parameter settings are called up automatically together with the

Voice selection. For information on which parameters are linked to each item, see below.

[4 ] VOICE Corresponds to the parameter settings of the COMMON, CONTROLLER, and

SOUND pages.

[5 ] EFFECT Corresponds to the parameter settings of 1 and 2 in the EFFECT/EQ page.

[6 ] EQ Corresponds to the parameter settings of 3 in the EFFECT/EQ page.

[7 ] HARMONY/

ECHO

Corresponds to the HARMONY page.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 17

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

The Organ World Voices can be edited by adjusting the footage levers, adding the

attack sound, applying effects and equalizer, etc. If you want, you can also change the

Rotary Speaker speed and adjust the Vibrato setting.

1 Select the desired Organ Voice in the Organ World display.

1-1

Press the [ORGAN WORLD] button.

1-2 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the organ type which you want to

edit.

If you selected the CONCERT or THEATRE type, go on to step 3. Only

effect/EQ parameters can be edited for those types.

1-3 Press the [D]/[I] button several times until the Preset Select display is called

up.

1-4 Use [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to select the desired preset.

2 Press the [D]/[I] button several times to call up the relevant setting display (FOOTAGES

or VOLUME&ATTACK)

For information on the available parameters in each display, see pages 17 and 18.

3 Use the [A] (EFFECT) buttons to call up the effect/EQ setting display.

For information on the available parameters in each display, see pages 15 and 18.

4 As necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) to be edited and edit

the Voice by using the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons or sliders.

5 Play the keyboard.

 FOOTAGES Page

Editing Organ Voices (Organ World)

After editing, go to the Registra-

tion Memory function and save

the setting. The settings will be

lost if you select another Voice or

turn the power of the instrument

off without executing the Save

operation. For details on the

operation, refer to the Owner’s

Manual.

The available parameters differ depend-

ing on the Organ type.

NOTICE

NOTE

[A] EFFECT Opens the effect/EQ setting display (page 18).

[C] ROTARY (Rotary

Speaker Speed)/

TREMOLO

(Vintage/Home type

only)

Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a rotary

speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (DSP TYPE parameter in the effect/

EQ setting display), and the VOICE EFFECT [DSP] button is turned on.

[F] VIBRATO

(Vintage/Home type

only)

Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or OFF.

For details on how to adjust the

Footage levels, refer to the

Owner’s Manual, chapter 1.

18 Tyros5 Reference Manual

 VOLUME&ATTACK

 Effect/EQ related display

Same parameters as in the VOICE SET “EFFECT/EQ” Page explained on page 15.

[G]/[H] VIBRATO DEPTH

(Vintage/Home type

only)

Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels: 1 (low), 2 (mid), or 3 (high).

[D]/[I]

FOOTAGES/

VOLUME &

ATTACK / PRESETS

Opens the Preset Select display or the relevant setting display (FOOTAGES or VOL-

UME & ATTACK)

[1 ] VOL (Volume) Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic bar, the

greater the volume.

[2 ] RESP (Response) Affects both the attack and release (page 14) portion of the sound, increasing or

decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release, based on the FOOT-

AGES controls. The higher the value, the slower the swell and release.

[3 ] VIBRATO SPEED

(Vibrato Speed)

(Vintage/Home type

only)

Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On/Off ([F] but-

ton) and Vibrato Depth ([G]/[H] buttons).

[4 ] MODE The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the FIRST

mode, attack (percussive sound) is applied only to the first notes played and held

simultaneously; while the first notes are held, any subsequently played notes have no

attack applied. In the EACH mode, attack is applied equally to all notes.

[5 ]–

[7 ]

4’, 2 2/3’, 2’ These determine the attack sound volume of the Organ Flutes Voice. The 4’, 2-2/3’

and 2’ controls increase or reduce the volume of attack sound at the corresponding

footages. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the attack sound volume.

[8 ] LENG (Length) Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immedi-

ately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar, the longer the decay.

Same as the

FOOTAGES display

Tyros5 Reference Manual 19

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

In addition to enjoying the Presets, you can create your original Ensemble Voice by editing various parameters as

described here. These relevant parameters determine which note is played by each Part, which Preset Voice is used with

each Part, when sounds are actually produced, and how the pitch envelope is produced. These settings result in a highly

realistic ensemble sound, as if acoustic instruments were played by real artists.

1 Select the desired Ensemble Voice.

1-1

Press the [ENSEMBLE] button.

1-2 Press one of the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to select the Ensemble Voice which you want to edit.

If necessary, press the [J] (PRESETS) button, then select the desired one from the various Preset Ensemble

Voices.

For information on how to select more Ensemble Voices, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

2 Press the [E] (EDIT) button to call up the Ensemble Voice (edit) display.

3 Use the TAB [][] buttons to call up the relevant setting page.

For information on the available parameters in each page, see pages 20–24.

4 Use the [A]–[E] buttons to select a parameter, then use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons or

sliders to set the value for each part.

5 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the edit display.

6 Press the [J] (PRESET) button to save your edited Voice.

For details on the Save operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual, Basic Operations.

Editing Ensemble Voices (Ensemble Voice Edit)

1 4

The edited data will be lost if you

change to another Voice or you

turn the power off without execut-

ing the Save operation.

NOTICE

20 Tyros5 Reference Manual

 ASSIGN / HARMONY

[1 ]–

[5 ]

KEY ASSIGN

TYPE

Determines the Key Assignment type. This is applied commonly to all Voice parts.

For details, refer to the Ensemble Voice Key Assign Type List below.

[6 ]–

[7 ]

HARMONY

(Harmony Type)

Same as in the [FUNCTION]  [F] HARMONY/ECHO display. See “Using Key-

board Harmony/Echo” on page 8. Only two types (“4-WAY CLOSE 1” and “4-WAY

CLOSE 2”) are available.

[8 ] ON/OFF Turns the Harmony effect on or off.

Ensemble Voice Key Assignment Structure

Each Part monitors all the pressed notes and plays the appropriate notes according to the settings you made.

For details about the settings, refer to the Ensemble Voice Key Assign Status List. You can conveniently call

up the settings for all parts at once. The current setting of each Part (Key Assignment Status) is displayed at the

bottom of its own keyboard figure (see above) on the screen.

Orange: Active keys

Gray: Ignored keys

Octave

Filter 1

Filter 2 Assign

(Assignment)

Key off retrigger

Key Assign Status (page 21)

All Notes

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Filter 1

Filter 2

Assign

Tyros5 Reference Manual 21

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

Ensemble Voice Key Assign Status List (Indication only)

* Indicates an integer of 1 or higher.

Ensemble Voice Key Assign Type List

Parameter On-screen

display

Full name Description

Filter 1/

Filter 2

F*D First * in Descend-

ing

The highest * notes (“*” indicates the num-

ber of notes) are selected from the input

notes and sent to the next stage.

A*D After *-th in

Descending

The *th highest note and any higher notes

do not sound, but all lower notes are

selected from the input notes and sent to the

next stage.

F*A First * in Ascend-

ing

The lowest * notes are selected from the

input notes and sent to the next stage.

A*A After *-th in

Ascending

The *th lowest note and any lower notes do

not sound, but all higher notes are selected

from the input notes and sent to the next

stage.

THRU Through All input notes are sent as is to the next stage.

Assign HI Highest Of the notes remaining after Filter 2, the highest is selected.

LO Lowest Of the notes remaining after Filter 2, the lowest is selected.

EA Earliest Of the notes remaining after Filter 2, the one input first of all is

selected.

LA Latest Of the notes remaining after Filter 2, the one input last of all is selected.

Key off

retrigger

RTG Retrigger Key Assign is updated whenever some of the keys are released (and

notes satisfying all applicable conditions are played).

(Not dis-

played)

- Whenever keys are released, the corresponding voices simply stop

playing and are not reassigned. However, when you play in legato,

notes will be retriggered regardless of whether Key off retrigger is off

or on (Yes or No in the table below).

*=2

No. Key Assign Type Description

Key off retrig-

ger (*3)

1 Unison 1—latest This setting results in complete unison. If one key is

played, all four parts will produce the same note. If

multiple keys are played, the unison note will be

selected based on the last one played.

Yes

2 Unison 2—highest and

lowest

This setting produces unison or a two-note harmony.

If one key is played, all four parts will produce the

same note; however, if two or more are played, the

parts will be split between the lowest and highest.

Yes

3 4 Voice Close—all parts on

retrigger

This setting is suitable for closed chords. If one key is played, all four

parts will produce a sound. If two or more keys are played, the parts will

be divided among the various notes of the chord.

Yes

4 4 Voice Close—all parts on No

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 1

Part 3

Part 2

Part 4

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

22 Tyros5 Reference Manual

*1: In three-voice ensembles, Part 4 moves in the same way as Part 1.

*2: In two-voice ensembles, Part 3 moves in the same way as Part 1; Part 4 moves in the same way as Part 2.

*3: With ensemble types that support key off retriggering, whenever a part stops playing because the corresponding key is released, it will be

reassigned based on the keys still held down and will play the appropriate note.

5 4 Voice Open—all parts on

retrigger

This setting is suitable for open chords. If one key is played, all four

parts will produce a sound. If two or more keys are played, the parts will

be divided among the various notes of the chord.

Yes

6 4 Voice Open—all parts on No

7 4 Voice Incremental 1

—from highest retrigger

The more keys played, the greater the number of parts that produce a

sound, with priority given to higher parts. For example, Part 1 is played

for one key, Part 1 and Part 2 are played for two keys, and so on.

Yes

8 4 Voice Incremental 1

—from highest

9 4 Voice Incremental 2

—from lowest retrigger

The more keys played, the greater the number of parts that produce a

sound, with priority given to lower parts. For example, Part 4 is played

for one key, Part 4 and Part 3 are played for two keys, and so on.

Yes

10 4 Voice Incremental 2

—from lowest

11 3 Voice Close—all parts on

retrigger

This setting produces a three-note ensemble for closed chords. (*1) Yes

12 3 Voice Close—all parts on No

13 3 Voice Open—all parts on

retrigger

This setting produces a three-note ensemble for open chords. (*1) Yes

14 3 Voice Open—all parts on No

15 3 Voice Incremental 1

—from highest retrigger

Three-note version of an ensemble with priority given to higher parts.

For example, Parts 1 & 4 are played for one key, Parts 1 & 4 and Part 2

are played for two keys, and so on. (*1)

Yes

16 3 Voice Incremental 1

—from highest

17 3 Voice Incremental 2

—from lowest retrigger

Three-note version of an ensemble with priority given to lower parts.

For example, Part 3 is played for one key, Part 3 and Part 2 are played

for two keys, and so on. (*1)

Yes

18 3 Voice Incremental 2

—from lowest

19 2 Voice Close—all parts on

retrigger

This setting produces a two-note ensemble for closed chords. (*2) Yes

20 2 Voice Close—all parts on No

21 2 Voice Incremental 1

—from highest retrigger

Two-note version of an ensemble with priority given to higher parts. For

example, Parts 1 & 3 are played for one key, and Parts 1 & 3 and Parts 2

& 4 are played for two keys. (*2)

Yes

22 2 Voice Incremental 1

—from highest

23 2 Voice Incremental 2

—from lowest retrigger

Two-note version of an ensemble with priority given to lower parts. For

example, Parts 2 & 4 are played for one key, and Parts 1 & 3 and Parts 2

& 4 are played for two keys. (*2)

Yes

24 2 Voice Incremental 2

—from lowest

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 1

Part 3

Part 2

Part 4

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 1

Part 2

Part 1

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 2

Part 3

Part 4

Part 3

Part 4Part 4

Tyros5 Reference Manual 23

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

 VOLUME / PAN

 TUNE / EFFECT

[A] VOICE Allows you to re-select the Voices for each part. You can also select this by using the

PART SELECT buttons. The PART 1–4 settings correspond to the PART SELECT

[LEFT], [PART 1-3] buttons.

[C] PART ON/OFF Turns each part on or off. The PART 1–4 settings correspond to the PART ON/OFF

[LEFT], [PART 1-3] buttons.

[D] PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected part.

[E] VOLUME Determines the volume of each part or channel, giving you fine control over the bal-

ance of all the parts. These parameters correspond to the LEFT and RIGHT 1–3

parameters of the VOL/VOICE tab in the MIXING CONSOLE display.

[3 ]–

[6 ]

Selects the part to which the editing is applied, then set the value for each part.

Only the recommended Voices that are suitable for Ensemble Voices can be selected.

NOTE

[B] OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down for

each keyboard part. The value set here is added to the setting made via the OCTAVE

[-]/[+] buttons.

[C] TUNING Determines the pitch of each keyboard part in cents.

[D] REVERB DEPTH Adjusts the reverb depth.

In musical terms, a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone. (100 cents equal one semitone.)

NOTE

24 Tyros5 Reference Manual

 HUMANIZE

[E] VIBRATO

SENSITIVITY

Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more pro-

nounced Vibrato.

[3 ]–

[6 ]

Selects the part to which the editing is applied, then set the value for each part.

[B] TIMING Determines the delay time between the moment the actual sound for each Part is pro-

duced and the moment a few notes are pressed.

[C] PITCH RANGE Determines the pitch vibration (pitch range) when the sound is being produced. The

higher the value, the greater the pitch range.

[D] ATTACK PITCH

RANGE

Determines the actual pitch envelope immediately after the sound is produced. The

higher the value, the greater the pitch range.

[E] ATTACK PITCH

ADJUST TIME

Determines the time between the moment the sound is produced and the moment the

pitch envelope reaches the correct value.

[3 ]–

[6 ]

Selects the part to which the editing is applied, then set the value for each part.

Attack Pitch Range

While a note is held

Time

Pitch Change Range

Attack Pitch Adjust Time Pitch Range

Tyros5 Reference Manual 25

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Styles

– Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Contents

Selecting the Chord Fingering Type .............................................................. 26

Style Playback Related Settings ..................................................................... 28

Memorizing Original Settings to a One Touch Setting................................. 30

Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) ......................................................... 31

• Realtime Recording.................................................................................... 33

• Step Recording ........................................................................................... 37

• Style Assembly........................................................................................... 37

• Editing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE)...................................................... 39

• Editing Data for Each Channel (CHANNEL)............................................ 41

• Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER) ................................. 42

Style Types (Characteristics)

The particular type of Style is indicated at the upper left of the Style name in the Style Selection display. The defining

characteristics of these Styles and their performance advantages are described below.

• Pro: These Styles provide professional and exciting arrangements combined with perfect playability. The resulting

accompaniment exactly follows the chords of the player. As a result, your chord changes and colorful harmonies

are instantly transformed into lifelike musical accompaniment.

• Session: These Styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and

changes, as well as special riffs with chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add

“spice” and a professional touch to your performances of certain songs and in certain genres. Keep in mind, how-

ever, that the Styles may not necessarily be appropriate—or even harmonically correct—for all songs and for all

chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad for a country song may result in a “jazzy”

seventh chord, or playing an on-bass chord may result in inappropriate or unexpected accompaniment.

• Free Play: These Styles are characterized by rubato performance. You can perform freely with remarkably expres-

sive accompaniment, without being constrained by a strict tempo.

• +Audio: Indicates the Audio Style. For more information on Audio Styles, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

For the Preset Style List, refer to the Data List downloadable from Yamaha Manual Library.

26 Tyros5 Reference Manual

The Chord Fingering type determines how chords are specified for Style playback. You can select desired one from

the seven types.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [ E][F] CHORD FIN-

GERING

2 Press the [1 ]–[3 ] buttons to select a fingering.

For information on each fingering type, see page 27.

Selecting the Chord Fingering Type

Chord Tutor Function

With this function shown in the right half of this display, you can see which notes to press for specifying the

chord. If you know a chord name but don’t know how to play it, use this function. Although this function

shows how to play a chord only in case of “Fingered,” the indication is useful also when a type other than “Sin-

gle Finger” is selected.

Use the [6 ] buttons to select the chord root then use the [7 ]–[8 ] buttons to select the chord

type. The notes you need to play are shown in the display.

Depending on the chord, some notes may be omitted.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 27

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Chord Fingering Types

SINGLE FINGER Makes it simple to produce orchestrated accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and

minor-seventh chords by pressing only one, two or three keys on the Chord section of the

keyboard.

MULTI FINGER Automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings, so you can use either type

of fingering without having to switch fingering types.

FINGERED Lets you specify the chord by pressing the notes making up a chord in the left hand section

of the keyboard when ACMP is turned on or the Left part is turned on. For information on

which notes to press for each chord, refer to the Data List (Chord Types Recognized in the

Fingered Mode) downloadable from Yamaha Manual Library, or use the Chord Tutor func-

tion on the right-half of this display.

FINGERED ON BASS Accepts the same fingerings as Fingered; however, the lowest note played in the Chord sec-

tion of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing you to play “on bass” chords. (In the

Fingered type, the root of the chord is always used as the bass note.)

FULL KEYBOARD Detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar to Fingered,

even if you split the notes between your left and right hands—for example, playing a bass

note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord with your left

hand and a melody note with your right.

AI FINGERED Basically the same as Fingered, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to

indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.).

AI FULL KEYBOARD This type is similar to Full Keyboard, with the exception that less than three notes can be

played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th, 11th and 13th

chords cannot be played.

FINGERED* This type is called up automatically when the CHORD DETECTION AREA is set to

“UPPER.” In this status, the whole right-hand (UPPER) section works as the Chord section

as well as melody performance. As to which key should be pressed, this is basically same as

“FINGERED,” except that “1+5,” “1+8” and Chord Cancel are not available. For more

information, refer to “Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass with

Your Left Hand” in the Owner’s Manual.

“AI” stands for “Artificial Intelligence.”

For a major chord,

press the root key only.

For a minor chord,

simultaneously press

the root key and a black

key to its left.

For a seventh chord,

simultaneously press the

root key and a white key to

its left.

For a minor-seventh chord,

simultaneously press the root

key and both a white and black

key to its left.

NOTE

28 Tyros5 Reference Manual

The instrument has a variety of settings for Style playback which can be accessed in the display below.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [ E][F] STYLE SET-

TING

2 Use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons for each setting.

Style Playback Related Settings

[1 ] STOP ACMP When [ACMP] is turned on and [SYNC START] is off, you can play chords in the

chord section of the keyboard with the Style stopped, and still hear the accompani-

ment chord. In this condition—called “Stop Accompaniment”—any valid chord fin-

gerings are recognized and the chord root/type are shown in the display. Here, you can

determine whether the chord played in the chord section will sound or not in the Stop

Accompaniment status.

OFF: The chord played in the chord section will not sound.

STYLE: The chord played in the chord section will sound via the Voices for the Pad

part and the Bass channel of the selected Style.

FIXED: The chord played in the chord section will sound via the specified Voice,

regardless of the selected Style.

[2 ] OTS LINK

TIMING

This applies to the OTS Link function. This parameter determines the timing in which

the One Touch Settings change with the MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] change. (The

[OTS LINK] button must be on.)

REAL TIME: One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a MAIN

VARIATION button.

NEXT BAR: One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a

MAIN VARIATION button.

[3 ] SYNCHRO STOP

WINDOW

This determines how long you can hold a chord before the Synchro Stop function is

automatically cancelled. When the [SYNC STOP] button is turned on and this is set to

a value other than “OFF,” this automatically cancels the Synchro Stop function if you

hold a chord for longer than the time set here. This conveniently resets Style playback

control to normal, letting you release the keys and still have the Style play. In other

words, if you release the keys sooner than the time set here, the Synchro Stop function

works.

When the selected Style contains MegaVoices, unexpected sounds may result when this is set to “STYLE.”

NOTE

When you record a Song, the chord detected by playing the Stop Accompaniment can be recorded regard-

less of the setting here. Please note that both the sounding Voice and chord data is recorded when set to

“STYLE,” and only the chord data is recorded when set to “OFF” or “FIXED.”

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 29

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

[4 ] STYLE TOUCH Turns touch response for the Style playback on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the Style

volume changes in response to your playing strength in the chord section of the key-

board.

[5 ]/

[6 ]

SECTION SET Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting different

Styles (when Style playback is stopped). When set to “OFF” and Style playback is

stopped, the active section is maintained even if the different Style is selected. When

any of the MAIN A–D sections is not included in the Style data, the nearest section is

automatically selected. For example, when MAIN D is not contained in the selected

Style, MAIN C will be called up.

[7 ] TEMPO This determines whether the tempo setting of the Style changes or not when you

change Styles.

LOCK: The previous tempo setting is always maintained.

HOLD: During Style playback, the previous tempo setting is maintained. When Style

playback is stopped, the tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo for the

selected Style.

RESET: The tempo always changes to that of the initial default tempo for the selected

Style.

[8 ] PART ON/OFF This determines whether the Style Channel On/Off status changes or not when you

change Styles.

LOCK: The Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is always maintained.

HOLD: During Style playback, the Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is

maintained. When Style playback is stopped, all Style Channels are set to On.

RESET: All Style Channels are set to On.

30 Tyros5 Reference Manual

You can memorize your original panel settings to a One Touch Setting (OTS). The newly created One Touch Setting

will be saved in the User drive as a Style, and you can call up the One Touch Setting as a part of the Style.

1 Select the desired Style to memorize your One Touch Setting.

2 Make the desired panel settings, such as those for Voices and effects.

3 Press the [MEMORY] button in the REGISTRATION MEMORY section.

The REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS display appears. However, you do not need to set these items,

since the On/Off settings in this display do not affect the One Touch Settings.

4 Press the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] button to which you

wish to memorize your panel settings.

Follow the onscreen message. To memorize various panel settings to other buttons,

press the [G] (NO) button, then repeat steps 2–4.

5 Press the [F] (YES) button to call up the Style Selection display

and save the One Touch Setting as a Style.

For instructions on saving, refer to the Owner’s Manual, Basic Operations.

Memorizing Original Settings to a One Touch Setting

For OTS buttons to which your original

panel settings have not been memo-

rized, the OTS settings of the original

Style will be maintained.

NOTE

The memorized One Touch Set-

tings will be lost if you change the

Style or turn the power off without

executing the Save operation.

NOTICE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 31

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

The Style Creator function lets you create your original Style by recording the rhythm pattern via the keyboard and

using already-recorded Style data. Basically, select a preset Style that is closest to the type you want to create, then

record the rhythm pattern, bass line, chord backing, or phrase (referred to as “Source Pattern” in the Style Creator) for

each channel of each Section.

 Style Data Structure—Consisting of Source Patterns

A Style is made up of the different Sections (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) and each Section has eight separate channels,

each of which is referred to as “Source Pattern.” With the Style Creator feature, you can create a Style by separately

recording the Source Pattern for each channel, or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles.

Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator)

Limitations on the Audio part:

• If you select a preset Audio Style as starting data, the Audio part will be used as is. The Audio part cannot be

deleted, edited or created from scratch.

• The created Style containing the Audio part can be used only via an instrument that supports Audio Styles as well

as the SFF GE format.

• The Audio part cannot be copied from another Style or Section in the ASSEMBLE page. If you want to use a spe-

cific Audio part, make sure to select the corresponding Audio Style before calling up the Style Creator display.

Phrase 2

Phrase 1

Pad

Chord 2

Chord 1

Bass

Rhythm 2

Rhythm 1

Audio Part

Recorded or copied from another Style

Used as is when selecting an Audio Style as starting

data. This cannot be edited or deleted.

Main A

Main B

Fill In

Intro

Ending 2

Ending 3

Create a Source Pattern for

each channel separately

32 Tyros5 Reference Manual

 Basic Procedure for creating a Style

1 Select the desired Style for the starting data.

2 Press the [CREATOR] button, then the [B] (STYLE CREATOR) button to call up the Style

Creator display.

3 From the BASIC page, select a Section, then make other settings as necessary.

• Select a Section to be edited or recorded. If the REC CHANNEL indication is shown in the lower half section of

the display, press the [EXIT] button, press the [A] to select “1 SECTION,” then use the [3 ]–[4 ] but-

tons to select a Section.

• If you want to create a Style entirely from scratch, press the [C] (NEW STYLE) button to call up an empty new

Style.

• For the current Section, select the pattern length via the [5 ]–[6 ] buttons. After selecting, press the [D]

(EXECUTE) button to actually enter the specified length.

Note that if an Audio Style is selected as starting data, changing the pattern length deletes the corresponding

Audio part.

• For the entire current Style, set the Tempo and Time Signature in the display called up via the [B] button.

4 Create the Source Pattern for each channel.

• Realtime Recording on the BASIC page (page 33)

Lets you record the Style by simply playing the keyboard.

• Step Recording on the EDIT page (page 37)

Lets you enter each note individually.

• Style Assembly on the ASSEMBLY page (page 37)

Lets you copy various patterns from other preset Styles or Styles you have already created.

5 Edit the already recorded channel data.

• Editing the channel data on the GROOVE (page 39), CHANNEL (page 41), and EDIT (page 37) pages

Lets you change the rhythmic feel, quantizing and velocity, etc.

• Editing the SFF parameters on the PARAMETER page (page 42)

Lets you copy various patterns from another preset Styles or Styles you have already created.

6 Repeat steps 3–5 as desired.

7 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the created Style.

For details, refer to “Basic Operations” in the Owner’s Manual.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 33

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Realtime Recording

In the BASIC page, you can record your original rhythm pattern from the keyboard.

 Recording Rhythm Channels 1–2

The procedure below applies to Step 4 in the Basic Procedure on page 32.

• If you select an Audio Style as starting data:

Playback of the Audio part can be turned on or off via the [H] button, but it cannot be edited or deleted. Note that

the rhythm pattern of this part will be used in the new Style you intend to create. If you want to create a rhythm

phrase in addition to the Audio part, follow the steps below.

1 From the BASIC page, while holding down the [F] (REC CH) button, press the [1 ] or

[2 ] button to select the desired channel as Record target.

A Rhythm channel can be selected as Record target no matter whether already recorded data is included or not. If

already recorded data is included in the selected channel, you can record notes additionally to the existing data.

Realtime Recording Characteristics in the Style Creator

• Loop Recording

Style playback repeats the rhythm patterns of several measures in a “loop,” and Style recording is also done using

loops. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section, the two measures are repeatedly

recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop), letting you record while hearing

previously recorded material.

• Overdub Recording

This lets you record new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the original data.

In Style recording, the recorded data is not deleted, except when using functions such as Rhythm Clear (page 34)

and Delete (page 35). For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section, the two measures are

repeated many times. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition, letting you overdub new

material to the loop while hearing previously recorded material. When creating a Style based on an existing

internal Style, overdub recording is applied only to the rhythm channels. For all other channels (except rhythm),

you need to delete the original data before recording.

34 Tyros5 Reference Manual

2 If necessary, select a Voice then practice the rhythm pattern to be recorded.

Press the [1 ] or [2 ] button (selected channel) to call up the Voice Selection display then select the desired

Voice such as Drum Kit. After selecting, press the [EXIT] button to return to the original display. With the selected

Voice, practice the rhythm pattern to be recorded.

• Available Voices for recording

For the RHY1 channel, any except the Organ World Voices can be used for recording.

For the RHY2 channel, only drum/SFX kits can be used for recording.

3 Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to start recording.

As the already recorded data plays back, use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to turn each channel on or off as desired. If

you selected an Audio Style as starting data, turn the Audio part on or off via the [H] button.

4 As soon as loop playback returns to the first beat in the first measure, start playing the

rhythm pattern to be recorded.

If the rhythm is difficult to play in real time, break it up into individual parts and play each separately as the play-

back loops, as shown in the example below.

If you make a mistake or play any wrong notes:

You can delete notes of a specific drum instrument. While holding down the [E] (RHY CLEAR) button, press the

corresponding key on the keyboard.

5 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

If you want to add more notes, press the [START/STOP] button again to continue recording.

6 Press the [1 ] or [2 ] button to disengage Record.

Loop 1st round

Bass Drum

Loop 3rd round

Bass Drum

Snare Drum

Hi-Hat

Loop 2nd round

Bass Drum

Snare Drum

Tyros5 Reference Manual 35

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

 Recording Bass, Chord 1–2, Pad and Phrase 1–2

The procedure below applies to Step 4 in the Basic Procedure on page 32.

1 From the BASIC page, while holding down the [F] (REC CH) button, press one of the

[3 ]–[8 ] buttons to select the desired channel as Record target.

A confirmation message appears, prompting you whether or not to delete the already recorded data of the selected

channel. Press the [G] (YES) button to delete data and the selected channel is specified as the Record target. Note

that channel data of the preset Style cannot be overdubbed.

2 If necessary, select a Voice then practice the bass line, chord backing, or phrase to be

recorded.

Press one of the [3 ]–[8 ] buttons (selected channel) to call up the Voice Selection display then select the

desired Voice. After selecting, press the [EXIT] button to return to the original display. With the selected Voice,

practice the phrase or chord backing to be recorded.

• Available Voices for recording

Any except for the Organ World Voices/Drum Kit/SFX kit Voices can be used for recording.

• Record a phrase in C Maj7 (for playing appropriate notes while chords change during performance)

Rules when recording a Main or Fill

With the default initial settings, the Source Root/Chord is set to CMaj7. This means that you should record a

Source Pattern using a CMaj7 scale, which will change according to the chords you specify during normal per-

formance. Record a bass line, phrase or chord backing which you want to hear when CMaj7 is specified. See

below for details.

• Use only the CMaj7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE channels (i.e., C, D, E, G, A, and B).

• Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD channels (i.e., C, E, G, and B).

If you observe this rule, Style playback notes are appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you

make during your performance.

Rules when recording an Intro or Ending

These Sections are designed assuming that the chord is not changed during playback. This is why you need not

observe the rule for Main and Fill-In Sections described above, and you can create special chord progressions

when recording. However, follow the rules below since the Source Root/Chord is set to CMaj7.

• When recording the Intro, make sure that the recorded phrase leads properly into the CMaj7 scale.

• When recording the Ending, make sure that the recorded phrase begins with or properly follows a CMaj7

scale.

CRC CRC

C = Chord note

C, R = Recommended note

36 Tyros5 Reference Manual

• Setting the Source Root/Chord if necessary

Although the Source Root/Chord is set to CMaj7 as described above, you can change this to any desired key or

chord. Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the PARAMETER page, and set the SOURCE ROOT and

CHORD to the desired Root and Chord type. Keep in mind that when you change the Source Chord from the

default CMaj7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change. For details, refer to

page 43.

3 Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to start recording.

Since already recorded data plays back, use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to turn on or off each channel as desired. If

you selected an Audio Style as starting data, turn the Audio part on or off via the [H] button.

4 As soon as loop playback returns to the first beat in the first measure, start playing the

bass line, chord backing or phrase to be recorded.

5 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

If you want to add more notes, press the [START/STOP] button again to continue recording.

• To hear the playback sound of the already recorded channels with another Source Chord/Root:

1) Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the PARAMETER page.

2) While holding down the [F] (REC CH) button, press the [1 ] or [2 ] button to set a Rhythm channel to

REC.

3) Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to start playback.

4) On the PARAMETER page, set the PLAY ROOT and CHORD to the desired Chord root and Chord type.

The above operation lets you hear how the Source Pattern is played back via chord changes during normal perfor-

mance.

6 Press the [1 ] or [2 ] button to disengage Record.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 37

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Step Recording

This section applies to Step 4 of the Basic Procedure on page 32. After selecting a Section and making other settings

on the BASIC page, call up the STEP RECORD display via the instructions below, then execute Step Recording.

1) From the BASIC page, while holding down the [F] (REC CH) button, press one of the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to

select the desired channel as Record target.

2) Use the TAB [F] button to call up the EDIT page.

3) If “SYS/EX.” is shown at the position corresponding to the [F] button, press the [F] button to call up the Channel

Edit display.

4) Press the [G] (STEP REC) button to call up the STEP RECORD display.

The Step Recording procedure in the Style Creator is essentially same as that in Song Creator (page 59), with the

exception of the following points:

• Unlike in Song Creator, the End Mark position cannot be changed in the Style Creator. This is because setting the

Pattern Length on the BASIC page determines the End Mark position. For example, if you select a Section of four

measures or you set the Pattern Length to “4” on the BASIC page, the End Mark position is automatically set to the

end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed.

• Unlike in Song Creator, a Recording channel can be set on the BASIC page. It cannot be set on the EDIT page.

• Unlike in Song Creator, Chord and Lyrics data cannot be entered. This is because such data is not necessary for

Style playback.

For instructions on Step Recording, refer to pages 60–63. For information on the EDIT page (Event List display in

Song Creator), refer to page 72.

Style Assembly

This allows you to copy channel data as a Source Pattern from another preset Style to

the currently created Style. Use this function if you find a favorite rhythm pattern,

bass line, chord backing or phrase from another Style.

The instructions below apply to Step 4 of the Basic Procedure on page 32. After

selecting a Section and making other settings on the BASIC page, execute the

instructions below.

1 Call up the operation display.

[CREATOR]  [B] STYLE CREATOR  TAB [E][F ] ASSEMBLY

2 If necessary, select the Section to be edited.

Even if the Section to be edited has already been selected on the BASIC page, you

can change the Section also on this page. Press the desired Section button on the

panel to call up the SECTION window, use the [6 ]–[7 ] buttons if you

want to select a Fill in, then press the [8 ] (OK) button to actually enter the

selection.

An Audio part cannot be copied from

another Style.

If you select an Audio Style as starting

data, the Audio part cannot be replaced

with different data.

NOTE

Intro 4 and Ending 4 can be selected on

the display then created as part of your

original Style although they are not

available on the panel.

NOTE

38 Tyros5 Reference Manual

3 Replace the Source Pattern of the specific channel with that of another Style.

3-1

Select the desired channel to be replaced via the [A]–[D] and [F]–[I] buttons.

3-2 Press the same button of the selected channel to call up the Style Selection display.

3-3 Select the desired Style, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the original display.

3-4 Select the Section and Channel of the selected Style via the [2 ]–[5 ] buttons.

3-5 Confirm the sound with the newly assigned Source Pattern via the [6 ]–[7 ] buttons.

For details, see “Playing the Style During Style Assembly” below.

4 As desired, execute the same operations for another channel.

Playing the Style During Style Assembly

While you are assembling a Style, you can play back the Style and select the method of playback. Use the

[6 ]/[7 ] (PLAY TYPE) buttons in the Style Assembly display to select the playback method.

• SOLO: Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. Any channels set to REC in the REC

CHANNEL display on the BASIC Page are played back simultaneously.

• ON: Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. Any channels set to other than OFF in the

REC CHANNEL display on the BASIC Page are played back simultaneously.

• OFF: Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page.

3-5

3-3

3-1,

3-2

3-4

[A]–[D],

[F]–[I]

buttons

Tyros5 Reference Manual 39

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Editing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE)

By changing the timing of all the notes and velocities, you can edit the rhythmic feel for each channel of the current

Section selected on the BASIC page or the panel button. The instructions below apply to Step 5 of the Basic Procedure

on page 32.

1 In the GROOVE Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu, then edit the data

by using the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons.

1 GROOVE

This lets you add swing to the music or change the “feel” of the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing (clock)

of the Style. The Groove settings are applied to all channels of the Section selected on the BASIC page.

[1 ]/

[2 ]

ORIGINAL BEAT Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8

Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected,

Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.

[3 ]/

[4 ]

BEAT

CONVERTER

Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parame-

ter above) to the selected value. For example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8

Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are shifted

to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when

ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting.

[5 ]/

[6 ]

SWING Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the

ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT

value is “8 Beat,” the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th

beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce

different degrees of swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most

pronounced.

[7 ]/

[8 ]

FINE Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The

“PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early, while “HEAVY” settings

delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which

beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat—but not including the first

beat—will be played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is

selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types produce medium

effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect.

40 Tyros5 Reference Manual

2 DYNAMICS

This changes the velocity/volume (or accent) of certain notes in Style playback. The Dynamics settings are applied

to each channel or all channels of the Section selected on the BASIC page.

2 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display.

The values which are shown in the STRENGTH, EXPAND/COMP. and BOOST/CUT parameters are expressed as

a percentage of the last set value.

After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you are

not satisfied with the Groove or Dynamics results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous opera-

tion can be undone.

[1 ]/

[2 ]

CHANNEL Selects the desired channel (part) to which Dynamics is to be applied. The selected

channel is shown at the upper left of the display.

[3 ]/

[4 ]

ACCENT TYPE Determines the type of accent applied—in other words, which notes in the part(s) are

emphasized with the Dynamics settings.

[6 ] STRENGTH Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The

higher the value, the stronger the effect.

[7 ] EXPAND/COMP. Expands or compresses the range of velocity values. Values higher than 100% expand

the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% compress it.

[8 ] BOOST/CUT Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above 100%

boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 41

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Editing Data for Each Channel (CHANNEL)

You can edit recorded data for each channel of the current Section selected on the BASIC page or via the panel

buttons. The instructions below apply to Step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 32.

1 In the CHANNEL Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the particular edit operation.

1 QUANTIZE

Same as in the Song Creator (page 70), with the exception of the two additional available parameters below.

2 VELOCITY CHANGE

Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel, according to the percentage specified here.

3 BAR COPY

This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the spec-

ified channel.

4 BAR CLEAR

This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel.

5 REMOVE EVENT

This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel.

2 Use the [1 ]/[2 ] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited.

The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display.

3 Use the [4 ]–[8 ] buttons to edit the data.

4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display.

After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you are

not satisfied with the results of the edit. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be

undone.

5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to execute the Save operation.

Eighth notes with swing

Sixteenth notes with swing

[4 ] TOP Specifies the first (TOP) and last (LAST) measures in the region to be copied.

[5 ]LAST

[6 ] DEST Specifies the first measure of the destination location, to which the data is to be cop-

ied.

The edited Style will be lost if you

change to another Style or turn

the power to the instrument off

without executing the Save opera-

tion.

NOTICE

42 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER)

The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment (Style playback) know-how into a single

unified format. Setting the SFF related parameters determines how the original notes are converted to the actual

sounded notes based on the chord you specify in the Chord area of the keyboard. The conversion flow is shown below.

The instructions below apply to Step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 32.

1 In the PARAMETER Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the

particular edit operation.

For details on the edit operations, see page 43.

Set these parameters

before recording.

Set these parameters

after recording.

Source Pattern settings

• Source Root

• Source Chord

Determines what key and what chord type are used for playing.

Note Conversion from the Source Pattern

• NTR (Conversion via the Chord Root change) …page 44

• NTT (Conversion via the Chord Type change) … page 44

Chord changes during normal performance

Octave Setting of the Converted Notes

• High Key (Upper octave limit of the Note Transposition)

• Note Limit (Note range between the highest and lowest notes)

Others

• RTR (How the note pitch changes in response to chord changes)

Actual Sounded Notes

The parameters you can set here are

compatible with the SFF GE format. This

is why the Style files created on this

instrument can be played back only on

instruments which are compatible with

SFF GE.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 43

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

2 Use the [1 ]/[2 ] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited.

The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display.

3 Use the [3 ]–[8 ] buttons to edit the data.

For details on editable parameters, see the explanations following Step 4 below.

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to execute the Save operation.

1 SOURCE (PLAY) ROOT/CHORD

Before recording, you should set these parameters. They determine what key is used for playing when you record

the Source Pattern to the Bass, Chord, Pad or Phrase channel. If you set this to “Fm7,” your recorded original

phrase (Source Pattern) will be triggered by specifying Fm7 during normal performance. CMaj7 (Source Chord

Root = C and Source Chord Type = Maj7) is set by default. Depending on the settings here, the playable notes

(chord notes and recommended scale notes) will differ. For details, see below.

The edited Style will be lost if you

change to another Style or turn

the power to the instrument off

without executing the Save opera-

tion.

The parameters here should be

set before recording. If you

change the settings after record-

ing, the appropriate note conver-

sion cannot be done even when

you specify various chord types.

NOTICE

IMPORTANT

CRC CR CRC C RC CRC C CR CRC C CR

CCC CR

CCC C CR CCC C RC

CRC

RCR

CR CR

CR CCR

CCR

RRCCC

CC RC

CR CC

CR C CR

CC RC C

CCR

CR R RC

CCR

CCC

CRC

CCC C

CRC CR

CRC CC

CCC

CCCR

RCC

CCC

RCC

CRC CRR

CRC

RCC

CCCR CC CCR CR

CMaj

(9)

Caug

7 7

(9)

(11)

CmM

7 7

CmM

(9)

Cdim

(9)

(13)

(b9)

Csus

1+8

1+5

add9

#11

(#9)

C aug

CM aug

C sus

add9

(b13)

Csus

When the Source Root is C:

C = Chord notes

C, R = Recommended notes

When Rhy1 or Rhy2 is selected as

Record target, the parameter name here

is shown as “PLAY ROOT” instead of

“CHORD ROOT.” In this situation, you

can confirm the actual sound in

response to each Chord type by chang-

ing the Chord Root and Type.

The settings here are not applied when

NTR is set to GUITAR.

NOTE

44 Tyros5 Reference Manual

2 NTR/NTT

The settings here determine how the original notes of the Source Pattern are converted in response to the Chord

change during normal performance.

NTR (Note Transposition Rule)

NTT (Note Transposition Table)

When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS or ROOT FIXED

[3 ]/

[4 ]

NTR (Note Trans-

position Rule)

Determines the relative position of the root note in the chord, when converted from the

Source Pattern in response to chord changes. Refer to the list below.

[5 ]–

[7 ]

NTT (Note Trans-

position Table)

Sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Refer to the list below.

[8 ]NTT BASS ON/

OFF

The channel for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass root note,

when on-bass chords are recognized by the instrument. When NTR is set to GUITAR

and this parameter is set to ON, only notes which are assigned to the bass will be

played back by the bass root note.

ROOT TRANS

(Root Transpose)

When the root note is transposed, the interval between

notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3

in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are trans-

posed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain mel-

ody lines.

ROOT FIXED The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note

range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of

C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F.

Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts.

GUITAR This is exclusively for transposing guitar accompaniment. Notes are transposed to

approximate the chords played with natural guitar fingering.

BYPASS When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED, the transposition table used does not do any note

conversion. When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS, the table used only converts the notes

by maintaining the pitch relationship between notes.

MELODY Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1

and Phrase 2.

CHORD Suitable for chordal parts transposition. Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels,

especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts.

MELODIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the

third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a

major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a semitone. Other notes are not

changed. Use this for melody channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor

chords, such as Intros and Endings.

MELODIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords

affect the 5th note of the Source Pattern.

HARMONIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the

third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a

minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted sixth intervals are raised by a semi-

tone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which

respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings.

HARMONIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished

chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

NATURAL MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the

third, sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes

from a minor to a major chord, the minor third,

flatted sixth and flatted seventh intervals

are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of

Sections which respond only to major/minor chords such as in Intros and Endings.

When playing

a C major

chord.

When playing

an F major

chord.

When playing

a C major

chord.

When playing

an F major

chord.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 45

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

When NTR is set to GUITAR

3 HIGH KEY / NOTE LIMIT

The settings here adjust the octave of the notes converted from the original ones through NTT and NTR.

4 RTR (Retrigger Rule)

These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord

changes.

NATURAL MINOR 5th In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords

affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

DORIAN When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the

third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a

minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a

semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which

respond only to major/minor chords such as in Intros and Endings.

DORIAN 5th In addition to the Dorian transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect

the 5th note of the Source pattern.

ALL-PURPOSE This table covers both strummed- and arpeggio-played sounds.

STROKE Suitable for strumming sounds of the guitar. Some notes may sound as if they are

muted—this is normal when chords are strummed on an actual guitar.

ARPEGGIO Suitable for arpeggio-played sound of the guitar, resulting in beautiful four-note arpeg-

gio sounds.

[4 ]/

[5 ]

HIGH KEY This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord

root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed

down to the next lowest octave. This setting is available only when the NTR parame-

ter (page 44) is set to “Root Trans.”

[6 ] NOTE LIMIT LOW These set the note range (highest and lowest notes) for Voices recorded to the Style

channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that the Voices sound as

realistic as possible—in other words, that no notes outside the natural range are

sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds).

[7 ] NOTE LIMIT

HIGH

C3-E3-G3

F3-A3-C4

♯

2-A

♯

2-C

♯

3-E

♯

3-G

♯

Example—When the highest key is F.

Root changes

Notes played

E3-G3-C4

F3-A3-C4

♯

3-G

♯

3-C

♯

Example—When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4.

Root changes

Notes played

High Limit

Low Limit

STOP The notes stop sounding.

PITCH SHIFT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord.

PITCH SHIFT TO ROOT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord.

RETRIGGER The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord.

RETRIGGER TO ROOT The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the

octave of the new note remains the same.

46 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Multi Pads

– Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance –

Contents

Multi Pad Creating (Multi Pad Creator)....................................................... 46

• Multi Pad—Realtime Recording via MIDI ................................................ 46

• Multi Pad—Step Recording via MIDI ....................................................... 48

Multi Pad Editing............................................................................................. 48

This feature lets you create your original Multi Pad phrases, and also allows you to edit existing Multi Pad phrases to

create your own. As with Song Creator, Multi Pad Creator features Realtime Recording and Step Recording. However,

with Song Creator, each Multi Pad consists of only one channel and convenient functions such as Punch In/Out are not

available.

Multi Pad—Realtime Recording via MIDI

Before starting operation, note the following points:

• Since only the Right 1 part performance will be recorded as a Multi Pad phrase, you should select the desired Voice

for the Right 1 part beforehand.

• The Super Articulation Voices and the Organ Flutes Voices cannot be used for Multi Pad Recording. If one of these

Voices is set for the Right 1 part, it will be replaced with the Grand Piano Voice when recording.

• Since recording can be done along with and synchronized to Style playback, you should select the desired Style

beforehand. However, keep in mind that the Style is not recorded.

1 If you want to create a new Multi Pad in the existing Bank, select the desired Multi Pad

Bank.

If you want to create a new Multi Pad in an empty new Bank, this step is unnecessary.

2 Call up the operation display.

[CREATOR]  [C] MULTI PAD CREATOR

Multi Pad Creating (Multi Pad Creator)

Tyros5 Reference Manual 47

Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance –

3 If necessary, select the desired Voice with the VOICE category selection buttons.

After selecting the Voice, press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

4 If you want to create a new Multi Pad in an empty new Bank, press the [C] (NEW BANK)

button.

5 Select a particular Multi Pad for recording by pressing any of the [A], [B], [F] and [G] but-

tons.

6 Press the [H] (REC) button to enter recording standby status for the Multi Pad selected

in step 5.

7 Play the keyboard to start recording.

If you want to insert silence before the actual phrase, press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] to start both

the Recording and rhythm playback (of the current Style). Keep in mind that the rhythm part of the current Style

plays back during recording although it is not recorded.

Recommended notes for the Chord Match phrase

If you intend to create a Chord Match phrase, use the notes of C, D, E, G, A and B, or in other words, play the

phrase in the key of C major. This ensures that the phrase will stay harmonically constant and match whichever

chord you play in the left hand section of the keyboard.

8 Stop recording.

Press the [H] (STOP) button or the panel MULTI PAD CONTROL [STOP] button or the STYLE CONTROL

[START/STOP] button to stop recording when you’ve finished playing the phrase.

9 Listen back to your newly recorded phrase, by pressing the appropriate MULTI PAD but-

ton, [1]–[4]. To re-record the phrase, repeat steps 6–8.

10 Turn the Repeat parameter of each pad On or Off by using the [1 ]–[4 ] buttons.

If the Repeat parameter is on for the selected pad, playback of the corresponding pad will continue until the

MULTI PAD [STOP] button is pressed. When you press a Multi Pad for which Repeat is turned on during Song or

Style playback, playback will start and repeat in sync with the beat.

If the Repeat parameter is off for the selected pad, playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the phrase

is reached.

11 Turn Chord Match of each pad On or Off by using the [5 ]–[8 ] buttons.

If the Chord Match parameter is on for the selected pad, the corresponding pad is played back according to the

chord specified in the chord section of the keyboard generated by turning [ACMP] on.

12 Press the [D] (NAME) button, then enter the desired name for each Multi Pad.

13 If you want to record other Multi Pads, repeat steps 5–12.

14 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the Multi Pad, then save the Multi Pad data as a Bank

containing a set of four Pads.

CRC CRC

C = Chord note

C, R = Recommended note

48 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Multi Pad—Step Recording via MIDI

Step Recording can be executed in the EDIT page. After selecting a Multi Pad in step 5 on page 47, press the TAB [F]

button to select the EDIT page.

The EDIT page indicates the Event list, which lets you record notes with absolutely precise timing. This Step

Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording (pages 60–63), with the exception of the

points listed below:

• There is no LCD button for switching channels, since Multi Pads contain data for only a single channel.

• In the Multi Pad Creator, only channel events and System Exclusive messages can be entered. Chord and Lyrics

events are not available. You can switch between the two types of Event Lists by pressing the [F] button.

You can manage (rename, copy, paste and delete) your created Multi Pad Bank and each of the Multi Pads belonging

to the Bank. For instructions on managing the Multi Pad Bank, refer to the Basic Operations of the Owner’s Manual.

This section covers how to manage each Multi Pad.

1 Select the Multi Pad Bank containing the Multi Pad to be edited.

Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button to call up the Multi Pad

Bank Selection display, use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up “PRESET,”

“USER” or “USB” (when USB flash memory is connected), then use the [A]–[J]

buttons to select the desired Multi Pad Bank.

2 Press the [7 ] (EDIT) button of Menu 1 to call up the MULTI PAD EDIT display.

3 Select a particular Multi Pad to be edited by pressing any of the [A], [B], [F] and [G] but-

tons.

4 Edit the selected Pad.

Multi Pad Editing

If you select a Preset Multi Pad Bank

then edit the Multi Pads, save your edits

to “USER” or “USB” (when USB flash

memory is connected) as a User Bank.

NOTE

[1 ] NAME Changes the name of each Multi Pad.

[3 ] COPY Copies the Multi Pad(s). See below.

[4 ] PASTE Pastes the Multi Pad(s) copied by the [3 ] button.

[5 ] DELETE Deletes the selected Multi Pads.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 49

Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance –

5 Save the current Bank containing the edited Multi Pads.

Press the [8 ] button to call up the confirmation window, press the [G] (YES) button to call up the USER page,

then press the [6 ] (SAVE) button of Menu2 to execute the Save operation. For details, refer to the Basic Opera-

tions of the Owner’s Manual.

Copying the Multi Pad

1 Press the [3 ] button of Menu 2 in step 4 above.

2 Select the Multi Pad to be copied by using the [A], [B], [F] and [G] buttons, then press the [7 ] (OK)

button.

The selected Multi Pad is copied to the clipboard.

3 Select the destination location by using the [A], [B], [F] and [G] buttons. If you want to copy the

selected Pad to another bank, press the [8 ] (UP) button to call up the Multi Pad Bank Selection dis-

play, select the desired bank, press the [7 ] (EDIT) button of Menu 1, then select the destination.

4 Press the [4 ] (PASTE) button of Menu2 button to execute the Copy operation.

50 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Songs

– Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs –

Contents

Editing Music Notation Settings..................................................................... 51

Editing Lyrics/Text Display Settings .............................................................. 53

Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback................... 54

Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat Settings, Channel Settings,

Guide Function) ............................................................................................... 55

• Keyboard and Vocal Practice Using the Guide Function ........................... 56

• Playing Backing Parts with the Performance Assistant Technology ......... 58

Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) ......................................................... 59

• Recording Melodies (Step Recording)....................................................... 60

• Recording Chords (Step Recording) .......................................................... 64

• Re-Recording a Specific Section—Punch In/Out (Realtime Recording) .. 67

• Editing Channel Events of Existing Song Data.......................................... 69

• Editing Chord Events, Notes, System Exclusive Events and Lyrics .......... 72

• Editing Song Position Markers................................................................... 75

Restrictions for protected Songs

To prevent illegal copy or accidental erasure, protection is applied depending on the Song. The protection indication

is marked at the upper left of the protected Song name on the display.

• Prot.1: Indicates that the Preset Song is saved to the User drive. This type of Song cannot be copied, moved and

transferred to external devices such as a USB flash memory and a computer.

• Prot.2 Orig: Indicates Yamaha-protection-formatted Songs (commercially available Songs). This type of Song

(which cannot be copied) can be only moved and saved to the User drive or USB storage device with ID.

• Prot.2 Edit: Indicates the edited “Prot.2” Song. This type of Song (which cannot be copied) can be only moved and

saved to the User drive or USB storage device with ID.

Make sure that the “Prot.2 Orig” Song and the corresponding “Prot.2 Edit” Song reside in the same folder. Otherwise, the “Prot.2 Edit”

Song cannot be played back. If you move this type of Song, make sure to move both the “Prot.2 Orig” and “Prot.2 Edit” Songs to the same

folder.

Never change the “Prot2.Orig” Song name and icon on the display. Otherwise, the corresponding “Prot.2 Edit” Song cannot be played back.

IMPORTANT

Tyros5 Reference Manual 51

Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs –

To view the music notation of the selected Song, press the [SCORE] button. You can

change the Score display as desired to suit your personal preferences. The settings

here are maintained even when the power is turned off.

Editing Music Notation Settings

You can save the setting here as a part

of a Song by accessing [CREATOR] 

[A] SONG CREATOR  TAB [E][F]

CHANNEL  [A]/[B] SETUP. See

page 71.

Depending on the particular commer-

cially available Song, Score display may

not be possible.

The score of an Audio Song cannot be

shown because the score is created

based only on MIDI events.

NOTE

[1 ] LEFT ON/OFF Enables/disables display of the left-hand notation. Depending on other settings, this parameter

may be unavailable and may appear grayed out. If this is the case, go to the detailed setting dis-

play (on page 52) and set the LEFT CH parameter to any channel except “AUTO.” Or, go to the

display [FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING and set the TRACK 2 parameter to any channel

except “OFF” (page 55). RIGHT (next parameter) and LEFT cannot be turned off at the same

time.

[2 ] RIGHT ON/

OFF

Enables/disables display of the right-hand notation. RIGHT and LEFT (above) cannot be turned

off at the same time.

[3 ] CHORD ON/

OFF

Enables/disables display of the chords. If the selected Song does not contain chord data, chords

are not displayed.

[4 ] LYRICS ON/

OFF

Enables/disables display of the lyrics. If the selected Song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are

not displayed. When the Song contains Pedal events, pressing these buttons can display the Pedal

events, instead of displaying Lyrics.

[5 ] NOTE ON/OFF Enables/disables display of the note name (pitch). The note name is indicated at the left of the

note. When the space between the notes is too small, the indication may be moved to the top left

of the note. When the Song contains Fingering events, pressing these buttons can display the fin-

gering, instead of displaying note names.

[6 ] COLOR ON/

OFF

When this is set to ON, the notes in the display appear in color (C: red, D: yellow, E: green, F:

orange, G: blue, A: purple, and B: gray).

[7 ] SIZE Determines the display zoom level of the notation.

[8 ] SET UP Calls up the detailed setting display. See page 52.

52 Tyros5 Reference Manual

1 Pressing the [8 ] (SET UP) button calls up the detailed setting display. You can set

the view type by using the [1 ]–[6 ] buttons, then press the [8 ] (OK) button.

[1 ] LEFT CH Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left-hand/right-hand part.

This setting returns to AUTO when a different Song is selected.

AUTO: The MIDI channels in the Song data for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned

automatically—setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is specified

in [FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING (page 55).

1–16: Assigns the specified MIDI channel (1–16) to each of the left- and right-hand parts.

OFF (Available setting only for LEFT CH): Assigns no channel to the left-hand part.

This disables display of the left-hand key range.

[2 ] RIGHT CH

[3 ]/

[4 ]

KEY

SIGNATURE

This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a Song, at the stopped position.

This menu is useful when the selected Song contains no key signature settings for display-

ing notation.

[5 ] QUANTIZE This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct

the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure

to select the smallest note value used in the Song.

[6 ] NOTE NAME Selects the type of the note name indicated at the left of the note in the notation from

among the following three types. The settings here are available when the NOTE ON/OFF

parameter above is set to ON.

A, B, C: Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B).

Fixed DO: Note names are indicated in solfeggio, with the note of C fixed to DO. The

notes “C, D, E, F, G, A, B” are always indicated as “Do, Re, Mi, Fa, So, La, Ti” when

the language is set to English. Note that the note name indication differs depending on

the current language (page 56).

Movable DO: Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the key of the current

Song. When the Song with the D Major key is selected, for example, the notes “D, E,

F#, G, A, B, C#” are indicated as “Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Ti” when the language is

set to English. Note that the note name indication differs depending on the current lan-

guage (page 56).

Tyros5 Reference Manual 53

Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs –

To view the lyrics of the selected Song, press the [LYRICS/TEXT] button. If the

selected Song contains lyric data, you can have the lyrics shown in the display. Even if

the Song does not contain lyrics data, you can show the lyrics and other text by using

a text file (.txt file less than 60KB) created on a computer.

Editing Lyrics/Text Display Settings

When the lyrics are garbled or unread-

able, you may need to change the Lyrics

Language setting from the [FUNCTION]

 [B] SONG SETTING.

When you create a text file on a com-

puter, make sure to enter line breaks

manually. This is necessary because

auto line breaks cannot be executed on

this instrument. When you find that the

text extends beyond the display and

cannot be shown properly, revise the

text data by manually entering appropri-

ate line breaks.

NOTE

[1 ] TEXT/LYRICS Switches the screen between the Lyrics display (lyrics data in the Song is shown) and the

Text display (a text file selected via the [5 ]/[6 ] buttons).

[5 ]/

[6 ]

TEXT FILE Calls up the text File Selection display. After selecting, press the [EXIT] button to return

back to the Lyrics/Text display.

[7 ]/

[8 ]

BACK GROUND Allows changing of the background picture of the Lyrics/Text display. After making the set-

ting, press the [EXIT] button to return back to the Lyrics/Text display.

Lyrics display

The lyrics in the Song data are shown.

Text display

The text created on a computer is shown.

Press the

[1 ] buttons

Press the [5 ]/[6 ] button to

actually call up the desired text file.

When the background picture is specified in the Song data, the BACKGROUND setting cannot be changed.

NOTE

For information on available image files, refer to the MAIN PICTURE parameter on page 130.

NOTE

54 Tyros5 Reference Manual

When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, channels 9-16 in the Song data are replaced with Style

channels—allowing you to play the accompaniment parts of the Song yourself. Try playing chords along with the

Song playback as shown in the instructions below.

1 Select a Song.

2 Select a Style.

3 While holding down the SONG [J] (STOP) button, press the [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) but-

ton to enable synchronized start of the Song.

4 Press the STYLE CONTROL [ACMP] button to turn on the auto accompaniment function,

then press the [SYNC START] button to enable synchronized start of the accompani-

ment.

5 Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button or play

chords in the chord section.

The Song and Style starts playing. When you play chords, pressing the [SCORE]

button and turning CHORD on (page 51) allows you to see the chord information.

When the Song playback is stopped, Style playback is also stopped at the same

time.

Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback

When playing back a Song and a Style

at the same time, the tempo value set in

the Song is automatically used.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 55

Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs –

The instrument has a variety of Song playback functions—repeat playback, various guide settings, etc.—which can be

accessed in the display below.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING

Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat Settings, Channel Settings,

Guide Function)

[A]/[B] GUIDE MODE See page 56.

[1 ] GUIDE ON/OFF

[G] REPEAT MODE Determines the method of repeat playback.

OFF: Plays through the selected Song, then stops.

SINGLE: Plays through the selected Song repeatedly.

ALL: Continues playback through all the Songs in the specified folder repeatedly.

RANDOM: Continues playback at random through all the Songs in the specified

folder repeatedly.

[H] REPEAT FOLDER Determines the directory in which the contained Songs are played in sequence when

REPEAT MODE is set to “ALL” or “RANDOM.” Here, the directory refers to the

path memorized to each of the SONG [I]–[IV] buttons.

CURRENT: Sequentially plays all Songs in the directory containing the currently

selected Song, starting with the currently selected Song.

ALL: Sequentially plays all Songs in all directories (memorized to the SONG [I]–

[IV] buttons). Playback starts with the currently selected Song, then the remainder

of the Songs in the current directory, followed by the Songs in the other directo-

ries.

[I] PHRASE MARK

REPEAT

This parameter is available only when the current Song contains Phrase Marks, which

specify certain locations (of several measures each) in the Song. When this is set to

ON, the section corresponding to the Phrase Mark (specified via the SONG [G]

(REW) and [H] (FF) buttons) is played back repeatedly. Note that this parameter

can be set only when Song playback is stopped.

56 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Keyboard and Vocal Practice Using the Guide Function

With the Guide function, the instrument indicates the timing you need to play notes in the Score display for ease in

learning. This instrument also features convenient vocal practice tools that automatically adjust the timing of Song

playback to match your vocal performance.

1 Select the desired Song for practicing the keyboard or singing.

2 Call up the Song Setting display.

[FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING

3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired Guide function type.

[2 ] LEFT CH These parameters determine which MIDI channel in the Song data is assigned to the

Left- or Right-hand part of the Guide function and the Song Score function.

[3 ] RIGHT CH

[4 ] AUTO CH SET When set to “ON,” this automatically sets the proper MIDI channels for the Right-

and Left hand parts pre-programmed in the commercially available Song data. Nor-

mally, this should be set to “ON.”

[5 ]/

[6 ]

LYRI C S

LANGUAGE

Determines the language displayed in the Lyrics display.

AUTO: When the language is specified in the Song data, the lyrics are displayed

accordingly. When the language is not specified in the Song data, the lyrics lan-

guage is regarded as INTERNATIONAL below.

INTERNATIONAL: Handles the displayed lyrics as a western language.

JAPANESE: Handles the displayed lyrics as Japanese.

[7 ] QUICK START On some commercially available Song data, certain settings related to the Song (such

as Voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the first measure, before the actual

note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the instrument reads all initial non-note

data of the Song at the highest possible speed, then automatically slows down to the

appropriate tempo at the first note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as pos-

sible, with a minimum pause for reading of data.

[8 ] P.A.T. (Performance

Assistant Technol-

ogy)

See page 58.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 57

Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs –

Guide menu for keyboard practice

• Follow Lights

When this is selected, Song playback pauses, waiting for you to play the notes correctly. When you play the cor-

rect notes, Song playback continues. Follow Lights was developed for the Yamaha Clavinova series. This func-

tion is used for practicing purposes, with built-in lamps on the keyboard indicating the notes to be played. Even

though the Tyros5 does not have these lamps, you can use the same function by following the indications in the

displayed notation with the Song Score function.

•Any Key

With this function, you can play the melody of a Song just by pressing a single key (any key is OK) in time with

the rhythm. Song playback pauses and waits for you to play any key. Simply play a key on the keyboard in time

with the music and Song playback continues.

• Your Tempo

The same as Follow Lights, except that Song playback matches the speed at which you play.

Guide menu for singing

• Karao-Key

This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one finger, while you sing along. This is useful

for singing to your own performance. Song playback pauses, waiting for you to sing. Simply play any key on the

keyboard (playing the keyboard produces no sound) and Song playback continues.

4 Use the [1 ] button to turn the Guide function ON.

“G” indication is shown in the Song name box on the Main display.

5 Call up the Score display by pressing the [SCORE] button.

6 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

Practice playing the keyboard or singing, along with the Guide type selected in step 3.

7 Press the [J] (STOP) button to stop playback.

You can save the Guide settings as a

part of the Song data (page 71). For

Songs to which the Guide settings have

been saved, the Guide function will be

automatically turned on and the related

settings will be recalled when the Song

is selected.

NOTE

58 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Playing Backing Parts with the Performance Assistant Technology

This feature lets you play your own backing parts on the keyboard along with Song playback, and have them sound

perfectly appropriate (even though you might be playing wrong notes).

1 Select a Song containing chord data.

The Performance Assistant Technology function can be applied only to Songs containing chord data. To confirm

whether the selected Song contains chord data or not, return to the Main display then start playback. If the current

Song contains chord data, the Main display shows the current chord type. After stopping playback, go to the next

step.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING

3 Press the [8 ] button to turn P.A.T. (Performance Assistant Technology) on.

4 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback.

5 Play the keyboard.

Along with Song playback, try playing the bass line with the left hand area while playing various phrases or chords

with the right hand area. Even if you do not know what notes should be played, don’t worry and play any keys as

desired! Only the harmonically “correct” notes matching the current chord are sounded, regardless of the notes you

actually play.

6 Press the [J] (STOP) button to stop playback.

7 Press the [8 ] button to turn P.A.T. off.

Current chord

Selecting another Song may reset P.A.T.

to OFF.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 59

Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs –

The Owner’s Manual covers how to create an original Song by recording your keyboard performance (called

“Realtime Recording”). This Reference Manual shows how to create an original Song by entering notes one by one

(called “Step Recording”) and how to improve an already created Song by editing the detailed parameters.

 Realtime Recording and Step Recording

When creating a Song, these two Recording methods are available. With Realtime Recording, this instrument records

the performance data as it is played. With Step Recording, you can compose your performance by “writing” it down

one event at a time.

This chapter primarily covers the instructions for Step Recording.

 MIDI Song Data Structure

A MIDI Song consists of 16 MIDI channels. You can create data of a MIDI Song by recording your performance to a

specific channel or channels in realtime, or by executing the Step Recording.

 Song Creator Display Structure

The Song Creator can be called up via [CREATOR]  [A] SONG CREATOR.

There are six Pages (tabs) in the Song Creator display.

• REC MODE ...........For re-recording a Song.

See page 67.

• CHANNEL............. For editing Channel events. See page 69.

• CHORD..................For recording chords and Sections with precise timing (page 64) or edits them

(page 72).

• 1-16..........................For recording melodies (Step Recording; see below) or edits the recorded melodies

(page 72).

• SYS/EX................... For editing System Exclusive events (tempo, time signature, etc.). See page 72.

• LYRICS ..................For inputting/editing a Song name and lyrics. See page 72.

Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator)

Channel 1

Song

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Channel 9

Channel 10

Channel 11

Channel 12

Channel 13

Channel 14

Channel 15

Channel 16

System Exclusive

Lyrics

Right 1

Left

Right 2

Right 3

Multi Pad 1

Multi Pad 2

Multi Pad 3

Multi Pad 4

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Keyboard Performance

 Realtime Recording:

By default, your keyboard performance will be recorded to MIDI channels 1–4.

If you use an Ensemble Voice when recording, the performances of Parts 1, 2, 3 and

4 will be recorded to Channels 2, 1, 3, and 4 respectively.

 Step Recording:

Without specifying the keyboard part, you can input the melodies or notes on the

music notation sheet one by one to the desired channel.

Recording Part

(Default settings)

Style playback

 Realtime Recording:

By default, Style playback will be recorded to MIDI channels 9–16.

 Step Recording:

After inputting the Chord change/Section change events, touch [Expand] to actually

record the note data to MIDI channels 9–16.

Multi Pad playback

 Realtime Recording:

By default, Multi Pad playback will be recorded to MIDI channels 5–8.

 Step Recording:

Multi Pad playback events cannot be input via Step Recording.

60 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Recording Melodies (Step Recording)

1 From the Main display, press the SONG [REC] and SONG [J] (STOP) buttons simultane-

ously.

A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording.

2 Call up the operation display.

[CREATOR]  [A] SONG CREATOR  TAB [ E][F] 1-16

3 Press the [F] button to select the channel for recording.

4 Press the [G] (STEP REC) button to call up the STEP RECORD display.

5 To execute Step Recording, use the [A]–[J] buttons and [1 ]–[8 ] buttons, as well

as the keyboard.

Refer to the example on page 62 for specific instructions.

When a note is input, the location

(bar: beat: clock), note name, velocity

and length are listed in succession.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 61

Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs –

6 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button (or press the [C] button) to return to the top of the

Song, then play back the newly entered Song by pressing the [F/

K] (PLAY/PAUSE) but-

ton.

7 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Recording display.

8 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to execute the Save operation.

[A]/[B]/

[C]

For moving the cursor through the event list.

[G] Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to be entered. The velocity value can be

specified within a range from 1 to 127. The higher the velocity value, the louder the sound

becomes.

KBD.VEL: Actual resulting velocity

fff: 127

ff: 111

f: 95

mf: 79

mp: 63

p: 47

pp: 31

ppp: 15

[H] Determines the gate time (actual length) of the note to be entered.

Normal: 80%

Tenuto: 99%

Staccato: 40%

Staccatissimo: 20%

Manual: The gate time can be set to any desired percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY]

dial.

[I] Determines the note type to be entered: normal, dotted or triplet.

[J] DELETE Deletes the data of the current line.

[1 ] BAR Sets the position of the note to be entered. Note that a quarter note has a resolution of

1,920 clocks.

[2 ]BEAT

[3 ]CLOCK

[4 ]–

[8 ]

Determines the note length to be entered: whole-note, half-note, quarter-note, eighth-note

or sixteenth-note.

The recorded Song data will be

lost if you select another Song or

turn the power to the instrument

off without executing the Save

operation.

NOTICE

62 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Example of Step Recording—Melodies (detailed instructions of Step 5 on page 60)

In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps (Step 4) involves holding down

a key on the keyboard while executing the operation.

Before executing the instructions below, select the desired Voice on the STEP

RECORD display. Note that only the Voice selection and Note input are possible

during Step Recording.

1 Enter the first and second notes with a slur.

1-1

Press the [G] button to select “f.”

1-2 Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.”

1-3 Press the [I] button to select the “dotted” note type.

1-4 Select the dotted quarter-note by using the [6 ] buttons.

1-5 Play the C3 key.

This enters the first note.

1-6 Press the [I] button to select the “normal” note type.

1-7 Press the [7 ] button to select the eight-note length.

1-8 Play the D3 key.

This enters the second note.

2 Enter the next notes and apply staccato.

2-1

Press the [H] button to select “Staccato.”

2-2 Press the [6 ] button to select the quarter-note length.

2-3 Play the keys E3 and F3 in order.

This completes the first measure.

3 To enter a quarter-note rest, press the [6 ] button again.

To enter the rest, use the [4 ]–[8 ] buttons. (Press the button once to select the rest value, and once again

to actually enter it.) The BAR:BEAT:CLOCK indication at the lower left lets you confirm that a rest having the

specified note length has been entered.

1234

* The numbers shown in the illustration correspond to

the following operation step numbers.

Since the actual note length (determined

via the Gate Time) may differ from the

note length on the notation, the Score of

the Song recorded here may be different

from the notation above.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 63

Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs –

4 Enter the next notes and apply a tie.

4-1

Press the [G] button to select “mp.”

4-2 Press the [H] button to select “Normal.”

4-3 While holding G3 key on the keyboard, press the [6 ] button.

This operation advances the input position from the current 2nd beat to the next 3rd beat. Do not release the

G3 key yet. Keep holding it while executing the following steps.

4-4 While holding the G3 key, press the C4 key.

Do not release the G3 and C4 keys yet. Keep holding the notes while executing the following step.

4-5 While holding the keys G3 and C4, press the [5 ] button.

After pressing the button, release the keys.

This enters the notes G3 and C4 notes have been entered as shown in the notation on the previous page.

5 To play back your newly entered Song, press the SONG [J] (STOP) button (or press the

[C] button) to return to the top of the Song, then press the [F/

K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button.

64 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Recording Chords (Step Recording)

In Step Recording, you can record the precise change timing of chords and Sections (such as Intro, Main and Ending)

of the current Style on the single display. After the operations are finished, the recorded events or settings will be

converted to `actual MIDI notes or Song data.

1 From the Main display, press the SONG [REC] and SONG [J]

(STOP) buttons simultaneously.

A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording.

2 Select the Style you want to use in the Song.

3 Call up the operation display.

[CREATOR]  [A] SONG CREATOR  TAB [ E][F] CHORD

4 Press the [G] (STEP REC) button to call up the STEP RECORD display.

5 Execute Step Recording by using the [A]–[J] buttons and [1 ]–[8 ] buttons.

Refer to the example on page 65 for specific instructions.

6 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button (or press the [C] button) to return to the top of the

Song, then play back the newly entered Song by pressing the [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) but-

ton.

Selecting a blank Song initializes the

panel settings.

NOTE

For details on these functions,

refer to page 61.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 65

Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs –

7 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Recording display.

8 Press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the recorded data to actual MIDI notes (Song

data).

9 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to execute the Save operation.

Example of Step Recording—Chord (detailed instructions of Step 5 on page 64)

Before executing the instructions below, make sure that the [AUTO FILL IN] but-

ton is turned off since no Fill in is included in the notation example above.

1 Enter the chords for the Main A section.

1-1

Press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN A] button.

1-2 Press the [5 ] button to select the half-note length.

1-3 Play the chords C, F and G in the chord section of the keyboard.

The recorded Song data will be

lost if you select another Song or

turn the power to the instrument

off without executing the Save

operation.

NOTICE

C F G F G7 C

1 2 3

MAIN A BREAK MAIN B

* The numbers shown in the illustration correspond to

the following operation step numbers.

This example uses a Style in 4/4 time.

NOTE

1-2

1-1

1-3

66 Tyros5 Reference Manual

2 Enter the chords for the Break section.

2-1

Press the STYLE CONTROL [BREAK] button.

2-2 Press the [6 ] button to select the quarter-note length.

2-3 Play the chords F and G7 in the chord section of the keyboard.

3 Enter the chords for the Main B section.

3-1

Press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN B] button.

3-2 Press the [4 ] button to select the whole-note length.

3-3 Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard.

If you want to record a Fill In Section,

turn on the [AUTO FILL IN] button, then

press one of the MAIN VARIATION [A]–

[D] buttons.

NOTE

2-2

2-1

2-3

3-2

3-1

3-3

Tyros5 Reference Manual 67

Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs –

Re-Recording a Specific Section—Punch In/Out (Realtime Recording)

When re-recording a specific section of an already-recorded Song, use the Punch IN/OUT function. In this method,

only the data between the Punch In point and the Punch Out point is overwritten with the newly recorded data. Keep in

mind that the notes before and after the Punch In/Out points are not recorded over, although you will hear them play

back normally to guide you in the Punch In/Out timing.

1 Select the desired Song for re-recording.

2 Call up the operation display.

[CREATOR]  [A] SONG CREATOR  TAB [ E][F] REC MODE

3 Determine the settings for recording.

[1 ]–

[3 ]

REC START

(Punch In)

Determines the Punch In timing.

NORMAL: Overwrite recording starts when the Song playback is started via the

SONG [F/ K]] (PLAY/PAUSE) button or when you play the keyboard in the Syn-

chro Standby mode.

FIRST KEY ON: The Song plays back normally, then starts overwrite recording as

soon as you play the keyboard.

PUNCH IN AT: The Song plays back normally up to the beginning of the indicated

Punch In measure, then starts overwrite recording at that point. You can set the

Punch In measure by pressing the [3 ] button.

[4 ]–

[6 ]

REC END (Punch

Out)

Determines the Punch Out timing.

REPLACE ALL: This deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped.

PUNCH OUT: The Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as the

Punch Out point. This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording

is stopped.

PUNCH OUT AT: Actual overwrite recording continues until the beginning of the

specified Punch Out measure (set with the corresponding display button), at which

point recording stops and normal playback continues. This setting maintains all

data after the point at which recording is stopped. You can set the Punch Out mea-

sure by pressing the [6 ] buttons.

[7 ]/

[8 ]

PEDAL PUNCH

IN/OUT

When this is set to ON, you can use Foot Pedal 2 to control the Punch In and Punch

Out points. While a Song is playing back, pressing (and holding) Foot Pedal 2

instantly enables Punch In recording, while releasing the pedal stops recording (Punch

Out). You can press and release Foot Pedal 2 as often as you want during playback to

punch in/out of overwrite recording. Note that the current function assignment of the

Foot Pedal 2 is cancelled when the Pedal Punch In/Out function is set to ON.

Pedal Punch In/Out operation may be reversed depending on the particular pedal you’ve connected to the

instrument. If necessary, change the pedal polarity to reverse the control (page 134).

NOTE

68 Tyros5 Reference Manual

4 While holding the SONG [REC] button, select the desired channel from 1–16 on the dis-

play via the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons.

5 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start Punch In/Out recording.

According to the settings in Step 3, play the keyboard between the Punch In and Punch Out points. Refer to the

examples of various settings illustrated below.

6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to execute the Save operation.

Examples of re-recording with various Punch In/Out settings

This instrument features several different ways you use the Punch In/Out function. The illustrations below indicate

a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.

The recorded Song data will be

lost if you select another Song or

turn the power to the instrument

off without executing the Save

operation.

NOTICE

12345678

12345

12345678

12345

12345678

12345

12345678

12345 7

REC START setting

REC END setting

NORMAL

REPLACE ALL

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT AT=006

FIRST KEY ON

REPLACE ALL

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT AT=006

PUNCH IN AT=003

REPLACE ALL

PUNCH IN AT=003

PUNCH OUT

PUNCH IN AT=003

PUNCH OUT AT=006

Original data

Start overwrite recording *1

Play back

original data

Play back

original data

Play back

original data

Play back

original data

Play back

original data

Play back

original data

Play the keyboard to start

overwrite recording

Play the keyboard to start

overwrite recording

Play the keyboard to start

overwrite recording

Start overwrite recording

Stop recording *2

Stop overwrite recording/play original data

Stop recording *2

Stop overwrite recording/play original data

Stop recording *2

Stop overwrite recording/play original data

Deleted

*1 If you want to re-record from the 3rd

measure in this setting, move the

Song position to the 3rd measure

then start Recording to avoid over-

writing measures 1–2.

*2 To stop recording, press the [REC]

button at the end of measure 5.

Previously recorded data

Newly recorded data

Deleted data

Deleted

Tyros5 Reference Manual 69

Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs –

Editing Channel Events of Existing Song Data

You can apply various useful functions to already recorded data, such as Quantize and Transpose, on the CHANNEL

page.

1 Select a Song to be edited.

2 Call up the operation display.

[CREATOR]  [A] SONG CREATOR  TAB [ E][F] CHANNEL

3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu, then edit the data by using the [1 ]–

[8 ] buttons.

For details of the edit menu and available settings, see page 70.

4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation for the current display.

After the operation (with the exception of the SETUP menu) is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting

you restore the original data if you are not satisfied with the operation results. The Undo function only has one

level; only the previous operation can be undone.

5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to execute the Save operation.

The recorded Song data will be

lost if you select another Song or

turn the power to the instrument

off without executing the Save

operation.

NOTICE

70 Tyros5 Reference Manual

1 QUANTIZE

The Quantize function allows you to align the timing of all the notes in a channel. For example, if you record the

musical phrase shown at right, you may not play it with absolute precision, and your performance may have been

slightly ahead of or behind the precise timing. Quantize is a convenient way of correcting for this.

[2 ]/

[3 ]

CHANNEL Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is to be quantized.

[4 ]–

[6 ]

SIZE Selects the quantize size (resolution). For optimum results, you should set the Quan-

tize size to the shortest note value in the channel. For example, if eighth notes are the

shortest in the channel, you should use eighth note as the Quantize size.

The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient,

since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time. For exam-

ple, when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are contained in the same

channel, if you quantize by the straight eighth notes, all notes in the channel are quan-

tized to straight eighth notes—completely eliminating any triplet feel. However, if you

use the eighth note + eighth note triplet setting, both the straight and triplet notes will

be quantized correctly.

[7 ]/

[8 ]

STRENGTH Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100% produces

exact timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved toward the

specified quantization beats according to the specified percentage. Applying less than

100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel in the recording.

After 1/8 note quantization

1/4 note

triplet

1/16 note

triplet

1/32 note

1/8 note+

1/8 note triplet*

1/16 note+

1/8 note triplet*

1/16 note+

1/16 note triplet*

1/8 note

triplet

Settings:

Quarter-note length

Original data

(assuming 4/4 meter)

Quantizing

strength =100

Quantizing

strength =50

Quarter-note length

Tyros5 Reference Manual 71

Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs –

2 DELETE

You can delete the data of the specified channel in the Song. Select the channel whose data to be deleted by using

the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons, then press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation.

3 MIX

This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy

the data from one channel to another.

4 CHANNEL TRANSPOSE

This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down

by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments.

5 SETUP

The current settings of the Mixing Console display and other panel settings can be

recorded to the top position of the Song as the Setup data. The Mixing Console

and panel settings recorded here are automatically recalled when the Song starts.

[2 ]/

[3 ]

SOURCE 1 Determines the MIDI channel (1–16) to be mixed. All MIDI events of the channel

specified here are copied to the destination channel.

[4 ]/

[5 ]

SOURCE 2 Determines the MIDI channel (1–16) to be mixed. Only note events of the channel

specified here are copied to the destination channel. In addition to the values 1–16,

there is a “COPY” setting that allows you to simply copy the data from Source 1 to the

destination channel.

[6 ]/

[7 ]

DESTINATION Determines the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed.

Make sure not to transpose channels 9

and 10. In general, Drum Kits are

assigned to these channels. If you

transpose the channels of Drum Kits,

the instruments assigned to each key

will be changed.

NOTE

[F] CH 1–8/CH 9–16 Toggles between the two channel displays: Chan-

nels 1–8, and Channels 9–16.

[G] ALL CH To simultaneously set all channels to the same

value, adjust the Channel Transpose for one of the

channels while holding down this button.

Before executing the Setup operation,

move the Song position to the top of the

Song by pressing the SONG [

]

(STOP) button.

NOTE

[1 ]–

[7 ]

SELECT Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up

along with the selected Song. The items selected here can be recorded only to the top

position of the Song, except for the KEYBOARD VOICE.

SONG: Records the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console.

KEYBOARD VOICE: Records the panel settings, including the Voice selection of

the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2, and LEFT) and their on/off status. Panel settings

recorded here are same as the ones memorized to the One Touch Setting. This can

be recorded at any point in a Song.

SCORE SETTING: Records the settings in the Score display.

GUIDE SETTING: Records the settings of the Guide functions including the Guide

ON/OFF setting.

LYRICS SETTING: Records the settings in the Lyrics display.

VH/MIC: Records the microphone and the Vocal Harmony settings. For details about

the parameters, refer to the Parameter Chart in the Data List.

[8 ] MARK ON Add or remove a checkmark to the selected item. Checked items are recorded to the

Song.

[8 ] MARK OFF

72 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Editing Chord Events, Notes, System Exclusive Events and Lyrics

You can edit chord events, note events, System Exclusive events and lyrics in the same

manner on the corresponding displays: CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX and LYRICS. These

are called “Event List” displays because the recorded events are shown in a list view.

After you edit events in the CHORD tab

display, press the [F] (EXPAND) button

to convert the data into Song data.

Chord section data recorded with Real-

time Recording cannot be indicated and

edited on this display.

NOTE

Indicates the

location (posi-

tion) of the cor-

responding

event.

Indicates the

event type.

See page 73.

Indicates the

event value.

Event List display

[A]/[B] Moves the cursor up/down and selects the desired event.

[C] Moves the cursor to the top (beginning of the Song).

[D]/[E] Moves the cursor left/right and selects the desired parameter of the highlighted event.

[H] FILTER Calls up the Filter display (page 74), letting you select only the events you wish to be

shown in the event list.

[I] SAVE Press to save the edited Song.

[J] MULTI SELECT Holding this button while using the [A]/[B] buttons lets you select multiple events.

[1 ] BAR Determines the position (bar/beat/clock) of the data. One clock is equal to 1/1920th of

a quarter note.

[2 ]BEAT

[3 ]CLOCK

[4 ]/

[5 ]

DATA ENTRY Adjusts the event value. For coarse adjustment, use the [4 ] buttons. For fine

adjustment, use the [5 ] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

[6 ] CUT Executes the cut/copy/delete/paste operation.

[7 ]COPY

[7 ] DELETE

[8 ]PASTE

[6 ] INS (INSERT) Adds a new event.

[8 ] CANCEL Cancels editing and restores the original value.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 73

Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs –

Chord Events (CHORD Page)

Note Events (1-16 Page)

System Exclusive Events (SYS/EX. Page)

Lyrics Events (LYRICS Page)

Style Style

Tempo Tempo

Chord Chord root, Chord type, On Bass Chord

Sect Style Section (Intro, Main, Fill In, Break, Ending)

OnOff On/off status for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style

CH.Vol Volume for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style

S.Vol Overall volume of the Accompaniment Style

Note An individual note within a Song. Includes the note number which corresponds to the key

which was played, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played, and the gate

time value (note length).

Ctrl (Control Change) Settings to control the Voice, such as volume, pan, filter and effect depth (edited via the Mix-

ing Console described in chapter 8), etc.

Prog (Program Change) MIDI program change number for selecting a Voice.

P.Bnd (Pitch Bend) Data for changing the pitch of a Voice continuously. This event is generated by controlling

the PITCH BEND wheel.

A.T. (After Touch) This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played.

ScBar (Score Start Bar) Determines the top measure of a Song.

Tempo Determines the tempo value.

Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature.

Key (Key signature) Determines the key signature, as well as the major/minor setting, for the music score shown

on the display.

XGPrm (XG parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the XG parameters. For details, refer to the

“MIDI Data Format” in the Data List, available at the Yamaha website.

SYS/EX. (System Exclu-

sive)

Displays the System Exclusive data in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot create new

data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste

the data.

Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or

change the contents of the data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.

Name Allows you to enter the Song name.

Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics.

Code CR: Enters a line break in the lyrics text.

LF: Clears the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics.

74 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Displaying Specific Types of Events

In the Event List displays, various types of events are shown. It may sometimes be difficult to pinpoint the

ones you want to edit. This is where the Filter function comes in handy. It lets you determine which event types

will be shown in the Event List displays.

1 Press the [H] (FILTER) button in the CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX. or LYRICS displays.

2 Checkmark the desired item to be displayed.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to execute the settings.

[C] MAIN Displays all main types of events.

[D] CTRL. CHG Displays all types of Control Change message events.

[E] STYLE Displays all types of Style playback related events.

[H] ALL ON Checkmarks all event types.

[I] NOTE/ALL OFF/

CHORD

“NOTE” (shown when [C] (MAIN) is on) selects only the NOTE data.

“CHORD” (shown when [E] (STYLE) is on) selects only the CHORD

data. “ALL OFF” (shown when [D] (CTRL.CHG) is on) removes all

checkmarks.

[J] INVERT Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In other words, this

enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously unchecked and vice

versa.

[2 ]–

[5 ]

Select and event type to be checked or unchecked.

[6 ]/

[7 ]

MARK ON Enters/removes the checkmark for the selected event type. The checked

event types can be shown on the CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX or LYRICS

pages.

[6 ]/

[7 ]

MARK OFF

Tyros5 Reference Manual 75

Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs –

Editing Song Position Markers

This section covers two additional Marker-related features and details. For basic information on using the Markers for

jump playback and loop playback, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

 Jump Markers

The Markers explained in the Owner’s Manual are also called “Jump Markers.” In the Event List display (page 72),

they are indicated as “SPJ-01”–“SPJ-04.” In the Event List, they can be moved freely to other positions and can even

copied to create identical Marker numbers at other positions. When the same Marker number is contained at different

locations in the Song, the latest occurring one is used as a “Loop End Marker” (below).

 Loop End Marker

Loop End Markers can be used for putting additional Markers in Song data, providing even greater versatility.

Creating a Loop End Marker is done within the Event List (and not with the [SP 1]–[SP 4] buttons on the panel), by

simply copying one “SPJ” Jump Marker event to another position in the Song.

For basic information on loop playback between successive Jump Markers, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

The examples below show how Loop End Markers can be used in Song playback.

Example 1

(1) If the Song is playing back between the two SPJ-01 points, turning on [LOOP] will result in a playback loop

between those points.

(2) If the Song is playing back between the second SPJ-01 and SPJ-02 and [LOOP] is turned on, playback jumps

back to the first SPJ-01 and loops between two SPJ-01 points.

Example 2

(1) If the Song is playing back between SPJ-02 and the second SPJ-01, turning on

[LOOP] will result in a playback loop between those points.

(2) If the [LOOP] button is turned on while the Song is playing back between the

top of the Song and SPJ-02, playback will loop between SPJ-01 and SPJ-02.

(3) If the Song is playing back between the second SPJ-01 and SPJ-03 and

[LOOP] is turned on, playback jumps back to SPJ-02 and loops between SPJ-

02 and the second SPJ-01 (Loop End Marker).

In the examples above, the actual data of the Loop End Marker is identical to the event

it was copied from—only the location of the copied Marker provides it with this

different function.

In Song playback, the markers formatted as “SPJ-xxxxx” (xxxxx: any character

except 01–04 and any number of letters is OK) are handled as Loop End Markers.

Since the Event List in the Song Creator function does not let you freely name

Markers, the instructions above are recommended for creating new Markers.

However, with sequence software on a computer, you can create new Markers and

assign appropriate names to them. By naming Markers in this way, you can easily

distinguish between Loop End Markers and Jump Markers in the Event List.

[SPJ-01] [SPJ-01] [SPJ-02] [SPJ-03] [SPJ-04]

(1) (2)

End of the

song

Top of the

song

Copied within

the Event List.

Copied event becomes

Loop End Marker

[SPJ-01] [SPJ-02] [SPJ-01] [SPJ-03] [SPJ-04]

(2) (1) (3)(2)

End of the

song

Top of the

song

Copied within

the Event List.

Copied event becomes

Loop End Marker

Loop playback problems may occur if

successive Markers are too close to one

another.

When the effect settings of the jump

destination (the position you’re jumping

to) differ from those at the jump source,

glitches or drop-outs in the sound may

result. This is because of limitations in

the effect processors of the Tyros5.

When using the Guide function

(page 56) with jump playback, keep in

mind that the Guide indication may not

be able to stay in time with the jumps.

NOTE

76 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Audio Recorder/Player

– Recording and Playback Audio Files –

Contents

Recording Your Performance ......................................................................... 76

• Multi Track Recording ............................................................................... 76

Converting a file ............................................................................................... 80

• Converting an Audio File (.wav/.mp3) to a Multi Track recording file (.aud)

....... 80

• Converting a Multi Track Recording File (.aud) to an Audio File (.wav)

............. 81

Editing the Recorded Data (Multi Track Recording File) ........................... 82

• (1) Normalize ............................................................................................. 83

• (2) Adjusting the Volume Balance ............................................................. 83

• (3) Deleting a Track.................................................................................... 83

Re-recording the Multi Track Recording File............................................... 84

• NORMAL REC / NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK) ......................... 84

• PUNCH IN OUT / PUNCH IN OUT (MERGE) ....................................... 85

Setting the Start/End Points of the Audio (Multi Track Recording File) ... 87

Playlist Mode.................................................................................................... 88

• Creating a Playlist ...................................................................................... 88

• Playing a Playlist ........................................................................................ 88

• Playlist Controls ......................................................................................... 89

With Multi Track recording, you can record your performance several times to make up the complete song. For example,

1) record your keyboard performance to the Main track, 2) record your vocal via the microphone to the Sub track.

Multi Track File formats that can be used:

Multi Track Recording

This section covers the basic procedure of Multi Track recording. The operation steps can

be summarized as follows: 1) Record your keyboard performance to the Main track, 2)

record your vocal sound to the Sub track.

1 Make the necessary settings such as Voice/Style selection and the microphone connec-

tion (if you want to record your vocal).

Recording Your Performance

Mode File extension

Availabl e

location

Various recording

methods

(Bounce,

Punch In/Out, etc.)

Multi

Track

Recording .aud (Tyros5 original: 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution, ste-

reo)

Internal HDD Yes

Playback .aud (Tyros5 original: 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution, ste-

reo)

Up to 80 minutes can be recorded con-

tinuously in a single recording opera-

tion.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 77

Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files –

2 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button, repeatedly if necessary, to call up

the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER display.

3 Press the [F] (MULTI TRACK) button to call up the Multi Track Recorder display.

4 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [REC] and [STOP] but-

tons simultaneously.

This operation will create a new empty audio file named “M_Audio_***.AUD.”

5 Record to the Main track.

If the TRACK SELECT [F3] is not selected “MAIN” in the display, press the [F]

button to select the “MAIN” as destination.

5-1 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording.

5-2 When your performance is finished, press the [STOP] button to stop record-

ing.

5-3 To hear your new recording, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

The data is automatically saved in

the internal HDD, but you may

want to backup your data from

time to time. Copying is the easi-

est way to do this. However, since

copying within a folder in the HDD

is not possible, you need to cre-

ate a new folder.

For details on file management,

refer to the Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

Undo/Redo

If you’ve made a mistake or you’re not completely satisfied with your perfor-

mance, you can press the Undo function to erase the take and try again.

1 Press the [G] (UNDO) button.

The latest recording that you made is cancelled. If you want to restore

the operation, press the [G] (REDO) button.

2 Press the [REC] button to enable recording.

3 Start again with Step 4 in “Multi Track Recording”.

78 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Next, let’s record your singing to the Sub track. You can record your vocals while listening to playback of the Main track.

6 Practice the part (sing into the microphone) to check the level

and adjust the recording volume on the REC MONITOR meter

by using the [1 ] buttons or sliders.

Adjust so that the volume doesn’t constantly go into the “red” and light up the

indicator. If it does, you may have to turn the microphone input level down a bit.

7 Record to the Sub track.

7-1

Press the [F] (TRACK SELECT) button to select “SUB” as destination.

7-2 Press the [REC] button to enable recording.

7-3 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording.

Immediately after this operation, start singing along with the Main track playback.

7-4 When your performance is finished, press the [STOP] button to stop recording.

7-5 To hear your new recording, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

•Press the 1’s [] and [] buttons

simultaneously to instantly reset the

recording volume to 90.

•If you call up a different display, press

the [MODE] button to return to the

Multi Track Recorder display.

NOTE

Make sure that the RECORDING MODE

(upper left of the display) is set to

“NORMAL REC” here.

NOTE

7-47-2 7-3,7-5

Adjusting the volume balance

On the TRACK PLAY meter, you can adjust the volume of Main and Sub tracks separately. Use the [4 ]/

[6 ] buttons or sliders to adjust the Main/Sub track volume. By using the [3 ]/[5 ] buttons, you

can also mute the Main/Sub tracks.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 79

Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files –

Next, mix all data from the Main track and Sub track to one track (Main track). This procedure (below) is called Bounce

recording.

8 Press the [B] (REC MODE), and then use the [B]/[C] buttons to

select “BOUNCE.”

After selection, press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

9 Press the [REC] button then press the [G] (YES) button.

If you do not want to delete the recorded data of the Sub track, press the [H] (NO) button instead of the [G] (YES)

button above.

10 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start Bounce recording.

All data in Main and Sub tracks are mixed and recorded to the Main track. When

playback of the Main and Sub tracks is finished, Bounce recording automatically

stops.

11 To hear your new recording, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

The Sub track is now empty, you can continue recording another part to the Sub

track, repeating Steps 6–7.

If you did not delete the recorded data of the Sub track in Step 9, the data of Sub

track is recorded to both Main and Sub tracks. To avoid duplicate playback of Sub

track, press the [5 ] (MUTE) button in the Multi Track Recorder display.

12 Press the [EXIT MULTI TRACK] button, then press the [G] (YES)

button to exit from the Multi Track Recorder display.

At this point, the recorded data have not been processed with the Mixdown opera-

tion (converting a Multi Track recording file to a Simple recording file).

If Mixdown is necessary, refer to the “Converting a Multi Track Recording File

(.aud) to an Audio File (.wav)” on page 81.

When the Recording Mode is set to

“BOUNCE,” the selected track is auto-

matically changed to Main.

NOTE

If you sing or play the keyboard during

Bounce recording, your performance is

also recorded to the Main track.

NOTE

•The Multi Track recording file (.aud)

can be played back only on the

Tyros5.

•The .aud file saved with the Multi

Track recording can be converted to

.wav file format (Simple recording

file) by using the Mixdown function.

NOTE

You can convert the Multi Track record-

ing file (.aud) to a Simple recording file

.(wav). For details, see the “Converting

a Multi Track Recording File (.aud) to an

Audio File (.wav)” on page 81.

NOTE

80 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Converting an Audio File (.wav/.mp3) to a Multi Track recording file (.aud)

You can convert audio files (.wav/.mp3), such as commercially available samples, loops, sound effects, etc., to a Multi

Track recording file (.aud)—allowing you to work with the two tracks or use the various recording methods of the instru-

ment (Bounce, Punch In/Out, etc.).

1 Connect the USB flash memory containing the audio file to the USB TO DEVICE termi-

nal.

2 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button several times to call up AUDIO

RECORDER/PLAYER display.

3 Press the [A] (FILE) button.

4 Use the TAB [][] buttons to select the USB flash memory, then use the [A]–[J] but-

tons to select the desired audio file.

5 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER display.

6 Press the [F] (MULTI TRACK) button, then press the [F] (YES)

button.

The conversion of the audio files (.wav/.mp3) to the Main track of the Multi Track

recording file (.aud) is completed.

7 Execute the same operations from Step 7 in “Multi Track

Recording” on page 78.

Converting a file

The conversion time to a Multi Track

recording file depends on the size of the

audio file (.wav/.mp3).

If the same file name already

exists, a message appears

prompting you to overwrite.

Selecting [YES] converts the file

and overwrites the Main track.

The data of Sub track will be

deleted.

NOTE

NOTICE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 81

Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files –

Converting a Multi Track Recording File (.aud) to an Audio File (.wav)

You can convert a Tyros5 Multi Track recording file (.aud) to a Simple recording file

(.wav)—allowing you to playback on devices other than the Tyros5, and also playback on

the Tyros5 from the USB flash memory.

1 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button several

times to call up AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER display.

2 Press the [F] (MULTI TRACK) button.

3 Press the [A] (FILE) button.

4 Use the TAB [][] buttons to select the USB flash memory, then use the [A]–[J] but-

tons to select the desired audio file.

5 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER display.

6 Press the [J] (MIXDOWN) button to call up the MIXDOWN display.

7 If necessary, press the [B] (FILE NAME) button, change the file name, then press the [8

] (OK) button.

8 If necessary, press the [C] (SAVE TO) button, use the TAB [][] and [A]–[J] buttons to

select the destination (to which the converted file is to be saved), then press the [8 ]

(OK) button.

9 Press the [G] (START) button to start playback. As soon as playback is finished, conver-

sion from .aud to .wav will be started.

If you want to save the file to a USB

flash memory, connect the USB flash

memory to the [USB TO DEVICE] termi-

nal.

NOTE

82 Tyros5 Reference Manual

You can edit the data which is recorded in Multi Track Recording.

1 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button several times to call up the AUDIO

RECORDER/PLAYER display and select the recorded data to be edited.

2 Press the [F] (MULTI TRACK) button to call up the Multi Track

Recorder display.

3 Press [A] (FILE) button

4 Select the desired audio file by using [A]–[J] buttons.

5 Press [EXIT] button to return to the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER

display.

Editing the Recorded Data (Multi Track Recording File)

The data is automatically saved in

the internal HDD, but you may

want to backup your data before

editing. Copying is the easiest

way to do this. However, since

copying within a folder in the HDD

is not possible, you need to cre-

ate a new folder. For details on

file management, refer to the

Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

(3)

(1)

(2)

Tyros5 Reference Manual 83

Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files –

(1) Normalize

Normalize raises the volume of the recorded audio to the optimum level. Use this to make the recorded audio as loud as

possible, without distortion. Technically, this operation scans the recorded file for the highest level, then raises the vol-

ume of the entire file so that the highest peak is set to the maximum, non-distorting level. Normalization is calculated for

the loudest signal found in either channel of the stereo recording and the same gain is applied to both channels.

1 Press the [F] (TRACK SELECT) button to select the track to be normalized.

2 Press the [I] (NORMALIZE) button.

3 At the prompt, press the [G] (OK) button to start normalizing the selected track.

To cancel the operation, press the [H] (CANCEL) button.

(2) Adjusting the Volume Balance

On the TRACK PLAY meter, you can adjust the volume of Main and Sub tracks sepa-

rately. Use the [4 ]/[6 ] buttons or sliders to adjust the Main/Sub track volume.

By using the [3 ]/[5 ] buttons, you can also mute the Main/Sub tracks.

(3) Deleting a Track

1 Press the [F] (TRACK SELECT) button to select the track to be deleted.

2 Press the [H] (TRACK DELETE) button.

3 At the prompt, press the [G] (OK) button to start deleting the selected track.

To cancel the operation and leave the track intact, press the [G] (UNDO) button, before executing any other opera-

tion.

To control overall volume of the audio

file, press the [BALANCE] button once

or twice to call up the BALANCE (2/2)

display, then use the [4 ] slider or

buttons.

NOTE

84 Tyros5 Reference Manual

The created Multi Track recording data can be re-recorded in the following five ways.

• Replace the whole data: NORMAL REC ........................................................See below

• Mix the recorded data: NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK).......................See below

• Replace a certain range of the data: PUNCH IN/OUT.................................See page 85

• Overdub a certain range of the data: PUNCH IN/OUT (MERGE) ..............See page 85

• Merge the Main and Sub tracks to the Main track: BOUNCE

............................................................................................. See Multi Track Recording

NORMAL REC / NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK)

You can replace the whole audio data of a track by NORMAL REC or mix the audio data

with the previous one by NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK). The NORMAL REC

(PLUS PLAYBACK) method does not add any tracks but simply mixes the new recording

to the existing data. After stopping recording, any data following the stop point will be

erased.

1 Execute Steps 1–5 in “Editing the Recorded Data (Multi Track

Recording File)” on page 82 to select the data to be re-

recorded.

2 Use the [F] (TRACK SELECT) button to select the track to be re-recorded.

3 Use the [B]/[C] buttons to select a recording method.

• Replace the whole data: NORMAL REC

• Mix the recorded data: NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK)

4 If you select “NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK),” play back the recorded audio and

practice the part that you want to overdub while the audio is playing. Change the volume

settings if necessary.

If you wish to add a keyboard-played Voice from the Tyros5, select the desired Voice. If you wish to record your

singing voice or an external instrument, connect a microphone or instrument and make the appropriate settings.

Adjust the Track Play and Rec Monitor levels here as desired.

5 Press the [REC] button to enable recording.

Re-recording the Multi Track Recording File

Re-recording of the data repeatedly will

result in deterioration of the sound

quality.

The data is automatically saved in

the internal HDD, but you want to

backup your data before re-

recording. Copying is the easiest

way to do this. However, since

copying within a folder in the HDD

is not possible, you need to cre-

ate a new folder. For details on

file management, refer to the

Owner’s Manual.

NOTE

NOTICE

Since you will be overdubbing parts

onto this audio, it’s best to keep the first

recording simple. For example, you may

want to record just a rhythm pattern

(such as by playing back a Style) or a

simple bass riff over which you can add

other parts.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 85

Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files –

6 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording.

Play the keyboard (or sing, etc.) and record your performance.

7 When finished recording, press the [STOP] button.

After stopping recording, the data will be erased from the stop point.

8 To hear your new recording, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

If you’ve made a mistake or you’re not completely satisfied with your perfor-

mance, press the [EXIT] button to return to the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER

display, then undo the NORMAL REC/NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK)

operation by pressing the [G] (UNDO) button.

PUNCH IN OUT / PUNCH IN OUT (MERGE)

This method of recording can only be used on an existing recording. It allows you to re-

record over a specific part of the already-recorded material. You can replace the original

part with the new recording by PUNCH IN/OUT, or keeping the original and mixing it

with the new by PUNCH IN/OUT (MERGE). This lets you either correct a mistake in the

recording or overdub new parts onto the original recording.

Keep in mind that the parts before and after the Punch In/Out section are not recorded over

and remain as the original data—they play back normally to guide you in and out of the

recording.

1 Execute Steps 1–5 in “Editing the Recorded Data (Multi Track Recording File)” on

page 82 to select the recorded data to be re-recorded.

2 Use the [F] (TRACK SELECT) button to select the track to be re-recorded.

3 Use the [B]/[C] buttons to select a recording method.

• Replace a certain range of the data: PUNCH IN/OUT

• Overdub a certain range of the data: PUNCH IN/OUT (MERGE)

The playback sound of the other (not yet

rerecorded) track is not recorded to the

track.

NOTE

The Audio Recorder/Player automati-

cally reduces the level of the previous

track by a certain, slight amount to

accommodate the new recording. This

is done to minimize possible distortion.

You can use the Normalize effect to

maximize the volume of the overall

sound. For details, see page 83.

NOTE

You can re-record over only one range

at one time.

The beginning and ending of the

recorded data using the Punch In/Out

function is faded in/out automatically.

This is done to minimize possible noise

at the beginning and ending of the

recorded data. We recommend that you

specify the beginning and ending points

at sections in the data where the volume

is low.

NOTE

Original Data Original DataRe-recorded Data

Start Recording Punch In Punch Out Stop Recording

86 Tyros5 Reference Manual

4 Select the desired Punch In/Out Mode, using the [1 ]/[2 ] (MODE) buttons.

• MANUAL ...............This lets you manually execute Punch In/Out recording by using the Audio Recorder/Player

transport buttons ([REC], [PLAY/PAUSE], etc.).

• PEDAL....................This lets you manually execute Punch In/Out recording by using a connected footswitch to

the FOOT PEDAL 2 jack.

• AUTO......................This lets you specify the Punch In and Out points, allowing automatic Punch In/Out record-

ing (see below).

Specifying the recording range in AUTO mode

If you select AUTO as the punch in/out recording method, specify the recording range and practice the record-

ing by using the Rehearsal function.

1 Specify the punch in/out range by pressing the [3 ]/[5 ] (SET) buttons at the punch in/out point

during the audio song playback.

2 If you move the punch in/out point slightly, use the Nudge function.

In this Nudge function, you can move the punch in/out point slightly (even in millisecond units) while

listening to the playback.

2-1 Press the [7 ] (NUDGE) button to show the Nudge Play display.

2-2 Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and AUDIO

RECORDER/PLAYER [PREV]/[NEXT] button to

move the NUDGE DATA POSITION to the desired

punch in/out position while listening to the playback

(500 milliseconds loop playback before/after the speci-

fied point). The [DATA ENTRY] dial lets you adjust the

point in seconds and the [PREV]/[NEXT] buttons lets

you adjust in milliseconds.

2-3 Press the [7 ] (MODE) button to select After/Before. “After” repeats 500 milliseconds after

the Nudge Data Position and “Before” repeats 500 milliseconds before the Nudge Data Position

when you playback the data in the next step.

2-4 Press the [3 ]/[5 ] (SET) button to set the moved point. To reset the point to the start/end

point of the data, press the [4 ]/[6 ] (RESET) button.

2-5 Press the [8 ] (CLOSE) button.

3 Use the REHEARSAL function to practice the recording before the actual recording.

3-1 Press the [8 ] (REHEARSAL) button. “EXECUTING” is shown above the [8 ] buttons.

3-2 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [REC] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

The audio song is played back repeatedly starting four seconds before the punch in point to four

seconds after the punch out point. Play the keyboard or sing the desired part in practice. In this

rehearsal function, recording is not started.

3-3 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [STOP] button.

The smallest possible range of the Auto punch in/out function is 100 milliseconds.

NOTE

Repeat playback of the rehearsal function is automatically stopped after playing back 99 times.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 87

Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files –

5 Record the specific part of the audio song using the one of the

methods below.

Manual

Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [REC] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to engage the record

mode, then press the [REC] and [PLAY/PAUSE] buttons simultaneously to actually record. To stop recording,

press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [STOP] button. Pressing the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [PLAY/

PAUSE] button during recording pauses the recording.

Pedal

Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [REC] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to engage the record

mode, then press and hold the footswitch. The point at which you press the footswitch is the punch in point and the

point at which you release the pedal is the punch out point.

Auto

Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [REC] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Recording automat-

ically starts and stops at the specified point in “Specifying the recording range in AUTO mode” on page 86. The

audio song playback automatically stops four seconds after the punch out point.

6 To hear your new recording, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

If you’ve made a mistake or you’re not completely satisfied with your performance, press the [EXIT] button to

return to the Multi Track Recorder display then undo the Punch In/Out operation by pressing the [G] (UNDO) but-

ton.

This function lets you set the Start and End points for the audio file. This action is non-destructive and affects only the

playback of the data; it does not actually delete any data from the start or end of the file.

1 Execute Step 1–5 in “Editing the Recorded Data (Multi Track

Recording File)” on page 82 to select the desired audio data.

2 Press the [C] (START/END POINT) button.

3 Specify the Start/End point.

The operation of specifying the Start/End points is same as specifying the punch

in/out points. For instructions, see “Specifying the recording range in AUTO

mode” on page 86.

4 Press the [F] (OK) button to enter the new settings to the file.

To cancel the operation, press the [G] (CANCEL) button.

The playback sound of the other (not yet

rerecorded) track is not recorded to the

track.

NOTE

Setting the Start/End Points of the Audio (Multi Track Recording File)

The data is automatically saved in

the internal HDD, but you want to

backup your data before re-

recording. Copying is the easiest

way to do this. However, since

copying within a folder in the HDD

is not possible, you need to cre-

ate a new folder. For details on

file management, refer to the

Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

88 Tyros5 Reference Manual

The Playlist is a convenient feature within the Audio Recorder/Player that lets you collect and organize audio files for

automatic playback in “jukebox” fashion. The Playlist mode can be active in the background (for example, when the Main

display is selected), letting you play the listed files whenever you wish during your performance.

The “REPEAT” icon (see page 89) at the upper left of the display shows that the Audio Recorder/Player is set to the Play-

list mode (automatic playback of multiple files).

Creating a Playlist

Once you have a number of audio files on the internal hard disk drive, you can add those

files to the Playlist. The files can be put in any order and can be entered any number of

times (in other words, a single file can have multiple instances in a Playlist).

1 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button several

times to call up the AUDIO PLAYER/RECORDING display.

2 Press [A] (FILE) button, then use the TAB [][] buttons to

select the location (HD or USB) of the desired audio file.

3 Add the desired audio file to the Playlist.

3-1

Press the [6 ] (ADD TO PLAYLIST) button.

The selected file name is highlighted. You can continue to select additional

files here, as many as desired. If multiple pages (P1, P2, ...) are shown at the

bottom, you can select files from these displays, too. To select all the files in

the current folder, press the [6 ] (ALL) button.

3-2 Press the [7 ] (OK) button to confirm the selection.

4 Press the [EXIT] button.

5 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button several

times to call up the PLAYLIST display, then check the Playlist to

confirm that the files have been added.

If the Playlist already has audio files, additional files are automatically put at the

end of the list. Added files are also automatically selected (checkmarked) for play-

back.

6 Save the Playlist.

Press the [1 ] (FILES) button, then save the Playlist to the USER drive, internal hard disk drive or USB flash

memory.

Playing a Playlist

Once you’ve created and/or edited a Playlist and you’ve enabled the Playlist mode, you can play back the files in the

list—at any time during your performance.

Keep in mind that playback of files is not instantaneous. Since the Audio Recorder/Player needs to load each file before

playing it, playback pauses roughly one or two seconds between files.

1 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button several times to call up the PLAY-

LIST display.

Playlist Mode

A Playlist can contain a maximum of

500 audio files.

NOTE

You cannot add the Multi Track (.aud)

audio data to the Playlist.

NOTE

If you want to select all but a few of the

files in the folder, a quick method is to

use the [6 ] (ALL) button to select all

of the files, then use the [A]–[J] buttons

to de-select specific files.

NOTE

If you change the file icon after adding

to the Playlist, the audio file cannot be

recognized from the Playlist.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 89

Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files –

2 Press the [1 ] (FILES) buttons to call up the PLAYLIST FILE

display, then select the desired Playlist by using the [A]–[J]

buttons.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the PLAYLIST display.

4 Use the [5 ]/[6 ] buttons to select a file for playback, then actually enter it by

pressing the [7 ] (SELECT) button.

You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor and press the [ENTER] button to actually select the

song.

To have the files play back from the beginning of the Playlist, select the first file. A check mark indicates the file is

enabled for playback, a minus sign ( - ) indicates the file will be skipped, and an exclamation mark indicates the

file does not contain data.

5 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback of the

Playlist from the selected file.

While the Playlist mode is active (the indicator at the top left of the display shows the “REPEAT” icon; page 89),

the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [PREV]/[NEXT] buttons function as Previous/Next controls for the Playlist.

Pressing the appropriate button calls up a pop-up window and selects the previous or next audio file in the Playlist.

You can use the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [PLAY/PAUSE] button to pause and resume play at any time dur-

ing your performance.

6 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [STOP] button to stop playback.

To disengage the Playlist mode, press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button several times to call up

the Audio Recorder/Player display, then select an audio file.

Playlist Controls

Shown here is a sample Playlist display, with short explanations of the various controls.

The [SELECT] button toggles between

the Audio and Playlist displays within

the Audio Recorder/Player function.

NOTE

[A] REPEAT Determines how the audio files will be played back:

All files are played in sequence once through to the end (no repeat).

All files are played in sequence repeatedly.

One selected file is played repeatedly.

[B] SORT Determines whether the audio files are sorted in ascending or descending order by name.

[C] SHUFFLE Pressing this button randomly rearranges the order of the files.

[D] UNDO/REDO Pressing this button (Undo) cancels the last action made to the Playlist. Pressing it again

(Redo) restores the cancelled action. Only one level of Undo/Redo is available.

[F] PROPERTY Calls up the Property popup window which shows the file name and path of the audio song at

the cursor position.

90 Tyros5 Reference Manual

[G]–[J] Playlist navigation controls.

[G]: Moves cursor/selection to the top of the list.

[H]: Moves cursor/selection one page up (when there are multiple pages).

[I]: Moves cursor/selection one page down (when there are multiple pages).

[J]: Moves cursor/selection to the bottom of the list (just below last entered file).

[1 ] FILES Opens the PLAYLIST FILE display. From this display, you can rename, copy, delete or save

the playlists.

[2 ] MOVE Up/Down Use these buttons to move the selected file to another location in the list.

[3 ] CUT These operations let you copy or cut and paste individual list entries. Keep in mind that these

have no effect on the actual audio data, but just entries in the list.

Cut and Insert

1 Press the [3 ] (CUT) button.

2 Select the desired file entry by using the [5 ] buttons and press the [6 ] button

to actually select it. Then press the [8 ] (OK) button. The entry is deleted.

3 Move the cursor to the desired location in the list (with the [5 ]/[6 ] buttons)

and press the [3 ] (INSERT) button.

Copy and Insert

1 Press the [4 ] (COPY) button.

2 Select the desired file entry by using the [5 ] buttons and press the [6 ] button

to actually select it. Then press the [8 ] (OK) button. The entry is copied.

3 Move the cursor to the desired location in the list (with the [5 ]/[6 ] buttons)

and press the [3 ] (INSERT) button.

[3 ]INSERT

[4 ]COPY

[4 ] DELETE Deletes files from the Playlist. Keep in mind that this does not affect the actual audio data, but

simply deletes an entry of the file from the list.

[5 ]/

[6 ]

Up/Down Use these buttons to move the cursor in the list. Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to quickly move

the cursor (red border) through the entries and press the [ENTER] button.

[7 ] SELECT Actually selects the file at the cursor position.

[8 ] MARK Adds or removes the checkmark to/from the selected data. Only the checkmarked files will be

played. Holding this button adds (or removes) the checkmark to (or from) all files.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 91

Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Settings for Your Performance –

Music Finder

– Calling Up Ideal Panel Settings for Your Performance –

Contents

Creating a Set of Favorite Records ................................................................ 91

Editing Records................................................................................................ 92

• Deleting the Record.................................................................................... 93

Saving the Records as a Single File (Music Finder File) .............................. 93

• Calling up the Records from a Music Finder file....................................... 94

Even though the Search function lets you efficiently look for Music Finder Records, you may want to create a custom

“folder” of your favorite Records—so you can quickly call up the panel settings, Song data and Style data you use fre-

quently.

1 Select the desired Record from the MUSIC FINDER display.

2 Press the [H] (ADD TO FAVORITE) button, then press the [G] (YES) button to add the

selected Record to the FAVORITE page.

3 Select the FAVORITE page by using the TAB [E][F] buttons, and check to see if the

Record has been added.

As with the ALL page, you can select the Record in the FAVORITE page then start your performance.

Creating a Set of Favorite Records

Deleting Records from the FAVORITE Page

1 Select the Record you want to delete from the FAVORITE page.

2 Press the [H] (DELETE FROM FAVORITE) button, then press the [G] (YES) button to actually delete

the Record.

92 Tyros5 Reference Manual

You can create your original Record by editing an existing Record. Your edits can be replaced with those of the current

Record, or can be saved as a new separate Record.

1 Select the desired Record to be edited in the MUSIC FINDER display.

2 Press the [8 ] (RECORD EDIT) button to call up the EDIT display.

3 Edit the Record.

To cancel and quit the Edit operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button.

Editing Records

[A] MUSIC For entering the music title. Pressing the [A] button calls up the display for entering

the music title.

[B] KEYWORD For entering the keyword to be used when executing the Search operation. Pressing

the [B] button calls up the display for entering the keyword.

[C] STYLE/SONG/

AUDIO

Changes the Style. Pressing the [C] button calls up the Style Selection display. After

selecting the desired Style, press the [EXIT] button to return back to the EDIT display.

For SONG or AUDIO Records, this field cannot be edited.

[D] BEAT Changes the beat (time signature) of the Record for search purposes.

For SONG or AUDIO Records, this field cannot be edited.

[E] FAVORITE Selects whether the edited Record is added to the FAVORITE page or not.

[1 ] TEMPO Changes the Tempo. For SONG or AUDIO Records, this field cannot be edited.

[2 ] SECTIONS Selects the Style sections that are called up as a set when the Record is selected. You

can start the Record with the section selected by the [2 ] buttons. When the sec-

tion finishes, Style playback automatically shifts to the section selected by the

[4 ] buttons. For SONG or AUDIO Records, this field cannot be edited.

[4 ]

[5 ]/

[6 ]

GENRE Selects the desired genre.

[7 ] GENRE NAME Creates a new genre.

Keep in mind that the Beat setting made here is only for the Music Finder search function; this does not

affect the actual Beat setting of the Style itself.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 93

Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Settings for Your Performance –

4 Save the edited Record.

When creating a new Record

Press the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. The Record is added to the ALL page.

When overwriting an existing Record

Press the [8 ] (OK) button.

Deleting the Record

By executing the Delete operation, you can delete the desired Record from all pages (ALL, FAVORITE and SEARCH

1/2).

1 Select the Record to be deleted from the MUSIC FINDER display.

2 Press the [8 ] (RECORD EDIT) button to call up the EDIT display.

3 Press the [I] (DELETE RECORD) button.

To cancel the Delete operation and return to the MUSIC FINDER display in Step 1, press [G] (NO); to return to

the EDIT display in Step 2, press [H] (CANCEL).

4 Press the [F] (YES) button to delete the current Record.

The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and additionally created Records as a single

Music Finder file. Keep in mind that individual Records (panel settings, Song, audio and Style files) cannot be handled as

separate files.

1 Press the [7 ] (FILES) button in the MUSIC FINDER display to call up the File Selec-

tion display.

2 Press the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the location for saving (USER/HD/USB).

3 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button.

4 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to actually save the file.

All Records are saved together as a single Music Finder file.

Saving the Records as a Single File (Music Finder File)

94 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Calling up the Records from a Music Finder file

By selecting a Music Finder file, you can recall the Records saved to the User, Hard disk or USB drive as a file.

1 Press the [7 ] (FILES) button in the MUSIC FINDER display to call up the File Selec-

tion display.

2 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the location to which the file is saved.

3 Press the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Music Finder file.

A message appears, prompting you to select one of the following options.

[F] REPLACE All Music Finder Records currently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with

the Records of the selected file.

[G] APPEND The Records called up are added to the Records currently in the instrument.

[H] CANCEL Cancels the file selection operation.

Selecting “REPLACE” automatically deletes all your original Records from internal mem-

ory. Make sure that all important data has been archived to another location beforehand.

NOTICE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 95

Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

Registration Memory

– Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

Contents

Editing a Registration Memory ...................................................................... 95

Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) ................................................... 96

Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration

Sequence) .......................................................................................................... 97

• Saving the Registration Sequence Settings ................................................ 98

• Using the Registration Sequence................................................................ 99

You can edit (rename and delete) each of Registration Memories contained in the Bank.

1 Select the Registration Memory Bank containing the Registration Memory to be edited.

Press the REGISTRATION BANK [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously to call up the Registration Bank Selection dis-

play, then press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Bank.

2 Make sure the MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display.

3 Press the [7 ] (EDIT) button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT display.

4 Select a particular Registration Memory to be edited by pressing any of the [A]–[D] and

[F]–[I] buttons.

5 Press the [1 ] button to rename or the [5 ] button to delete the selected Registration

Memory.

For details on the Rename and Delete operations, refer to the Basic Operations of the Owner’s Manual.

6 Save the current Bank containing the edited Registration Memories.

Press the [8 ] button to call up the Registration Memory Selection display. Change MENU 1 to MENU 2 by

pressing the [8 ] button, then press the [6 ] (SAVE) button to execute the Save operation.

Editing a Registration Memory

96 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single button press. However, there may be

times that you want certain items to remain the same, even when switching Registration Memory setups. When you

want to switch the Voice settings but still maintain the Style settings, for example, you can “freeze” only the Style

settings and have those Style settings remain, even when you select another Registration Memory number.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET  TAB [E][F] FREEZE

2 Use the [2 ]–[7 ] buttons to select the desired item, then use the [8 ] buttons

to enter or remove the checkmark.

Items having checkmarks will be frozen when [FREEZE] is turned on.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display.

4 Press the [FREEZE] button on the panel to turn the Freeze func-

tion on.

With this operation, you can “freeze” or maintain checkmarked items, even when

you select another Registration Memory number. To turn off the Freeze function,

press the [FREEZE] button again.

Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze)

Settings in the REGISTRATION

FREEZE display are automatically

saved to the instrument when you

exit from this display. However, if

you turn the power off without

exiting from this display, the set-

tings will be lost.

NOTICE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 97

Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are, there may be times during a performance when you want to

even more easily switch between settings. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the eight

setups in any order you specify, by simply using the TAB [E][F] buttons (in the Main display) or the pedal as you

play.

1 If you intend to use a pedal or pedals to switch the Registration Memory number, con-

nect the optional pedals to the appropriate FOOT PEDAL jacks.

For instructions, refer to Chapter 11 of the Owner’s Manual.

2 In the REGISTRATION BANK display, select the desired Bank to be programmed.

3 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION]  [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET  TAB [E][F] REGISTRATION

SEQUENCE

4 If you use a pedal, specify here how the pedal will be used—to advance or to reverse

through the sequence.

Use the [C] or [D] button to select the pedal for advancing or reversing through the Registration Sequence. For

example, if two pedals are connected, Pedal 1 is used for advancing while Pedal 2 is used for reversing. Note that

the pedal settings here (other than OFF) will take priority over the settings in the FOOT PEDAL display

(page 133). If you want to use the pedal for a function other than Registration Sequence, make sure to set this to

OFF.

5 Program the Sequence order, from left to right.

Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons on the panel, then press the [6 ] (INSERT) but-

ton to input the number.

Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration

Sequence)

Indicates the name of the currently selected

Registration Memory Bank.

Indicates the Registration Memory

numbers, in the order of the current

Registration Sequence.

98 Tyros5 Reference Manual

6 Use the [E] (SEQUENCE END) button to determine how Registration Sequence behaves

when reaching the end of the sequence.

• STOP......................Pressing the TAB [F] button or the “advance” pedal has no effect. The sequence is

“stopped.”

• TOP ........................The sequence starts again at the beginning.

• NEXT BANK .........The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory

Bank in the same folder.

7 Press the [F] (REGISTRATION SEQUENCE ENABLE) button to turn the Registration

Sequence function on.

8 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display.

After the confirmation message appears, press the [G] (YES) button to store the Registration Sequence program

temporarily.

Saving the Registration Sequence Settings

The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when reach-

ing the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END) are included as part of the Registration

Memory Bank file. To store your newly programmed Registration Sequence, save the cur-

rent Registration Memory Bank file.

1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display.

2 Make sure the MENU 2 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display.

3 Press the [6 ] button to save the Bank file.

[1 ]–

[4 ]

CURSOR Moves the cursor.

[5 ] REPLACE Replaces the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory

number.

[6 ] INSERT Inserts the number of the currently selected Registration Memory number to the cursor posi-

tion.

[7 ] DELETE Deletes the number at the cursor position.

[8 ] CLEAR Deletes all numbers in the sequence.

Keep in mind that all Registration

Sequence data is lost when

changing Registration Memory

Banks, unless you’ve saved it

with the Registration Memory

Bank file.

NOTICE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 99

Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

Using the Registration Sequence

1 Select the desired Registration Bank.

2 At the upper right of the Main display, confirm the Registration Sequence.

3 Press the TAB [E] or [F] button, or press the Foot Pedal to select the first Registration

Memory number.

The box appears around the left-most number, indicating that this Registration Memory number is currently

selected.

4 Use the TAB buttons or Foot Pedal during your keyboard per-

formance.

To return to the status in which no Registration Memory number is selected, press

the [E] and [F] buttons simultaneously in the Main display.

The Registration Sequence is indicated at the

upper right of the Main display, letting you confirm

the currently selected numbers.

The pedal can be used for Registration

Sequence no matter which display is

called up (except for the REGIST

SEQUENCE display).

NOTE

100 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Microphone

– Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing –

Contents

Vocal Harmony and Talk Setting ................................................................. 100

Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk)........................ 101

• Saving the Microphone Settings............................................................... 101

• VOCAL Page............................................................................................ 102

• TALK Page ............................................................................................... 103

Setting and Editing Vocal Harmony Types ................................................. 104

• Setting up the Vocal Harmony Control Parameters.................................. 104

• Editing the Vocal Harmony Types............................................................ 106

Editing the Synth Vocoder Types ................................................................. 111

• Editing the Overview Tab Parameters...................................................... 112

• Editing the Detail Tab Parameters............................................................ 114

q [VOCAL HARMONY] button

Turns on or off the Vocal Harmony.

w [VOCAL EFFECT] button

Turns on or off the Vocal Effect which can be set on the display called up via [VH TYPE SELECT] [8 ] (EDIT).

For details, refer to page 104.

e [TALK] button

Switches the microphone setup between the Vocal setup (used during microphone performance) and Talk setup (used

during talk or between a certain performance and the next performance). When set to ON, only the Talk settings are

active. When set to OFF, only the Vocal Harmony settings are active.

r [VH TYPE SELECT] button

For selecting the desired Vocal Harmony type.

t [MIC SETTING] button

For setting various microphone-related parameters, for Vocal Harmony and Talk independently.

Vocal Harmony and Talk Setting

Tyros5 Reference Manual 101

Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing –

This section explains how to make and save the detailed settings for the microphone.

1 Connect the microphone, press the [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] button to call up

the operation display, then press the [F] button to set the MIC to ON.

This lets you talk into the microphone and hear the changes made while setting the parameters.

2 Select the desired page, VOCAL or TALK, by using the TAB

[E][F] buttons.

3 Use the [A]–[E] buttons to select the specific row (or group) of parameters to be

adjusted.

4 Set the value of specific parameters in the row by using the

[1 ]–[6 ] buttons.

For information on each parameter, see pages 102–103.

Saving the Microphone Settings

All the settings (VOCAL/TALK pages) are saved together as a single file. Up to ten files can be saved.

1 On the MIC SETTING display (in step 3 above), press the [H] (USER MEMORY) button.

2 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button to save the file to USER.

For details on the naming and deleting procedures, refer to the Basic Operations

section in the Owner’s Manual.

Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk)

The settings on the TALK page are

microphone settings that are active

when the Talk function is on.

NOTE

After setting, go to the Mic Setting

Memory display by pressing the

[H] (USER MEMORY) button and

save the settings (see page 102).

The settings will be lost if you exit

from this display or turn the

power to the instrument off with-

out executing the Save operation.

NOTICE

The microphone setting file can be

saved only to internal USER drive. If you

want to save this setting USB flash

memory, save the User Effect file on the

display called up via [FUNCTION] 

[H] (UTILITY)  SYSTEM RESET 

[H] (USER EFFECT).

NOTE

Calling Up the Microphone Settings Saved to USER

1 [MIC SETTING] button  [H] USER MEMORY

2 Press the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired setting file.

102 Tyros5 Reference Manual

VOCAL Page

3-BAND EQ (selected by [A]/[B] buttons)

EQ (Equalizer) is a processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands which can be boosted or cut

as required to tailor the overall frequency response. This instrument features a high-grade three-band (LOW, MID

and HIGH) digital equalizer function for the microphone sound.

NOISE GATE (selected by [C]/[D] buttons)

This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level. This effec-

tively cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired signal (vocal, etc.) to pass.

COMPRESSOR (selected by [C]/[D] buttons)

This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level. This is

especially useful for smoothing out vocals that have widely varying dynamics. It effectively “compresses” the sig-

nal, making soft parts louder and loud parts softer. For a maximum compression effect, set RATIO to a high setting

and adjust the OUT parameter for optimum volume.

PITCH DETECT (selected by [E] button)

Determines how this instrument detects or recognizes the pitch of the microphone sound you input during perfor-

mance.

[1 ]/

[3 ]/

[5 ]

Hz Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band.

[2 ]/

[4 ]/

[6 ]

dB Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB.

[1 ] SW (Switch) Turns the Noise Gate on or off.

[2 ] TH. (Threshold) Adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open.

[3 ] SW (Switch) Turns the Compressor on or off.

[4 ] TH. (Threshold) Adjusts the input level above which the Compressor is applied.

[5 ] RATIO Adjusts the compression ratio. Higher ratios result in a more compressed sound, with

a reduced dynamic range.

[6 ] OUT Adjusts the final output level.

[1 ]/

[2 ]

VOCAL TYPE Set this to obtain the most natural vocal harmony, depending on your voice.

LOW: Setting for lower voices. This setting is also appropriate for growling and

shouting.

MID: Setting for mid-range voices.

HIGH: Setting for higher voices. This setting is also appropriate for singing close to

the microphone.

FULL: Setting for vocalists having a wide range, from low to high.

[3 ]/

[4 ]

BACKGROUND

NOISE CUT

THRU, 200Hz, 300Hz, 400Hz, 500Hz: This allows you to filter out low noises that

would interfere with the Vocal Harmony effect. A setting of “THRU” turns the

noise filter off.

[5 ]/

[6 ]

SPEED 1 (SLOW) – 4 (NORMAL) – 15 (FAST): Adjusts the response of the Vocal Har-

mony effect, or how quickly harmonies are generated in response to your voice.

When the Vocal Harmony’s Pitch Detect Speed of one or both parts of Lead and Harm. are set to “as Mic

Setting” in the Detail tab (page 110), this parameter is effective. In other settings, the setting of the Vocal

Harmony’s Pitch Detect Speed is effective.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 103

Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing –

TALK Page

The settings here are for your speech or announcements (NOT your singing performance), and are active when the

TALK (page 100) is set to ON. All indications and parameters (with the exception of TALK MIXING below) are the

same as in the VOCAL page. However, the settings are independent from those in the VOCAL page.

TALK MIXING (selected by [E] button)

[1 ] VOLUME Determines the output volume of the microphone sound.

[2 ] PAN Determines the stereo pan position of the microphone sound.

[3 ] REVERB DEPTH Determines the depth of the reverb effects applied to the microphone sound.

[4 ] CHORUS DEPTH Determines the depth of the chorus effects applied to the microphone sound.

[5 ]/

[6 ]

REDUCTION

LEVEL

Determines the amount of reduction to be applied to the overall sound (excepting the

microphone input)—allowing you to effectively adjust the balance between your

voice and the overall instrument sound.

104 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Setting up the Vocal Harmony Control Parameters

You can set which part controls the Vocal Harmony regardless of the current Vocal Harmony Type.

1 Press the [VH TYPE SELECT] button to call up the Vocal Har-

mony Type Selection display.

2 Press the [8 ] (SETUP) button to call up the Setup display, then set the value by using

the [2 ]–[5 ] and [7 ] buttons.

For information on each parameter, see page 105.

3 After you finish setting the value, press the [EXIT] button to close the Setup display.

Setting and Editing Vocal Harmony Types

Check that the microphone is properly

connected (Owner’s Manual, chapter 8)

and the settings (Reference Manual,

page 101) are adjusted correctly before

setting the Vocal Harmony Control

parameters here.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 105

Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing –

Setup Parameters

[2 ]–

[5 ]

VOCODER

CONTROL

The Vocal Harmony effect in the Vocoder and Vocoder-Mono modes is controlled

by the notes you play on the keyboard and/or Song data.

[2 ] SONG

CHANNEL MUTE/

PLAY

When set to “MUTE,” the channel selected below (to control Harmony) is muted

(turned off) during Song playback. This enables you to sing a song with harmony,

even without backing or accompaniment.

[3 ] SONG

CHANNEL

OFF/1–16

When set to OFF, Song playback does not affect the Vocal Harmony. When set to

one of the values 1–16, note data (played from a Song on this instrument or exter-

nal MIDI sequencer) contained on the corresponding channel is used to control the

harmony.

[4 ]

/[5 ]

KEYBOARD OFF: Keyboard performance does not affect the Vocal Harmony.

UPPER: Notes played to the right of the Split Point control the harmony.

LOWER: Notes played to the left of the Split Point control the harmony.

[7 ] CHORD In Chordal mode, the following parameters determine which data in a Song is used

for chord detection.

OFF: Chords are not detected from the Song data.

XF: Chords of XF format are used for the Vocal Harmony.

1–16: Chords are detected from note data in the specified Song channel.

The separate point of the Keyboard settings (OFF/UPPER/LOWER) is Split Point (L).

NOTE

When the settings of both keyboard performance and Song data are applied, those settings are merged

to control the harmony.

NOTE

The Vocal Harmony may not work properly regardless of the setting here depending on the Song data.

This occurs when the selected Song contains no chord data or has insufficient note data for chord

detection.

NOTE

106 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Editing the Vocal Harmony Types

This section explains briefly how to create your own Vocal Harmony types, and lists the detailed parameters for

editing. A sum total of sixty types can be created and saved.

1 Press the [VH TYPE SELECT] button to call up the Vocal Harmony Type Selection dis-

play.

2 Select a Vocal Harmony type to be edited by using the [A]–[J] buttons.

To call up the other display pages for further selections, press one of the [1 ]–[5 ] buttons.

3 Press the [8 ] (EDIT) button to call up the Vocal Harmony Edit display.

4 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the desired tab, then edit

the Vocal Harmony by using [A]–[G] buttons and [1 ]–

[8 ] buttons.

There are three tabs in the Vocal Harmony Edit display; refer to pages 107–110 for

editing each tab.

• OVERVIEW

...........Edits basic parameters for Vocal Harmony type, includ-

ing Mode, Chordal Type and Vocal Effect, etc.

• PART ......................Adjusts volume and panning, etc. for each of the har-

mony notes (Harm.1, 2, 3 and Lead).

• DETAIL .................Detailed editing for Vocal Harmony type.

5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Vocal Harmony

type.

For details on the Save operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual, Basic Operations.

The settings here will be lost if

you change to another Vocal Har-

mony type or you turn the power

off without executing the Save

operation.

NOTICE

The edited Vocal Harmony Type can be

saved only to internal USER drive as a

file. If you want to save this to USB flash

memory, save the User Effect file on the

display called up via [FUNCTION] 

[H] (UTILITY)  SYSTEM RESET 

[H] (USER EFFECT).

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 107

Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing –

 Editing the Overview Tab Parameters

1 Set the value by using the [A]–[C] buttons, [1 ] and [3 ]–[8 ] buttons.

For information on each parameter, see page 108.

2 Press the [F] (HARMONY ASSIGN) button to set how the Vocal Harmony is applied to

your singing voice.

For information on each parameter, see page 108.

3 Press the [G] (VOCAL EFFECT EDIT) button to edit the Vocal Effect.

On the display called up via this operation, use the [3 ]–[5 ] buttons to select the parameter then use the

[6 ]–[7 ] buttons to set the value. If necessary, you can change the Effect Type from the one selected in

Step 1 also on this display via the [1 ]/[2 ] buttons.

For information on each parameter, refer to the Data List (Vocal Harmony Parameter List) on the website.

108 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Overview Tab Parameters

HARMONY ASSIGN

For detailed information on each parameter, refer to the Data List (Vocal Harmony Parameter List) on the website.

[A] MODE Determines the mode of the Vocal Harmony effect: Chordal, Vocoder or Vocoder-

Mono. Chordal is for conventional vocal harmonies, while Vocoder and Vocoder-

Mono are for Vocoder effects. (Vocoder-Mono is for single-note melodies.) When

Vocoder or Vocoder-Mono is selected, the Chordal Type parameter below is not

available.

[B]/[C] CHORDAL TYPE Determines the particular notes and voicings used for generating the vocal harmo-

nies. The harmony and lead notes are also shown as notation in the display. For a

list of the Chordal Types, refer to the Data List (Vocal Harmony Parameter List) on

the website.

[1 ] BALANCE Lets you set the balance between the lead vocal (your own voice) and Vocal Har-

mony. Raising this value increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases

that of the lead vocal. When this is set to L<H63 (L: Lead Vocal, H: Vocal Har-

mony), only the Vocal Harmony is output; when it is set to L63>H, only the lead

vocal is output.

[3 ]–

[6 ]

VOCAL EFFECT Determines the Vocal Effect type and the amount of the effect applied to the lead

and harmony vocal sounds.

[3 ]

–[4 ]

TYPE Determines the specific Vocal Effect type applied to the lead and harmony vocal

sounds. A wide range of reverb, delay, modulation, distortion and other special

effects are available. For a list of the effect types, refer to the Data List (Vocal Har-

mony Parameter List) on the website.

[5 ] LEAD Determines the amount of Vocal Effect that is applied to the lead vocal sound.

[6 ] HARM.

(Harmony)

Determines the amount of Vocal Effect that is applied to the harmony vocal sound.

[7 ] REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the overall Vocal Harmony sound, both

lead and harmony.

[8 ] CHORUS Determines the amount of chorus effect applied to the overall Vocal Harmony

sound, both lead and harmony.

[1 ]/

[2 ]

TRANS.

(TRANSPOSE)

MODE

Determines the amount by which the harmony parts are transposed. A setting of

“0” results in no transposition, while the “Auto” setting results in automatic trans-

position. When the mode is set to Vocoder or Vocoder-Mono, this parameter is

available.

Settings: 0, Auto, -3 – +3

[3 ]/

[4 ]

SESSION TABLE Determines how the harmonies will be voiced, or what type of chord will be used

in creating the harmonies, according to different musical styles. This parameter is

available only when the mode is set to Chordal and the type is set to something

other than ScaleDiatonic or Parallel.

Settings: Normal, Simple, R&R, UrbanA, UrbanB, Blues7, UrbanC

[5 ]/

[6 ]

KEY ROOT Determines the root key for the transposition. Use this in combination with Key

Type below to enable modal scale harmony transposition. When the Chordal Type

parameter is set to ScaleDiatonic, this parameter is available.

Settings: C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B

[7 ]/

[8 ]

KEY TYPE Determines the scale type for the transposition. Use this in combination with Key

Root above to enable modal scale harmony transposition. When the Chordal Type

parameter is set to ScaleDiatonic, this parameter is available.

Settings: Maj, Min (Natural), Min (Harmonic)

Tyros5 Reference Manual 109

Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing –

 Editing the Part Tab Parameters

The parameters are arranged in a matrix.

Use the [A]–[E] buttons to select the desired parameter, then edit each of the Vocal Parts

including the Harmony notes (Harm.1, 2, 3) and Lead voice (your own voice) via the

[3 ]–[8 ] buttons.

For information on each parameter, see below.

 TRANSPOSE (selected by [A] button)

Determines the pitch transposition for each part. The range for all parts is the same; however, the lead vocal sound

can only be adjusted in octaves. When the Chordal Type is set to ScaleDiatonic, this parameter changes to Degree.

When Pitch Correct is set to Off, the Lead part is not available. When the Vocoder or Vocoder-Mono mode is

selected, the Harmony parts are not available.

TRANSPOSE Settings

Lead: -3 octaves – +3 octaves

Harmony 1, 2, 3: -36 semitones – +36 semitones

DEGREE Settings

Lead: -3 octaves – +3 octaves

Harmony 1, 2, 3: -3 octaves (-22 scale degrees) – Unison – +3 octaves (+22 scale degrees)

 DETUNE (selected by [B] button)

Determines the fine pitch setting for each part. Adjust this to produce a warm chorusing effect, or to achieve a nat-

ural, less-than-perfect vocal sound. When Pitch Correct is set to Off, the Lead part is not available.

Settings: -50 cents – +50 cents

 FORMANT (selected by [C] button)

Determines the formant setting for each part. This parameter can be used to finely change the character of the

vocal sound. The higher the value, the more “feminine” the harmony voice becomes. The lower the value, the more

“masculine” the voice. When Pitch Correct is set to Off, the Lead part is not available.

Settings: -62 – +62

 PAN (selected by [D] button)

Determines the pan position setting for each part. Setting each vocal part to a different pan position, with the lead

vocal at center, for example, results in a naturally wide stereo sound.

Settings: L63 (Left) – C (Center) – R63 (Right)

 VOLUME (selected by [E] button)

Determines the volume setting for each part. Use this to adjust the relative level balance among the vocal parts.

Settings: 0–127

110 Tyros5 Reference Manual

 PITCH CORRECT MODE (set by [7 ]–[8 ] buttons)

Determines how Pitch Correct affects your voice. For information on each parameter, refer to the Data List (Vocal

Harmony Parameter List) on the website.

Settings: OFF, SOFT 1, SOFT 2, HARD

 Editing the Detail Tab Parameters

Use the [2 ]–[5 ] buttons to select the desired parameter, then set the value of

the selected parameter by using the [6 ]/[7 ] buttons.

For information on each parameter, refer to the Data List (Vocal Harmony Parameter List) on the website.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 111

Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing –

This section explains how to create your own Synth Vocoder types, and lists the detailed

parameters for editing. A sum total of sixty types (Synth Vocoder and Vocal Harmony

types) can be created and saved.

1 Press the [VH TYPE SELECT] button to call up the Vocal Harmony Type Selection dis-

play.

2 Use the TAB [][] buttons to select the Synth Vocoder tab.

3 Select a Synth Vocoder type to be edited by using the [A]–[J] buttons.

4 Press the [8 ] (EDIT) button to call up the Synth Vocoder Edit display.

5 Use the TAB [][] buttons to call up the desired tab, then edit

the Synth Vocoder by using [A]–[E], [G] and [J] buttons and [1

]–[8 ] buttons or sliders.

There are two tabs in the Synth Vocoder Edit display; refer to pages 112–114 for

editing each tab.

• OVERVIEW........... Edits basic parameters for Synth Vocoder type, including

Carrier, Vocoder Attack/Release and HPF (High Pass Fil-

ter), etc.

• DETAIL.................. Detailed editing for Synth Vocoder type.

6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Synth Vocoder type.

Editing the Synth Vocoder Types

For information on “Editing the Vocal

Harmony Types,” refer to page 106.

NOTE

The settings here will be lost if

you change to another Synth

Vocoder type or you turn the

power off without executing the

save operation.

NOTICE

112 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Editing the Overview Tab Parameters

1 Use the [A]–[E] (or [J]) buttons to select the parameter to be adjusted, then set the value

by using the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons or sliders.

For information on each parameter, see page 113.

2 Press the [G] (VOCAL EFFECT EDIT) button to edit the Vocal Effect.

Use the [1 ]–[5 ] buttons to select the desired effect type and parameter, then set the value of the selected

parameter by using the [6

]/[7 ] buttons.

For information on each parameter, refer to the Data List on the website.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 113

Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing –

CARRIER (set by [A]/[B] buttons)

Selects the musical instrument sound used as the source (Carrier) for the Synth Vocoder. (The Carrier serves as the

basic sound over which the vocal characteristics are applied.)

VOCODER parameters (selected by [C]/[D] buttons)

HPF (High Pass Filter) parameters (selected by [C]/[D] buttons)

FORMANT parameters (selected by [C]/[D] buttons)

CARRIER parameters (selected by [E]/[J] buttons)

EFFECT parameters (selected by [E]/[J] buttons)

[1 ] ATTACK Determines the attack time of the Synth Vocoder sound. The higher the value, the

slower the attack.

Settings: 1ms – 200ms

[2 ] RELEASE Determines the release time of the Synth Vocoder sound. The higher the value, the

slower the decay.

Settings: 10ms – 3000ms

[3 ] FREQ. (Frequency) Determines the HPF cutoff frequency for the microphone input sound. Setting this

to a low value results in a minimally processed input sound—in other words, close

to the original. Setting this to higher values emphasizes the higher frequency conso-

nant and sibilant sounds (making words easier to understand).

Settings: Thru, 500Hz – 16kHz

[4 ] LEVEL Determines the level of the microphone sound output from the HPF.

Settings: 0 – 127

[5 ] SHIFT Determines the amount (in BPF) by which the cutoff frequency value of the BPFs

(for the Inst Input) is shifted. This parameter can be used to change the character of

the Vocoder sound.

Settings: -2, -1, +0, +1, +2

[6 ] OFFSET Adjusts the cutoff frequencies of all BPFs (for the Inst Input) finely. This parameter

can be used to finely change the character of the Vocoder sound.

Settings: -63 – +0 – +63

[1 ] VOLUME Determines the level of the Carrier for the Synth Vocoder sound.

Settings: 0–127

[2 ] OCTAVE Determines the octave setting of the Carrier for the Synth Vocoder sound.

Settings: -2 – +2

[3 ] NOISE Determines the noise level which is input to the Synth Vocoder. This can be used to

emphasize sibilant and plosive sounds, and make the speech-like characteristics

more pronounced.

Settings: 0 – 127

[4 ]/

[5 ]

TYPE Determines the specific type of effect applied to the lead Synth Vocoder sound. A

wide range of reverb, delay, modulation, distortion and other special effects are

available. You can edit the vocal effect by pressing the [G] (VOCAL EFFECT

EDIT) button (step 2 on page 112).

For a list of the effect types, refer to the Data List on the website.

[6 ] DEPTH Determines the amount of effect applied to the overall Synth Vocoder sound.

[7 ] REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the overall Synth Vocoder sound.

[8 ] CHORUS Determines the amount of chorus effect applied to the overall Synth Vocoder sound.

114 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Editing the Detail Tab Parameters

Use the [B]–[E] buttons to select the BAND PASS FILTER 1–5 or

6–10, then set the value by using the [1 ]–[5 ] buttons or

sliders.

BAND PASS FILTER 1–10 parameters

Determines each output gain of the BPF 1 – 10 for the Inst Input (keyboard performance sound). The BPF 1 corre-

sponds to the lowest Formant while the BPF 10 corresponds to the highest Formant.

Settings: -18dB – +18dB

Feedback (howling) may result depend-

ing on the setup settings. Be careful

especially when you increase values.

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 115

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

Mixing Console

– Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

Contents

Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters ................................................................ 115

Editing FILTER Parameters ........................................................................ 116

Editing TUNE Parameters............................................................................ 117

Editing EFFECT Parameters ....................................................................... 118

• Adjusting the Effect Depth for Each Part................................................. 118

• Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block ................................................. 118

• Editing and Saving Your Original Effect Type......................................... 120

Editing EQ Parameters ................................................................................. 122

• Editing and Saving Your Original Master EQ Type................................. 123

Editing Master Compressor Settings ........................................................... 123

Line Out Settings ........................................................................................... 124

Block Diagram ............................................................................................... 125

Regarding the Mixing Console, the Reference Manual covers detailed descriptions of each parameter while the Owner’s

Manual covers the basic instructions including the Save operation. You can edit various parameters for the Parts called up

via the [MIXING CONSOLE] button, then save your edits for future recall.

Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters

[C]/[H] VOICE Allows you to re-select the Voices for each part.

[D]/[I] PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected part (channel).

[E]/[J] VOLUME Determines the volume of each part or channel, giving you fine control over the bal-

ance of all the parts.

•Note the following operation limitations.

•For each Style part, you can select the Voices for recording (pages 34 and 35).

•For each Style or Song channel, you cannot select Voices in the User drive.

•For each Multi Pad, you cannot change the Voice.

•When a GM Song is selected, only a Drum Kit Voice can be selected for channel 10 (in the SONG CH9-

16 page).

NOTE

For a Style or Song channel, calling up a rhythm/percussion Voice (Drum Kit, etc.) will replace the channel

settings with those for the new Voice. In such a case, the original settings may not be restored even if you

re-select the original Voice. To restore the original sound, select the same Style or Song again without exe-

cuting the Save operation.

NOTE

116 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Editing FILTER Parameters

[D]/[I] HARMONIC

CONTENT

Allows you to adjust the Resonance (page 14) for each part.

[E]/[J] BRIGHTNESS Determines the brightness of the sound for each part by adjusting the Cutoff Fre-

quency (page 14).

Tyros5 Reference Manual 117

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

Editing TUNE Parameters

[A]/[B]/

[F]/[G]

PORTAMENTO

TIME

Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note

played on the keyboard to the next. The Portamento Time determines the pitch transi-

tion time. Higher values result in a longer pitch change time. Setting this to “0” results

in no effect. This parameter is available only when the selected keyboard part is set to

Mono.

[C]/[H] PITCH BEND

RANGE

Determines the range of the PITCH BEND wheel for each keyboard part. The range is

from “0” to “12” with each step corresponding to one semitone.

[D]/[I] OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down for

each keyboard part. The value set here is added to the setting made via the OCTAVE [-

]/[+] buttons.

[E]/[J] TUNING Determines the pitch of each keyboard part in cents.

[1 ]–

[3 ]

TRANSPOSE Allows you to set transposition for overall sound of the instrument (MASTER), Song

playback (SONG), or keyboard pitch (KBD), respectively. Please note that the “KBD”

setting also transposes the pitch of Style playback and the Multi Pads (since these are

also affected by keyboard play in the left-hand section).

In musical terms a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone. (100 cents equal one semitone.)

NOTE

118 Tyros5 Reference Manual

This instrument features eleven Effect Blocks, giving you powerful tools to richly enhance the sounds of the

instrument or completely transform them. The Effects are divided into the following groups:

 Reverb, Chorus

The Effects of these Blocks are applied to the overall sound or all Parts. In each of these Effect Blocks, you can select

only one Effect Type at a time and adjust the Send Level (Depth) for each Part as well as the Return Level for all Parts.

 DSP1

When the Connection is set to “System” on the EFFECT PARAMETER EDIT display (page 120), the Effects of this

Block are applied only to the Style and Song sounds. In this status, you can select only one Effect Type at a time and

adjust the Send Level (Depth) for each Part as well as Return Level for all Parts. When the Connection is set to

“Insertion” on the EFFECT PARAMETER EDIT display, the Effect of this Block is applied to a specific channel of

the Style and Song.

 DSP2-9

The Effects of these Blocks are applied to a specific Part or Channel, with the exception of the Multi Pads and

microphone input. Different Effect Types can be selected for each of the available Parts or Channels.

Adjusting the Effect Depth for Each Part

Use the [B]–[E] or [G]–[J] buttons to select the desired Effect Block, then use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to adjust

the Effect Depth for each Part.

Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block

This section covers how to change the Effect Type of each Effect Block. The settings here can be saved to a

Registration Memory, Song or Style.

1 Call up the desired page from PANEL, SONG or STYLE via the [MIXING CONSOLE] but-

ton.

Editing EFFECT Parameters

Tyros5 Reference Manual 119

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

2 In the EFFECT page, press the [F] (TYPE) button to call up the Effect Type Selection dis-

play.

3 Press the [A] button.

4 Use the [1 ]/[2 ] buttons to select the Effect Block.

5 Use the [3 ]/[4 ] buttons to select the Part to which you want to apply the effect.

Note that a Part cannot be selected if “REVERB,” “CHORUS,” or “DSP1” is selected. This is because only one of

the Effect Types can be selected to be commonly applied to all available Parts.

6 Press the [B] button.

7 Use the [1 ]/[2 ] buttons to select the Category then use the [3 ]–[5 ] but-

tons to select the Effect Type.

Note that the Reverb Block is not divided into any Categories.

If you want to edit detailed Parameters of the selected Effect Type, press the [H] (DETAIL) button. For details,

refer to the next section.

8 Save the Effect Settings to a Registration Memory, Song or Style.

For instructions, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

Effect

Block

Effect-applicable parts Effect characteristics

REVERB All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club.

CHORUS All parts Produces a rich, “fat” sound as if several parts are being played simultane-

ously. In addition, other type effects (such as reverb, delay, etc.) can also be

selected in this effect block.

DSP1 STYLE PART,

SONG CHANNEL 1–16

This effect is applied only to Style/Song parts.

DSP2,

DSP3,

DSP4,

DSP5,

DSP6

RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2,

RIGHT 3, LEFT,

SONG CHANNEL 1–16

Any unused DSP blocks are automatically assigned to the appropriate parts

(channels) as needed. Only one DSP block can be assigned to each keyboard

or Song part.

DSP7 Microphone sound,

SONG CHANNEL 1–16

This effect is applied to the MIC input (in addition to the Vocal Harmony

effect)/Song parts.

DSP8,

DSP9

STYLE PART These effects are applied only to Style parts.

74 5

120 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Editing and Saving Your Original Effect Type

You can edit detailed parameters of the selected Effect Type. The parameter settings can be saved as your original

Effect Type as well as to a Registration Memory, Style or Song as described in the previous section. This section

covers how to save the settings as an original Effect Type.

1 Once you’ve selected an Effect Block and Effect Type above, press the [H] (DETAIL) but-

ton to call up the display for editing the effect parameters.

2 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to select a parameter then use the [6 ]/[7 ] but-

tons to edit the value.

When Reverb, Chorus, or DSP1 is selected as the Effect Block, you can adjust the Return Level via the [8 ]

button. If you want to change the Effect Block and Type, use the [1 ]–[3 ] buttons.

3 If DSP 2–9 is selected as the Effect Block, edit the Variation parameter if desired.

Press the [E] button to move the cursor to the Variation parameter, then edit the value via the [6 ]/[7 ] but-

tons. This parameter is effective only when the [VARIATION] button lamp lights on the panel. To move the cursor

to the normal parameters, press the [B] button.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 121

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the User Memory menu.

5 Use the [3 ]–[6 ] buttons to select the destination for saving the settings as a

User Effect.

6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button again to execute the Save operation.

In the Naming window called up via this operation, assign the name to the User Effect Type then press the [8 ]

(OK) button to save the User Effect Type. If you want to call up the User Effect Type saved here, select the corre-

sponding Effect Block and “USER” Category in the Effect Type Selection display.

122 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Equalizer (also called “EQ”) is a sound processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands that can be

boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound

from speakers to match the special character of the room. For example, you can cut some of the low range frequencies

when playing in large spaces where the sound is too “boomy,” or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces

where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes.

As shown below, this instrument possesses a high grade five-band Master EQ which is applied to the entire sound. You

can select one of five preset EQ types and create two User Master EQ types by editing the related parameters. In

addition to the Master EQ, Part EQ is available, letting you boost/cut the high band or low band for each Part.

MASTER EQ

PART EQ

Editing EQ Parameters

Q (also called “Bandwidth” or “Shape”)

GAIN

FREQ

(Frequency)

5 bands 

EQ1

(Low)

EQ2

(Low

Mid)

EQ3

(Mid)

EQ4

(High

Mid)

EQ5

(High)

The parameters of this diagram corre-

spond to those edited in Steps 3–4 on

the next page.

[B]/[C] TYPE Selects the desired Master EQ type. This affects the overall sound of the instrument.

[F] EDIT For editing the Master EQ. See page 123.

[D]/[I] EQ HIGH Boosts or attenuates the high EQ band for each part.

[E]/[J] EQ LOW Boosts or attenuates the low EQ band for each part.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 123

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

Editing and Saving Your Original Master EQ Type

1 Press the [F] (EDIT) button in the EQ Page.

The MASTER EQ EDIT display is called up.

2 Use the [B]/[C] buttons to select a preset EQ type.

The set parameters of the selected EQ type are automatically shown at the bottom of the display.

3 Use the [3 ]–[7 ] buttons to boost or cut each of the five bands.

Use the [8 ] buttons to boost or cut all the five bands at the same time.

4 If desired, adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the band

selected in step 3.

To adjust the bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”), use the [1 ] buttons. The higher the value of Q, the nar-

rower the band width.

To adjust the FREQ (center frequency), use the [2 ] buttons. The available FREQ range is different for each

band.

5 Press the [H] or [I] (STORE 1 or 2) button to execute the Store operation.

In the Naming display called up via this operation, assign the name then press the [8 ] (OK) button to store your

settings as a User Master EQ Type, which can be called up via the [B]/[C] buttons.

For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

Editing Master Compressor Settings

124 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Line Out Settings

[A] DRUM&PERC./

PANEL

Switches the displayed menu: PANEL parts or DRUM & PERCUSSION instruments.

[F] SUB3–4/AUX

OUT

Switches the displayed menu: SUB3–4 or AUX OUT.

This also actually switches the role of the LINE OUT SUB [3]–[4] jacks or AUX

OUT jacks accordingly.

[1 ]–

[3 ]

PART

(PANEL Page)

Selects the desired part/drum instrument.

[1 ]/

[2 ]

INSTRUMENTS

(DRUM &

PERCUSSION

Page)

[3 ] DEPENDS ON

PART (DRUM &

PERCUSSION

Page)

When this is checked, the selected drum instrument will be output via the jacks set

from the PANEL page at left.

[4 ] MAIN When this is checked, the selected part/drum instruments will be output from LINE

OUT MAIN jacks, PHONES jacks, LOOP SEND jack, and optional speaker.

[5 ] SUB1 When one of these columns (jacks) is checked, the selected part/drum instruments

will be output from only the selected SUB jack(s).

[6 ]SUB2

[7 ]SUB3

[8 ]SUB4

PANEL Page DRUM & PERCUSSION Page

Press [A]

button

Only the DSP 2–9 and Vocal Harmony effects can be applied to the sound output from the SUB jacks. Other

effects (Reverb, Chorus and DSP 1) will not be applied. (If the “Connection” parameter of DSP 1 is set to

“Insertion,” DSP 1 will also be applied.)

NOTE

Tyros5 Reference Manual 125

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

Block Diagram

126 Tyros5 Reference Manual

Utility

– Making Global Settings –

Contents

CONFIG 1 ...................................................................................................... 126

CONFIG 2 ...................................................................................................... 128

MEDIA............................................................................................................ 129

OWNER .......................................................................................................... 130

SYSTEM RESET........................................................................................... 131

• Factory Reset—Restoring the Factory Programmed Settings.................. 131

• Custom Reset—Backup/Restore .............................................................. 132

1 Fade In/Out

These parameters determine how Style or Song playback is faded in/out when using the [FADE IN/OUT] button.

2 Metronome

CONFIG 1

Select the desired parameter:

1 Fade In/Out

2 Metronome

3 Parameter Lock

4 Tap

5 Auto Power Off

[3 ] FADE IN TIME Determines the time it takes for the Style/Song volume to fade in, or go from mini-

mum to maximum (range of 0–20.0 seconds).

[4 ] FADE OUT TIME Determines the time it takes for the Style/Song volume to fade out, or go from maxi-

mum to minimum (range of 0–20.0 seconds).

[5 ] FADE OUT HOLD

TIME

Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out (range of 0–5.0

seconds).

[2 ] VOLUME Determines the volume of the metronome sound.

[3 ]–

[5 ]

SOUND Determines whether a bell accent is sounded or not at the first beat of each measure.

[6 ]/

[7 ]

TIME

SIGNATURE

Determines the time signature of the metronome sound.

Tyros5 Reference Manual 127

Utility – Making Global Settings –

3 Parameter Lock

This lets you lock or maintain the settings of specific parameters (such as Effect and Split Point), even when the

panel setups are changed by Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, etc. To set this function, use the [1 ]–

[7 ] (SELECT) buttons to select the desired parameter then use the [8 ]/[8 ] (MARK ON/OFF) buttons to

enter or remove the checkmarks. Repeat this step as desired. Items having checkmarks will be locked.

4 Tap

This allows you to set the percussion sound and the velocity which sounds when the [TAP TEMPO] button is

tapped.

5 Auto Power Off

For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

[2 ]–

[4 ]

PERCUSSION Selects the percussion sound.

[5 ]/

[6 ]

VELOCITY Sets the velocity.

128 Tyros5 Reference Manual

1 Line Out (MAIN) / Screen Content

2 Display-related settings / Voice Category Button Options

3 S.Art2 Auto Articulation

Determines whether articulation is added to S.Art2 Voices automatically.

CONFIG 2

[3 ]/

[4 ]

LINE OUT

(MAIN)

Determines whether or not the sound is output via LINE OUT (MAIN).

HEADPHONE SW: LINE OUT (MAIN) sounds normally, but is cut off when headphones

are inserted to the PHONES jack.

ON: Sound is output via LINE OUT (MAIN), even if headphones are connected.

OFF: LINE OUT (MAIN) sound is off.

[5 ]/

[6 ]

SCREEN

CONTENT

Selects display contents for the external monitor. For details, refer to the Owner's Manual.

[1 ] STYLE TEMPO Selects whether or not the default tempo of each preset Style is displayed above the preset

Style name in the Style Selection display.

[2 ]VOICE

NUMBER

Determines whether or not the Voice bank and number are shown in the Voice Selection dis-

play. This is useful when you want to check which bank select MSB/LSB values and program

change number you need to specify when selecting the Voice from an external MIDI device.

[3 ] TIME STAMP Determines whether or not the Updated Date and Updated Time are shown on the File Selec-

tion display.

[5 ]/

[6 ]

VOICE

Documenttranscriptie

DIGITAL WORKSTATION Tyros5-76 Tyros5-61 Reference Manual This Reference Manual explains advanced features of the Tyros5 that are not explained in the Owner’s Manual. Please read the Owner’s Manual first, before reading this Reference Manual. C.S.G., DMI Development Division © 2013-2014 Yamaha Corporation Published 02/2014 PO-B0 EN Contents * Each chapter in this Reference Manual corresponds to the relevant chapters in the Owner’s Manual. 1 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 4 Voice Types (Characteristics) .................................................................................................................. 4 Selecting GM, XG and Other Voices ....................................................................................................... 6 Touch Response and Effect-Related Settings ......................................................................................... 7 Pitch-Related Settings ........................................................................................................................... 10 Editing Voices (Voice Set) ..................................................................................................................... 12 Editing Organ Voices (Organ World) ..................................................................................................... 17 Editing Ensemble Voices (Ensemble Voice Edit)................................................................................... 19 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 25 Selecting the Chord Fingering Type ...................................................................................................... 26 Style Playback Related Settings ............................................................................................................ 28 Memorizing Original Settings to a One Touch Setting ........................................................................... 30 Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) .................................................................................................. 31 3 Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance – 46 Multi Pad Creating (Multi Pad Creator) .................................................................................................. 46 Multi Pad Editing .................................................................................................................................... 48 4 Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – 50 Editing Music Notation Settings ............................................................................................................. 51 Editing Lyrics/Text Display Settings....................................................................................................... 53 Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback ............................................................. 54 Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat Settings, Channel Settings, Guide Function) ................. 55 Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) ................................................................................................. 59 5 Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files – 76 Recording Your Performance ................................................................................................................ 76 Converting a file ..................................................................................................................................... 80 Editing the Recorded Data (Multi Track Recording File)........................................................................ 82 Re-recording the Multi Track Recording File ......................................................................................... 84 Setting the Start/End Points of the Audio (Multi Track Recording File) ................................................. 87 Playlist Mode.......................................................................................................................................... 88 6 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Settings for Your Performance – 91 Creating a Set of Favorite Records........................................................................................................ 91 Editing Records...................................................................................................................................... 92 Saving the Records as a Single File (Music Finder File) ....................................................................... 93 7 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 95 Editing a Registration Memory............................................................................................................... 95 Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) ........................................................................................... 96 Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration Sequence)....................................... 97 8 Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing – 100 Vocal Harmony and Talk Setting ......................................................................................................... 100 Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk) .................................................................. 101 Setting and Editing Vocal Harmony Types .......................................................................................... 104 Editing the Synth Vocoder Types......................................................................................................... 111 2 Tyros5 Reference Manual 9 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 115 Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters .......................................................................................................... 115 Editing FILTER Parameters ................................................................................................................. 116 Editing TUNE Parameters.................................................................................................................... 117 Editing EFFECT Parameters ............................................................................................................... 118 Editing EQ Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 122 Editing Master Compressor Settings ................................................................................................... 123 Line Out Settings ................................................................................................................................. 124 Block Diagram...................................................................................................................................... 125 10 Utility – Making Global Settings – 126 CONFIG 1 ............................................................................................................................................ 126 CONFIG 2 ............................................................................................................................................ 128 MEDIA.................................................................................................................................................. 129 OWNER ............................................................................................................................................... 130 SYSTEM RESET ................................................................................................................................. 131 11 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 133 Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings ..................................................................................................... 133 MIDI Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 136 MFC10 Settings ................................................................................................................................... 142 Connecting to a Network (Bundled USB Wireless LAN Adaptor) ........................................................ 144 Appendix 148 Expansion Pack Related Operations ................................................................................................... 148 Index 150 Using the PDF manual • To quickly jump to items and topics of interest, click on the desired items in the “Bookmarks” index to the left of the main display window. (Click the “Bookmarks” tab to open the index if it is not displayed.) • Click the page numbers that appear in this manual to go directly to the corresponding page. • Select “Find” or “Search” from the Adobe Reader “Edit” menu and enter a keyword to locate related information in the document. NOTE The names and positions of menu items may vary according to the version of Adobe Reader being used. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. Note that all display examples shown in this manual are in English. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Tyros5 Reference Manual 3 1 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – Contents Voice Types (Characteristics) ........................................................................... 4 Selecting GM, XG and Other Voices................................................................ 6 Touch Response and Effect-Related Settings .................................................. 7 • Setting the Touch Response of the Keyboard............................................... 7 • Using Keyboard Harmony/Echo .................................................................. 8 Pitch-Related Settings ..................................................................................... 10 • Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument........................................... 10 • Scale Tuning............................................................................................... 10 • Changing the Part Assignment of the TRANSPOSE Buttons ................... 11 Editing Voices (Voice Set)................................................................................ 12 • Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays...................................... 13 • Disabling Automatic Selection of Voice Sets (Effects, etc.) ...................... 16 Editing Organ Voices (Organ World) ............................................................ 17 Editing Ensemble Voices (Ensemble Voice Edit)........................................... 19 Voice Types (Characteristics) The particular type of Voice is indicated at the upper left of the Voice name in the Voice Selection display. The defining characteristics of these Voices and their performance advantages are described below. S.Art! (Super Articulation) These Voices provide many benefits with great playability and expressive control in real time. For example, with the Saxophone Voice, if you play a C and then a D in a very legato way, you will hear the note change seamlessly, as though a saxophone player played it in a single breath. Similarly with the Concert Guitar Voice and play the D note strongly, the D note would sound as a “hammer on,” without the string being plucked again. Depending on how you play, other effects such as “shaking” or breath noises (for the Trumpet Voice), or finger noises (for the Guitar Voice) are produced. For details on how to best play each S.Art! Voice, call up the information window (pressing the [6 ] (INFO) button in the Voice Selection display). S.Art2! (Super Articulation2) For wind instrument Voices and Violin Voices, a special technology called AEM (see below) has been used, which features detailed samples of special expressive techniques used on those specific instruments—to bend or slide into notes, to “join” different notes together, or to add expressive nuances at the end of a note, etc. You can add these articulations by playing legato or non-legato, or by jumping in pitch by around an octave. For example, using the Clarinet Voice, if you hold a C note and play the Bb above, you’ll hear a glissando up to the Bb. Some “note off” effects are also produced automatically when you hold a note for over a certain time. Each S.Art2! Voice has its own default vibrato setting, so that when you select a S.Art2! Voice, the appropriate vibrato is applied regardless of the Modulation wheel position. You can adjust the vibrato by moving the Modulation wheel. For details on how to best play each S.Art2! Voice, call up the information window (pressing the [6 ] (INFO) button in the Voice Selection display). Live! NEXT PAGE 4 Tyros5 Reference Manual These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly authentic, rich sound—full of atmosphere and ambience. These Voices use sophisticated programming to capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments. Sweet! These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology—and feature a finely detailed and natural sound. Drums Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. SFX Various special effect sounds and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. Live! Drums These are high-quality drum sounds that take full advantage of Stereo Sampling and Dynamic Sampling. Live! SFX These are various high-quality special effect sounds and percussion sounds that take full advantage of Stereo Sampling and Dynamic sampling. Organ Flutes! These authentic organ Voices let you adjust the various footages and craft your own original organ sounds. See page 17 for details. MegaVoice These Voices make special use of velocity switching. Each velocity range (the measure of your playing strength) has a completely different sound. For example, a guitar MegaVoice includes the sounds of various performance techniques. In conventional instruments, different Voices having those sounds would be called up via MIDI and played in combination to achieve the desired effect. However, now with MegaVoices, a convincing guitar part can be played with just a single Voice, using specific velocity values to play the desired sounds. Because of the complex nature of these Voices and the precise velocities need to play the sounds, they’re not intended for playing from the keyboard. They are, however, very useful and convenient when creating MIDI data—especially when you want to avoid using several different Voices just for a single instrument part. 1 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – Cool! NOTE S.Art!, S.Art2! and Mega Voices are not compatible with other instrument models. For this reason, any Song or Style you’ve created on this instrument using these Voices will not sound properly when played back on the instruments which do not have these types of Voices. NOTE S.Art!, S.Art2! and Mega Voices sound differently depending on keyboard range, velocity, touch, etc. Hence, if you apply a HARMONY/ECHO effect, change the transpose setting or change the Voice Set parameters, unexpected or undesired sounds may result. NOTE The characteristics of S.Art2! Voices (default vibrato setting and articulation effects applied by the [ART] buttons) are effective for real-time performance; however, these effects may not be completely reproduced when you play back a MIDI Song which has been recorded using S.Art2! Voices. For a list of preset Voices of this instrument, refer to the “Voice List” in the Data List, available at the online Yamaha Library. Converting the Voices of a MIDI Song to MegaVoices (MEGAEnhancer) MEGAEnhancer is a software program that converts XG/GM song data (Standard MIDI File) to song data specially enhanced to be played back using an instrument or tone generator containing MegaVoices. With the use of the sophisticated MegaVoices, MEGAEnhancer automatically makes conventional song files with guitar, bass, and other parts sound much more realistic and authentic. MEGAEnhancer can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. http://download.yamaha.com/ Tyros5 Reference Manual 5 AEM Technology When you play the piano, pressing a “C” key produces a definite and relatively fixed C note. When you play a wind instrument, however, a single fingering may produce several different sounds depending on the breath strength, the note length, the adding of trills or bend effects, and other performance techniques. Also, when playing two notes continuously—for example “C” and “D”—these two notes will be smoothly joined, and not sound independent as they would on a piano. AEM (Articulation Element Modeling) is the technology for simulating this characteristic of instruments. During performance, the most appropriate sound samples are selected in sequence in real time, from huge quantities of sampled data. They are smoothly joined and sounded—as would naturally occur on an actual acoustic instrument. This technology to smoothly join different samples enables the application of realistic vibrato. Conventionally on electronic musical instruments, vibrato is applied by moving the pitch periodically. AEM technology goes much further by analyzing and disaggregating the sampled vibrato waves, and smoothly joins the disaggregated data in real time during your performance. If you move the Modulation wheel when you play the S.Art2! Voice (using AEM technology), you can also control the depth of the vibrato, and still maintain remarkable realism. Selecting GM, XG and Other Voices This instrument features Voices provided specially for Style playback and XG/GM compatibility. These Voices cannot be called up directly from the VOICE category selection buttons. However, they can be called up as described below. 1 Press the PART SELECT button corresponding to the Part you want to use. 2 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons (other than the [ORGAN WORLD], [ENSEMBLE] and [EXPANSION/USER] buttons) to call up the Voice Selection display. 3 Press the [8 ] (UP) button to call up the Voice categories. 3 4 Press the [2 ] (P2) button to display Page 2. 5 Press the desired [A]–[J] button to call up the Voice Selection display of GM&XG Voices, GM2 Voices, etc. 6 6 4 Select the desired Voice. Tyros5 Reference Manual NOTE You can also find the “Legacy” folder in this display. This folder contains previous Yamaha keyboards’ Voices (such as Tyros, Tyros2, Tyros3, Tyros4, etc.) for data compatibility with other models. Touch Response and Effect-Related Settings Setting the Touch Response of the Keyboard Touch Response determines how the sound responds to your playing strength. The touch response type becomes the common setting for all Voices. 1 NOTE Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [E][F] KEYBOARD/PANEL 2 Some Voices are purposely designed without touch response, in order to emulate the true characteristics of the actual instrument (for example, conventional organs, which have no touch response). 1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired parameter: “1 INITIAL TOUCH” or “2 AFTER TOUCH.” Voices – Playing the Keyboard – Touch Response is applied to the checkmarked parts. 2 3 3 Use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to set the touch response. 1 INITIAL TOUCH [1 ]/ [2 ] TOUCH Determines the Initial Touch Response type. HARD 2: Requires strong playing to produce high volume. Best for players with a heavy touch. HARD 1: Requires moderately strong playing for higher volume. MEDIUM: Standard Touch Response. SOFT 1: Produces high volume with moderate playing strength. SOFT 2: Produces relatively high volume even with light playing strength. Best for players with a light touch. [4 ] TOUCH OFF LEVEL Determines the fixed volume level when Touch is set to “OFF.” [5 ]– [8 ] LEFT–RIGHT3 Turns Initial Touch on or off for each keyboard part. 2 AFTER TOUCH [1 ]/ [2 ] TOUCH Determines the After Touch response type. HARD: Relatively strong After Touch pressure is needed to produce changes. MEDIUM: Produces a fairly standard After Touch response. SOFT: Allows you to produce relatively large changes with very light After Touch pressure. [5 ]– [8 ] LEFT–RIGHT3 Turns After Touch on or off for each keyboard part. Tyros5 Reference Manual 7 Using Keyboard Harmony/Echo You can select the desired Harmony/Echo effect from a variety of types. 1 2 NOTE When the [MONO] button is turned to on or you use the S.Art!/S.Art2! Voices, the Harmony/Echo effect may not work properly. Turn the [HARMONY/ECHO] button on. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [F] HARMONY/ECHO 3 Use the [1 ]–[3 ] buttons to select the Harmony/Echo type. The Harmony/Echo types are divided into three groups (Harmony Types, Multi Assign Type, and Echo types), depending on the particular effect applied. 4 NOTE The available Harmony/Echo types differ when an Ensemble Voice is selected. Use the [4 ]–[8 ] buttons to select various Harmony/Echo settings. The available settings differ depending on the Harmony/Echo type. Harmony Types (see below) Multi Assign Type (see below) Echo Types (see below) 3 4 [4 ] VOLUME This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It determines the volume level of the Harmony/Echo notes generated by the Harmony/Echo effect. [5 ] SPEED This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above. It determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill effects. [6 ] ASSIGN Determines the keyboard Part that the effect is assigned. AUTO: Applies the effect to the part for which PART ON/OFF is on. When more than one parts are on, the RIGHT 1 part is given priority over the RIGHT 2/3 part. In a similar way the RIGHT 2 part is given priority over the RIGHT 3 part. MULTI: When more than one parts are on, the note played on the keyboard is sounded by the RIGHT 1 part and the harmonies (effect) are divided to the RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 and RIGHT 3 parts. When only one part is on, the note played on the keyboard and effect are sounded by that part. R1–R3: Applies the effect to the selected part (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2 or RIGHT 3). NOTE This parameter is not available for the Multi Assign type. 8 [7 ] CHORD NOTE ONLY This parameter is available when one of the Harmony Types is selected. When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to the notes (played in the right-hand section of the keyboard) that belongs to a chord played in the chord section of the keyboard. [8 ] TOUCH LIMIT This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the melody. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set value). Tyros5 Reference Manual  Harmony Types NOTE The harmony effect is applied to the note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the chord specified in the chord or left-hand section shown below. You can make these different Split Point settings according to your performance preferences. The “1+5” and “Octave” settings are not affected by the chord. NOTE The actual operation depends on the Split Point settings. For more information, refer to “Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass with Your Left Hand” in the Owner’s Manual. 1 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – Split Point Split Point RIGHT 1–3 Voices Chord section for Style playback and Harmony effect Split Point (for Style playback) LEFT Voice and chord section for Harmony effect Split Point (for the Voice) LEFT Voice RIGHT 1–3 Voices Chord section for Style playback and Harmony effect  Multi Assign Type The Multi Assign effect automatically assigns the notes of chords you play on the right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (Voices). For example, if you play a three-note chord, the first note you press is played by the RIGHT 1 Voice, the second by the RIGHT 2 Voice, and the third by the RIGHT 3 Voice. The Multi Assign effect is not affected by the [ACMP] and LEFT part on/off status.  Echo Types The Echo, Tremolo or Trill effect is applied to the note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo, regardless of the [ACMP] and the LEFT part on/off status. Keep in mind that Trill works when you hold down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously (or the last two notes, if more than two notes are held), and it plays those notes alternately. Tyros5 Reference Manual 9 Pitch-Related Settings Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument You can fine-tune the pitch of the entire instrument such as the keyboard, Style and Song parts (except the keyboard part played by the Drum Kit or SFX Kit Voices, and audio playback)—a useful feature when playing the Tyros5 along with other instruments or CD music. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE  TAB [E][F] MASTER TUNE 2 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to set the tuning in 0.2 Hz steps. Press both [] and [] buttons (of 4 and 5) simultaneously to reset the value to the factory setting of 440.0 Hz. Scale Tuning You can select various scales for playing in custom tunings for specific historical periods or music genres. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [A] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE  TAB [E][F] SCALE TUNE 2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired scale. The tuning of each note for the currently selected scale is shown. Preset Scale types EQUAL The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in music today. PURE MAJOR, PURE MINOR These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fifth). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies—such as choirs and a cappella singing. PYTHAGOREAN This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. MEAN-TONE This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale. WERCKMEISTER, KIRNBERGER This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character. The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when performing period music on the harpsichord. ARABIC1, ARABIC2 Use these tunings when playing Arabic music. NEXT PAGE 10 Tyros5 Reference Manual 3 Change the following settings as necessary. NOTE To register the Scale Tune settings to Registration Memory, be sure to checkmark the SCALE item in the REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS display. BASE NOTE Determines the base note for each scale. When the base note is changed, the pitch of the keyboard is transposed, yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes. [3 ]– [5 ] TUNE Select the desired note to be tuned by using the [3 ] buttons and tune it in cents by using the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons. 1 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – [2 ] NOTE In musical terms a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone. (100 cents equal one semitone.) [6 ]/ [7 ] PART SELECT [8 ] MARK ON/OFF Select the part to which the Scale Tune setting is applied by using the [6 ]/ [7 ] buttons. Then press the [8 ] button to add a checkmark or press the [8 ] button to remove the checkmark. Changing the Part Assignment of the TRANSPOSE Buttons You can determine to which parts the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons are applied. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [E][F] KEYBOARD/PANEL 2 Use the [B] button to select “4 TRANSPOSE ASSIGN.” 3 Press the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to select the desired part assignment. KEYBOARD The TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect the pitch of keyboard played Voices, Style playback (controlled by the performance in the chord section of the keyboard), and Multi Pad playback (when Chord Match is on, and left-hand chords are indicated)—but they do not affect Song playback. SONG The TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect only the pitch of Song playback. MASTER The TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect the overall pitch of the instrument, except audio playback. The assignment can be confirmed by the pop-up window called up via the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons. Tyros5 Reference Manual 11 Editing Voices (Voice Set) The Voice Set function allows you to create your own Voices by editing some parameters of the existing Voices. Once you’ve created a Voice, you can save it as a file to internal memory (User drive) or external devices for future recall. 1 Select the desired Voice (other than an Organ World Voice/Ensemble Voice). Organ World Voices/Ensemble Voices have different editing methods than described here. For instructions on editing the Organ World Voices, see page 17. For instructions on editing the Ensemble Voices, see page 19. 2 Press the [5 ] (VOICE SET) button to call up the VOICE SET display. 3 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the relevant setting page. For information on the available parameters in each page, see the “Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays” on page 13. 3 5 4 4 As necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) to be edited and edit the Voice by using the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons or sliders. By pressing the [D] (COMPARE) button, you can compare the sound of the edited Voice with the original (unedited) Voice. 5 12 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Voice. NOTICE For details on the Save operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual, Basic Operations. The settings will be lost if you select another Voice or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Tyros5 Reference Manual Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays The Voice Set parameters are organized into five different pages. The parameters in each page are described separately, below. NOTE The available parameters differ depending on the Voice.  COMMON Page [1 ] VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current edited Voice. [2 ]/ [3 ] TOUCH SENSE Adjusts the touch sensitivity (velocity sensitivity), or how greatly the volume responds to your playing strength. TOUCH SENSE OFFSET Changes to velocity curve according to VelOffset (with Depth set to 64) Actual Velocity for tone generator Actual Velocity for tone generator Offset = 96 (+64) Offset = 127 (+127) Depth = 127 (twice) 127 1 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – TOUCH SENSE DEPTH Changes to velocity curve according to VelDepth (with Offset set to 64) 127 Depth = 64 (normal) 64 Offset = 64 (normal) 64 Depth = 32 (half) Depends on offset Offset = 32 (-64) Depth = 0 0 64 127 Received Velocity (Actual KeyOn speed) 0 Depends on offset 64 127 Received Velocity (Actual KeyOn speed) Offset = 0 (-127) DEPTH: Determines the velocity sensitivity, or how much the level of the Voice changes in response to your playing strength (velocity). OFFSET: Determines the amount by which received velocities are adjusted for the actual velocity effect. [4 ]/ [5 ] PART OCTAVE Shifts the octave range of the edited Voice up or down in octaves. When the edited Voice is used as any of the RIGHT 1–3 parts, the R1/R2/R3 parameter is available; when the edited Voice is used as the LEFT part, the LEFT parameter is available. [6 ] MONO/POLY Determines whether the edited Voice is played monophonically or polyphonically. This setting can also be made from the VOICE EFFECT [MONO] button on the panel. [7 ] PORTAMENTO TIME Determines the pitch transition time when the edited Voice is set to MONO above. NOTE Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next.  CONTROLLER Page 1 MODULATION The MODULATION wheel can be used to modulate the parameters below as well as the pitch (vibrato). Here, you can set the degree to which the MODULATION wheel modulates each of the following parameters. [2 ] FILTER Determines the degree to which the MODULATION wheel modulates the Filter Cutoff Frequency. For details about the filter, see below. [3 ] AMPLITUDE Determines the degree to which the MODULATION wheel modulates the amplitude (volume). [5 ] LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which the MODULATION wheel modulates the pitch, or the vibrato effect. [6 ] LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which the MODULATION wheel modulates the Filter modulation, or the wah effect. [7 ] LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which the MODULATION wheel modulates the amplitude, or the tremolo effect. Tyros5 Reference Manual 13 2 AFTER TOUCH After Touch can be used to modulate the parameters below. Here, you can set the degree to which After Touch modulates each of the following parameters. [2 ] FILTER Determines the degree to which After Touch modulates the Filter Cutoff Frequency. See below for details about Filter. [3 ] AMPLITUDE Determines the degree to which After Touch modulates the amplitude (volume). [5 ] LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which After Touch modulates the pitch, or the vibrato effect. [6 ] LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which After Touch modulates the Filter modulation, or the wah effect. [7 ] LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which After Touch modulates the amplitude, or the tremolo effect.  SOUND Page FILTER Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking or passing a specific frequency range. The parameters below determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range. In addition to making the sound either brighter or mellower, Filter can be used to produce electronic, synthesizer-like effects. [1 ] BRIGHT (Brightness) Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the filter (see diagram). Higher values result in a brighter sound. Volume Cutoff Frequency These frequencies are “passed” by the filter. [2 ] HARMO. (Harmonic Content) Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency (resonance), set in BRIGHT. above (see diagram). Higher values result in a more pronounced effect. Frequency (pitch) Cutoff range Volume Resonance Frequency (pitch) EG Level The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments—such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone. Sustain Level ATTACK Key on 14 DECAY RELEASE Time Key off [3 ] ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played. The lower the value, the quicker the attack. [4 ] DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The lower the value, the quicker the decay. [5 ] RELES. (Release) Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released. The lower the value, the quicker the decay. Tyros5 Reference Manual VIBRATO Pitch SPEED Vibrato is a quavering, vibrating sound effect that is produced by regularly modulating the pitch of the Voice. DEPTH DELAY Time [6 ] DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato. [7 ] SPEED Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect. [8 ] DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset. 1 Voices – Playing the Keyboard –  EFFECT / EQ Page 1 REVERB DEPTH / CHORUS DEPTH / DSP DEPTH / PANEL SUSTAIN [1 ]/ [2 ] REVERB DEPTH Adjusts the reverb depth. [3 ]/ [4 ] CHORUS DEPTH Adjusts the chorus depth. [5 ] DSP ON/OFF Determines whether the DSP effect is on or off. This setting can also be made from the VOICE EFFECT [DSP] button on the panel. [6 ] DSP DEPTH Adjusts the DSP depth. If you want to re-select the DSP type, you can do so in the “2 DSP” menu explained on page 15. [7 ] PANEL SUSTAIN Determines the sustain level applied to the edited Voice when the VOICE EFFECT [SUSTAIN] button on the panel is turned on. [1 ]– [4 ] DSP TYPE Selects the DSP effect category and type. Select a type after selecting a category. [5 ]– [8 ] VARIATION Two variations are provided for each DSP type. Here, you can edit the VARIATION on/off status and the variation’s parameter value setting. [5 ] ON/OFF Turns the DSP Variation on or off for the selected Voice. This setting can also be made from the VOICE EFFECT [VARIATION] button on the panel. (This button is effective only when the [DSP] button is on.) PARAMETER Displays the variation parameter. (This differs depending on the effect type and cannot be changed.) VALUE Adjusts the value of the DSP variation parameter. 2 DSP [6 ]– [8 ] 3 EQ Determines the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands. For information about EQ, refer to page 122.  HARMONY Page Same as in the [FUNCTION]  [F] HARMONY/ECHO display. See “Using Keyboard Harmony/Echo” on page 8. Tyros5 Reference Manual 15 Disabling Automatic Selection of Voice Sets (Effects, etc.) Each Voice is linked to its default VOICE SET parameter settings. Usually these settings are automatically called up when a Voice is selected. However, you can also disable this feature by the operation in the relevant display as explained below. For example, if you want to change the Voice yet keep the same Harmony effect used with the previous Voice, set the HARMONY/ECHO parameter to OFF (in the display explained below). 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET  TAB [E][F] VOICE SET 2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired keyboard part. 2 3 3 Use the [4 ]–[7 ] buttons to turn on or off of each item for the selected Part. When the button is set to ON, the corresponding parameter settings are called up automatically together with the Voice selection. For information on which parameters are linked to each item, see below. 16 [4 ] VOICE Corresponds to the parameter settings of the COMMON, CONTROLLER, and SOUND pages. [5 ] EFFECT Corresponds to the parameter settings of 1 and 2 in the EFFECT/EQ page. [6 ] EQ Corresponds to the parameter settings of 3 in the EFFECT/EQ page. [7 ] HARMONY/ ECHO Corresponds to the HARMONY page. Tyros5 Reference Manual Editing Organ Voices (Organ World) The Organ World Voices can be edited by adjusting the footage levers, adding the attack sound, applying effects and equalizer, etc. If you want, you can also change the Rotary Speaker speed and adjust the Vibrato setting. 1 Select the desired Organ Voice in the Organ World display. 1-1 Press the [ORGAN WORLD] button. 1-2 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the organ type which you want to 1-3 Press the [D]/[I] button several times until the Preset Select display is called After editing, go to the Registration Memory function and save the setting. The settings will be lost if you select another Voice or turn the power of the instrument off without executing the Save operation. For details on the operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual. 1 NOTE Voices – Playing the Keyboard – edit. If you selected the CONCERT or THEATRE type, go on to step 3. Only effect/EQ parameters can be edited for those types. NOTICE The available parameters differ depending on the Organ type. up. 1-4 Use [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to select the desired preset. 2 Press the [D]/[I] button several times to call up the relevant setting display (FOOTAGES or VOLUME&ATTACK) For information on the available parameters in each display, see pages 17 and 18. 3 Use the [A] (EFFECT) buttons to call up the effect/EQ setting display. For information on the available parameters in each display, see pages 15 and 18. 4 As necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) to be edited and edit the Voice by using the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons or sliders. 5 Play the keyboard.  FOOTAGES Page For details on how to adjust the Footage levels, refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 1. [A] EFFECT Opens the effect/EQ setting display (page 18). [C] ROTARY (Rotary Speaker Speed)/ TREMOLO (Vintage/Home type only) Alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (DSP TYPE parameter in the effect/ EQ setting display), and the VOICE EFFECT [DSP] button is turned on. [F] VIBRATO (Vintage/Home type only) Alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes Voice ON or OFF. NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 17 [G]/[H] VIBRATO DEPTH (Vintage/Home type only) Sets the Vibrato depth to one of three levels: 1 (low), 2 (mid), or 3 (high). [D]/[I] FOOTAGES/ VOLUME & ATTACK / PRESETS Opens the Preset Select display or the relevant setting display (FOOTAGES or VOLUME & ATTACK)  VOLUME&ATTACK Same as the FOOTAGES display [1 ] VOL (Volume) Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the volume. [2 ] RESP (Response) Affects both the attack and release (page 14) portion of the sound, increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release, based on the FOOTAGES controls. The higher the value, the slower the swell and release. [3 ] VIBRATO SPEED (Vibrato Speed) (Vintage/Home type only) Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On/Off ([F] button) and Vibrato Depth ([G]/[H] buttons). [4 ] MODE The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the FIRST mode, attack (percussive sound) is applied only to the first notes played and held simultaneously; while the first notes are held, any subsequently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode, attack is applied equally to all notes. [5 ]– [7 ] 4’, 2 2/3’, 2’ These determine the attack sound volume of the Organ Flutes Voice. The 4’, 2-2/3’ and 2’ controls increase or reduce the volume of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the attack sound volume. [8 ] LENG (Length) Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar, the longer the decay.  Effect/EQ related display Same parameters as in the VOICE SET “EFFECT/EQ” Page explained on page 15. 18 Tyros5 Reference Manual Editing Ensemble Voices (Ensemble Voice Edit) In addition to enjoying the Presets, you can create your original Ensemble Voice by editing various parameters as described here. These relevant parameters determine which note is played by each Part, which Preset Voice is used with each Part, when sounds are actually produced, and how the pitch envelope is produced. These settings result in a highly realistic ensemble sound, as if acoustic instruments were played by real artists. 1 Select the desired Ensemble Voice. 1-1 Press the [ENSEMBLE] button. 1-2 Press one of the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to select the Ensemble Voice which you want to edit. 1 2 Press the [E] (EDIT) button to call up the Ensemble Voice (edit) display. 3 Use the TAB [][] buttons to call up the relevant setting page. Voices – Playing the Keyboard – If necessary, press the [J] (PRESETS) button, then select the desired one from the various Preset Ensemble Voices. For information on how to select more Ensemble Voices, refer to the Owner’s Manual. For information on the available parameters in each page, see pages 20–24. 3 2 1 6 4 5 4 Use the [A]–[E] buttons to select a parameter, then use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons or sliders to set the value for each part. 5 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the edit display. 6 Press the [J] (PRESET) button to save your edited Voice. NOTICE For details on the Save operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual, Basic Operations. The edited data will be lost if you change to another Voice or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation. Tyros5 Reference Manual 19  ASSIGN / HARMONY Orange: Active keys Gray: Ignored keys Octave Key Assign Status (page 21) Filter 1 Key off retrigger Filter 2 Assign (Assignment) [1 ]– [5 ] KEY ASSIGN TYPE Determines the Key Assignment type. This is applied commonly to all Voice parts. For details, refer to the Ensemble Voice Key Assign Type List below. [6 ]– [7 ] HARMONY (Harmony Type) Same as in the [FUNCTION]  [F] HARMONY/ECHO display. See “Using Keyboard Harmony/Echo” on page 8. Only two types (“4-WAY CLOSE 1” and “4-WAY CLOSE 2”) are available. [8 ] ON/OFF Turns the Harmony effect on or off. Ensemble Voice Key Assignment Structure Each Part monitors all the pressed notes and plays the appropriate notes according to the settings you made. For details about the settings, refer to the Ensemble Voice Key Assign Status List. You can conveniently call up the settings for all parts at once. The current setting of each Part (Key Assignment Status) is displayed at the bottom of its own keyboard figure (see above) on the screen. Part 4 Part 3 All Notes Part 2 Part 1 Filter 1 Filter 2 Assign 20 Tyros5 Reference Manual Ensemble Voice Key Assign Status List (Indication only) Parameter On-screen display Full name Description Filter 1/ Filter 2 F*D First * in Descending The highest * notes (“*” indicates the number of notes) are selected from the input notes and sent to the next stage. A*D F*A After *-th in Descending First * in Ascending *=2 The *th highest note and any higher notes do not sound, but all lower notes are selected from the input notes and sent to the next stage. *=2 1 The lowest * notes are selected from the input notes and sent to the next stage. A*A Assign Key off retrigger After *-th in Ascending The *th lowest note and any lower notes do not sound, but all higher notes are selected from the input notes and sent to the next stage. Voices – Playing the Keyboard – *=2 *=2 THRU Through All input notes are sent as is to the next stage. HI Highest Of the notes remaining after Filter 2, the highest is selected. LO Lowest Of the notes remaining after Filter 2, the lowest is selected. EA Earliest Of the notes remaining after Filter 2, the one input first of all is selected. LA Latest Of the notes remaining after Filter 2, the one input last of all is selected. RTG Retrigger Key Assign is updated whenever some of the keys are released (and notes satisfying all applicable conditions are played). (Not displayed) - Whenever keys are released, the corresponding voices simply stop playing and are not reassigned. However, when you play in legato, notes will be retriggered regardless of whether Key off retrigger is off or on (Yes or No in the table below). * Indicates an integer of 1 or higher. Ensemble Voice Key Assign Type List No. Key Assign Type Description 1 Unison 1—latest This setting results in complete unison. If one key is played, all four parts will produce the same note. If multiple keys are played, the unison note will be selected based on the last one played. Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Unison 2—highest and lowest This setting produces unison or a two-note harmony. If one key is played, all four parts will produce the same note; however, if two or more are played, the parts will be split between the lowest and highest. Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 3 4 Voice Close—all parts on retrigger 4 4 Voice Close—all parts on This setting is suitable for closed chords. If one key is played, all four parts will produce a sound. If two or more keys are played, the parts will be divided among the various notes of the chord. 2 Key off retrigger (*3) Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 1 Part 3 Part 2 Part 4 Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Yes Yes Yes No Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 21 5 4 Voice Open—all parts on retrigger 6 4 Voice Open—all parts on This setting is suitable for open chords. If one key is played, all four parts will produce a sound. If two or more keys are played, the parts will be divided among the various notes of the chord. Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 7 4 Voice Incremental 1 —from highest retrigger 8 4 Voice Incremental 1 —from highest 9 4 Voice Incremental 2 —from lowest retrigger 10 4 Voice Incremental 2 —from lowest 3 Voice Close—all parts on retrigger 12 3 Voice Close—all parts on 13 3 Voice Open—all parts on retrigger 14 3 Voice Open—all parts on 15 3 Voice Incremental 1 —from highest retrigger 16 3 Voice Incremental 1 —from highest 17 3 Voice Incremental 2 —from lowest retrigger 18 3 Voice Incremental 2 —from lowest 19 2 Voice Close—all parts on retrigger 20 2 Voice Close—all parts on 21 2 Voice Incremental 1 —from highest retrigger 22 2 Voice Incremental 1 —from highest 23 2 Voice Incremental 2 —from lowest retrigger 24 2 Voice Incremental 2 —from lowest Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 1 Part 1 Part 2 Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Yes No Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 The more keys played, the greater the number of parts that produce a sound, with priority given to lower parts. For example, Part 4 is played for one key, Part 4 and Part 3 are played for two keys, and so on. Part 3 Part 4 No Part 1 Part 3 Part 2 Part 4 The more keys played, the greater the number of parts that produce a sound, with priority given to higher parts. For example, Part 1 is played for one key, Part 1 and Part 2 are played for two keys, and so on. Part 4 11 Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Yes Yes No Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 This setting produces a three-note ensemble for closed chords. (*1) Yes No This setting produces a three-note ensemble for open chords. (*1) Yes No Three-note version of an ensemble with priority given to higher parts. For example, Parts 1 & 4 are played for one key, Parts 1 & 4 and Part 2 are played for two keys, and so on. (*1) Yes Three-note version of an ensemble with priority given to lower parts. For example, Part 3 is played for one key, Part 3 and Part 2 are played for two keys, and so on. (*1) Yes This setting produces a two-note ensemble for closed chords. (*2) Yes No No No Two-note version of an ensemble with priority given to higher parts. For example, Parts 1 & 3 are played for one key, and Parts 1 & 3 and Parts 2 & 4 are played for two keys. (*2) Yes Two-note version of an ensemble with priority given to lower parts. For example, Parts 2 & 4 are played for one key, and Parts 1 & 3 and Parts 2 & 4 are played for two keys. (*2) Yes No No *1: In three-voice ensembles, Part 4 moves in the same way as Part 1. *2: In two-voice ensembles, Part 3 moves in the same way as Part 1; Part 4 moves in the same way as Part 2. *3: With ensemble types that support key off retriggering, whenever a part stops playing because the corresponding key is released, it will be reassigned based on the keys still held down and will play the appropriate note. NEXT PAGE 22 Tyros5 Reference Manual  VOLUME / PAN 1 VOICE Voices – Playing the Keyboard – [A] Allows you to re-select the Voices for each part. You can also select this by using the PART SELECT buttons. The PART 1–4 settings correspond to the PART SELECT [LEFT], [PART 1-3] buttons. NOTE Only the recommended Voices that are suitable for Ensemble Voices can be selected. [C] PART ON/OFF Turns each part on or off. The PART 1–4 settings correspond to the PART ON/OFF [LEFT], [PART 1-3] buttons. [D] PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected part. [E] VOLUME Determines the volume of each part or channel, giving you fine control over the balance of all the parts. These parameters correspond to the LEFT and RIGHT 1–3 parameters of the VOL/VOICE tab in the MIXING CONSOLE display. [3 ]– [6 ] Selects the part to which the editing is applied, then set the value for each part.  TUNE / EFFECT [B] OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down for each keyboard part. The value set here is added to the setting made via the OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons. [C] TUNING Determines the pitch of each keyboard part in cents. NOTE In musical terms, a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone. (100 cents equal one semitone.) [D] REVERB DEPTH Adjusts the reverb depth. NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 23 [E] VIBRATO SENSITIVITY [3 ]– [6 ] Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato. Selects the part to which the editing is applied, then set the value for each part.  HUMANIZE [B] TIMING Determines the delay time between the moment the actual sound for each Part is produced and the moment a few notes are pressed. [C] PITCH RANGE Determines the pitch vibration (pitch range) when the sound is being produced. The higher the value, the greater the pitch range. [D] ATTACK PITCH RANGE Determines the actual pitch envelope immediately after the sound is produced. The higher the value, the greater the pitch range. [E] ATTACK PITCH ADJUST TIME Determines the time between the moment the sound is produced and the moment the pitch envelope reaches the correct value. Pitch Change Range [3 ]– [6 ] Selects the part to which the editing is applied, then set the value for each part. While a note is held Attack Pitch Range Time Attack Pitch Adjust Time 24 Tyros5 Reference Manual Pitch Range 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – Contents Selecting the Chord Fingering Type .............................................................. 26 Style Playback Related Settings ..................................................................... 28 Memorizing Original Settings to a One Touch Setting................................. 30 Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) ......................................................... 31 • Realtime Recording.................................................................................... 33 • Step Recording ........................................................................................... 37 • Style Assembly........................................................................................... 37 • Editing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE)...................................................... 39 • Editing Data for Each Channel (CHANNEL)............................................ 41 • Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER) ................................. 42 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – Style Types (Characteristics) The particular type of Style is indicated at the upper left of the Style name in the Style Selection display. The defining characteristics of these Styles and their performance advantages are described below. • Pro: These Styles provide professional and exciting arrangements combined with perfect playability. The resulting accompaniment exactly follows the chords of the player. As a result, your chord changes and colorful harmonies are instantly transformed into lifelike musical accompaniment. • Session: These Styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of certain songs and in certain genres. Keep in mind, however, that the Styles may not necessarily be appropriate—or even harmonically correct—for all songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad for a country song may result in a “jazzy” seventh chord, or playing an on-bass chord may result in inappropriate or unexpected accompaniment. • Free Play: These Styles are characterized by rubato performance. You can perform freely with remarkably expressive accompaniment, without being constrained by a strict tempo. • +Audio: Indicates the Audio Style. For more information on Audio Styles, refer to the Owner’s Manual. For the Preset Style List, refer to the Data List downloadable from Yamaha Manual Library. Tyros5 Reference Manual 25 Selecting the Chord Fingering Type The Chord Fingering type determines how chords are specified for Style playback. You can select desired one from the seven types. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [E][F] CHORD FINGERING 2 Press the [1 ]–[3 ] buttons to select a fingering. For information on each fingering type, see page 27. Chord Tutor Function With this function shown in the right half of this display, you can see which notes to press for specifying the chord. If you know a chord name but don’t know how to play it, use this function. Although this function shows how to play a chord only in case of “Fingered,” the indication is useful also when a type other than “Single Finger” is selected. Use the [6 ] buttons to select the chord root then use the [7 ]–[8 ] buttons to select the chord type. The notes you need to play are shown in the display. NOTE Depending on the chord, some notes may be omitted. 26 Tyros5 Reference Manual Chord Fingering Types SINGLE FINGER Makes it simple to produce orchestrated accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing only one, two or three keys on the Chord section of the keyboard. C Cm For a major chord, press the root key only. For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left. C7 Cm 7 For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left. For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left. Automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings, so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering types. FINGERED Lets you specify the chord by pressing the notes making up a chord in the left hand section of the keyboard when ACMP is turned on or the Left part is turned on. For information on which notes to press for each chord, refer to the Data List (Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode) downloadable from Yamaha Manual Library, or use the Chord Tutor function on the right-half of this display. FINGERED ON BASS Accepts the same fingerings as Fingered; however, the lowest note played in the Chord section of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing you to play “on bass” chords. (In the Fingered type, the root of the chord is always used as the bass note.) FULL KEYBOARD Detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands—for example, playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord with your left hand and a melody note with your right. AI FINGERED Basically the same as Fingered, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). AI FULL KEYBOARD This type is similar to Full Keyboard, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th, 11th and 13th chords cannot be played. FINGERED* This type is called up automatically when the CHORD DETECTION AREA is set to “UPPER.” In this status, the whole right-hand (UPPER) section works as the Chord section as well as melody performance. As to which key should be pressed, this is basically same as “FINGERED,” except that “1+5,” “1+8” and Chord Cancel are not available. For more information, refer to “Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass with Your Left Hand” in the Owner’s Manual. 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – MULTI FINGER NOTE “AI” stands for “Artificial Intelligence.” Tyros5 Reference Manual 27 Style Playback Related Settings The instrument has a variety of settings for Style playback which can be accessed in the display below. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [C] STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING  TAB [E][F] STYLE SETTING 2 Use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons for each setting. [1 ] STOP ACMP When [ACMP] is turned on and [SYNC START] is off, you can play chords in the chord section of the keyboard with the Style stopped, and still hear the accompaniment chord. In this condition—called “Stop Accompaniment”—any valid chord fingerings are recognized and the chord root/type are shown in the display. Here, you can determine whether the chord played in the chord section will sound or not in the Stop Accompaniment status. OFF: The chord played in the chord section will not sound. STYLE: The chord played in the chord section will sound via the Voices for the Pad part and the Bass channel of the selected Style. FIXED: The chord played in the chord section will sound via the specified Voice, regardless of the selected Style. NOTE When the selected Style contains MegaVoices, unexpected sounds may result when this is set to “STYLE.” NOTE When you record a Song, the chord detected by playing the Stop Accompaniment can be recorded regardless of the setting here. Please note that both the sounding Voice and chord data is recorded when set to “STYLE,” and only the chord data is recorded when set to “OFF” or “FIXED.” [2 ] OTS LINK TIMING This applies to the OTS Link function. This parameter determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] change. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.) REAL TIME: One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a MAIN VARIATION button. NEXT BAR: One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a MAIN VARIATION button. [3 ] SYNCHRO STOP WINDOW NEXT PAGE 28 Tyros5 Reference Manual This determines how long you can hold a chord before the Synchro Stop function is automatically cancelled. When the [SYNC STOP] button is turned on and this is set to a value other than “OFF,” this automatically cancels the Synchro Stop function if you hold a chord for longer than the time set here. This conveniently resets Style playback control to normal, letting you release the keys and still have the Style play. In other words, if you release the keys sooner than the time set here, the Synchro Stop function works. [4 ] STYLE TOUCH Turns touch response for the Style playback on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the Style volume changes in response to your playing strength in the chord section of the keyboard. [5 ]/ [6 ] SECTION SET Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting different Styles (when Style playback is stopped). When set to “OFF” and Style playback is stopped, the active section is maintained even if the different Style is selected. When any of the MAIN A–D sections is not included in the Style data, the nearest section is automatically selected. For example, when MAIN D is not contained in the selected Style, MAIN C will be called up. [7 ] TEMPO This determines whether the tempo setting of the Style changes or not when you change Styles. LOCK: The previous tempo setting is always maintained. HOLD: During Style playback, the previous tempo setting is maintained. When Style playback is stopped, the tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo for the selected Style. 2 [8 ] PART ON/OFF Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – RESET: The tempo always changes to that of the initial default tempo for the selected Style. This determines whether the Style Channel On/Off status changes or not when you change Styles. LOCK: The Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is always maintained. HOLD: During Style playback, the Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is maintained. When Style playback is stopped, all Style Channels are set to On. RESET: All Style Channels are set to On. Tyros5 Reference Manual 29 Memorizing Original Settings to a One Touch Setting You can memorize your original panel settings to a One Touch Setting (OTS). The newly created One Touch Setting will be saved in the User drive as a Style, and you can call up the One Touch Setting as a part of the Style. 1 Select the desired Style to memorize your One Touch Setting. 2 Make the desired panel settings, such as those for Voices and effects. 3 Press the [MEMORY] button in the REGISTRATION MEMORY section. The REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS display appears. However, you do not need to set these items, since the On/Off settings in this display do not affect the One Touch Settings. 4 Press the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] button to which you wish to memorize your panel settings. Follow the onscreen message. To memorize various panel settings to other buttons, press the [G] (NO) button, then repeat steps 2–4. 5 Press the [F] (YES) button to call up the Style Selection display and save the One Touch Setting as a Style. For instructions on saving, refer to the Owner’s Manual, Basic Operations. 30 Tyros5 Reference Manual NOTE For OTS buttons to which your original panel settings have not been memorized, the OTS settings of the original Style will be maintained. NOTICE The memorized One Touch Settings will be lost if you change the Style or turn the power off without executing the Save operation. Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) The Style Creator function lets you create your original Style by recording the rhythm pattern via the keyboard and using already-recorded Style data. Basically, select a preset Style that is closest to the type you want to create, then record the rhythm pattern, bass line, chord backing, or phrase (referred to as “Source Pattern” in the Style Creator) for each channel of each Section.  Style Data Structure—Consisting of Source Patterns A Style is made up of the different Sections (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) and each Section has eight separate channels, each of which is referred to as “Source Pattern.” With the Style Creator feature, you can create a Style by separately recording the Source Pattern for each channel, or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles. 2 Ending 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – Ending 2 Intro Fill In Main B Main A Used as is when selecting an Audio Style as starting data. This cannot be edited or deleted. Audio Part Rhythm 1 Recorded or copied from another Style Rhythm 2 Recorded or copied from another Style Bass Recorded or copied from another Style Chord 1 Recorded or copied from another Style Chord 2 Recorded or copied from another Style Pad Recorded or copied from another Style Phrase 1 Recorded or copied from another Style Phrase 2 Recorded or copied from another Style Create a Source Pattern for each channel separately Limitations on the Audio part: • If you select a preset Audio Style as starting data, the Audio part will be used as is. The Audio part cannot be deleted, edited or created from scratch. • The created Style containing the Audio part can be used only via an instrument that supports Audio Styles as well as the SFF GE format. • The Audio part cannot be copied from another Style or Section in the ASSEMBLE page. If you want to use a specific Audio part, make sure to select the corresponding Audio Style before calling up the Style Creator display. Tyros5 Reference Manual 31  Basic Procedure for creating a Style 1 Select the desired Style for the starting data. 2 Press the [CREATOR] button, then the [B] (STYLE CREATOR) button to call up the Style Creator display. 3 From the BASIC page, select a Section, then make other settings as necessary. • Select a Section to be edited or recorded. If the REC CHANNEL indication is shown in the lower half section of the display, press the [EXIT] button, press the [A] to select “1 SECTION,” then use the [3 ]–[4 ] buttons to select a Section. • If you want to create a Style entirely from scratch, press the [C] (NEW STYLE) button to call up an empty new Style. • For the current Section, select the pattern length via the [5 ]–[6 ] buttons. After selecting, press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the specified length. Note that if an Audio Style is selected as starting data, changing the pattern length deletes the corresponding Audio part. • For the entire current Style, set the Tempo and Time Signature in the display called up via the [B] button. 4 Create the Source Pattern for each channel. • Realtime Recording on the BASIC page (page 33) Lets you record the Style by simply playing the keyboard. • Step Recording on the EDIT page (page 37) Lets you enter each note individually. • Style Assembly on the ASSEMBLY page (page 37) Lets you copy various patterns from other preset Styles or Styles you have already created. 5 Edit the already recorded channel data. • Editing the channel data on the GROOVE (page 39), CHANNEL (page 41), and EDIT (page 37) pages Lets you change the rhythmic feel, quantizing and velocity, etc. • Editing the SFF parameters on the PARAMETER page (page 42) Lets you copy various patterns from another preset Styles or Styles you have already created. 6 Repeat steps 3–5 as desired. 7 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the created Style. For details, refer to “Basic Operations” in the Owner’s Manual. 32 Tyros5 Reference Manual Realtime Recording In the BASIC page, you can record your original rhythm pattern from the keyboard. Realtime Recording Characteristics in the Style Creator • Loop Recording Style playback repeats the rhythm patterns of several measures in a “loop,” and Style recording is also done using loops. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section, the two measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop), letting you record while hearing previously recorded material. • Overdub Recording This lets you record new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the original data. In Style recording, the recorded data is not deleted, except when using functions such as Rhythm Clear (page 34) and Delete (page 35). For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section, the two measures are repeated many times. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition, letting you overdub new material to the loop while hearing previously recorded material. When creating a Style based on an existing internal Style, overdub recording is applied only to the rhythm channels. For all other channels (except rhythm), you need to delete the original data before recording. 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –  Recording Rhythm Channels 1–2 The procedure below applies to Step 4 in the Basic Procedure on page 32. • If you select an Audio Style as starting data: Playback of the Audio part can be turned on or off via the [H] button, but it cannot be edited or deleted. Note that the rhythm pattern of this part will be used in the new Style you intend to create. If you want to create a rhythm phrase in addition to the Audio part, follow the steps below. 1 From the BASIC page, while holding down the [F] (REC CH) button, press the [1 ] or [2 ] button to select the desired channel as Record target. A Rhythm channel can be selected as Record target no matter whether already recorded data is included or not. If already recorded data is included in the selected channel, you can record notes additionally to the existing data. NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 33 2 If necessary, select a Voice then practice the rhythm pattern to be recorded. Press the [1 ] or [2 ] button (selected channel) to call up the Voice Selection display then select the desired Voice such as Drum Kit. After selecting, press the [EXIT] button to return to the original display. With the selected Voice, practice the rhythm pattern to be recorded. • Available Voices for recording For the RHY1 channel, any except the Organ World Voices can be used for recording. For the RHY2 channel, only drum/SFX kits can be used for recording. 3 Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to start recording. As the already recorded data plays back, use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to turn each channel on or off as desired. If you selected an Audio Style as starting data, turn the Audio part on or off via the [H] button. 4 As soon as loop playback returns to the first beat in the first measure, start playing the rhythm pattern to be recorded. If the rhythm is difficult to play in real time, break it up into individual parts and play each separately as the playback loops, as shown in the example below. Loop 1st round Bass Drum Loop 2nd round Snare Drum Bass Drum Loop 3rd round Hi-Hat Snare Drum Bass Drum If you make a mistake or play any wrong notes: You can delete notes of a specific drum instrument. While holding down the [E] (RHY CLEAR) button, press the corresponding key on the keyboard. 5 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. If you want to add more notes, press the [START/STOP] button again to continue recording. 6 34 Press the [1 ] or [2 ] button to disengage Record. Tyros5 Reference Manual  Recording Bass, Chord 1–2, Pad and Phrase 1–2 The procedure below applies to Step 4 in the Basic Procedure on page 32. 1 From the BASIC page, while holding down the [F] (REC CH) button, press one of the [3 ]–[8 ] buttons to select the desired channel as Record target. A confirmation message appears, prompting you whether or not to delete the already recorded data of the selected channel. Press the [G] (YES) button to delete data and the selected channel is specified as the Record target. Note that channel data of the preset Style cannot be overdubbed. 2 If necessary, select a Voice then practice the bass line, chord backing, or phrase to be recorded. Press one of the [3 ]–[8 ] buttons (selected channel) to call up the Voice Selection display then select the desired Voice. After selecting, press the [EXIT] button to return to the original display. With the selected Voice, practice the phrase or chord backing to be recorded. • Available Voices for recording Any except for the Organ World Voices/Drum Kit/SFX kit Voices can be used for recording. • Record a phrase in C Maj7 (for playing appropriate notes while chords change during performance) Rules when recording a Main or Fill With the default initial settings, the Source Root/Chord is set to CMaj7. This means that you should record a Source Pattern using a CMaj7 scale, which will change according to the chords you specify during normal performance. Record a bass line, phrase or chord backing which you want to hear when CMaj7 is specified. See below for details. • Use only the CMaj7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE channels (i.e., C, D, E, G, A, and B). • Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD channels (i.e., C, E, G, and B). C R C C R C C = Chord note C, R = Recommended note If you observe this rule, Style playback notes are appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you make during your performance. Rules when recording an Intro or Ending These Sections are designed assuming that the chord is not changed during playback. This is why you need not observe the rule for Main and Fill-In Sections described above, and you can create special chord progressions when recording. However, follow the rules below since the Source Root/Chord is set to CMaj7. • When recording the Intro, make sure that the recorded phrase leads properly into the CMaj7 scale. • When recording the Ending, make sure that the recorded phrase begins with or properly follows a CMaj7 scale. NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 35 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 2 • Setting the Source Root/Chord if necessary Although the Source Root/Chord is set to CMaj7 as described above, you can change this to any desired key or chord. Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the PARAMETER page, and set the SOURCE ROOT and CHORD to the desired Root and Chord type. Keep in mind that when you change the Source Chord from the default CMaj7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change. For details, refer to page 43. 3 Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to start recording. Since already recorded data plays back, use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to turn on or off each channel as desired. If you selected an Audio Style as starting data, turn the Audio part on or off via the [H] button. 4 As soon as loop playback returns to the first beat in the first measure, start playing the bass line, chord backing or phrase to be recorded. 5 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. If you want to add more notes, press the [START/STOP] button again to continue recording. • To hear the playback sound of the already recorded channels with another Source Chord/Root: 1) Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the PARAMETER page. 2) While holding down the [F] (REC CH) button, press the [1 ] or [2 ] button to set a Rhythm channel to REC. 3) Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to start playback. 4) On the PARAMETER page, set the PLAY ROOT and CHORD to the desired Chord root and Chord type. The above operation lets you hear how the Source Pattern is played back via chord changes during normal performance. 6 36 Press the [1 ] or [2 ] button to disengage Record. Tyros5 Reference Manual Step Recording This section applies to Step 4 of the Basic Procedure on page 32. After selecting a Section and making other settings on the BASIC page, call up the STEP RECORD display via the instructions below, then execute Step Recording. 1) From the BASIC page, while holding down the [F] (REC CH) button, press one of the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to select the desired channel as Record target. 2) Use the TAB [F] button to call up the EDIT page. 3) If “SYS/EX.” is shown at the position corresponding to the [F] button, press the [F] button to call up the Channel Edit display. 4) Press the [G] (STEP REC) button to call up the STEP RECORD display. The Step Recording procedure in the Style Creator is essentially same as that in Song Creator (page 59), with the exception of the following points: • Unlike in Song Creator, the End Mark position cannot be changed in the Style Creator. This is because setting the Pattern Length on the BASIC page determines the End Mark position. For example, if you select a Section of four measures or you set the Pattern Length to “4” on the BASIC page, the End Mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed. • Unlike in Song Creator, a Recording channel can be set on the BASIC page. It cannot be set on the EDIT page. • Unlike in Song Creator, Chord and Lyrics data cannot be entered. This is because such data is not necessary for Style playback. 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – For instructions on Step Recording, refer to pages 60–63. For information on the EDIT page (Event List display in Song Creator), refer to page 72. Style Assembly This allows you to copy channel data as a Source Pattern from another preset Style to the currently created Style. Use this function if you find a favorite rhythm pattern, bass line, chord backing or phrase from another Style. The instructions below apply to Step 4 of the Basic Procedure on page 32. After selecting a Section and making other settings on the BASIC page, execute the instructions below. 1 NOTE An Audio part cannot be copied from another Style. NOTE If you select an Audio Style as starting data, the Audio part cannot be replaced with different data. Call up the operation display. [CREATOR]  [B] STYLE CREATOR  TAB [E][F] ASSEMBLY 2 If necessary, select the Section to be edited. Even if the Section to be edited has already been selected on the BASIC page, you can change the Section also on this page. Press the desired Section button on the panel to call up the SECTION window, use the [6 ]–[7 ] buttons if you want to select a Fill in, then press the [8 ] (OK) button to actually enter the selection. NOTE Intro 4 and Ending 4 can be selected on the display then created as part of your original Style although they are not available on the panel. NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 37 3 Replace the Source Pattern of the specific channel with that of another Style. 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 Select the desired channel to be replaced via the [A]–[D] and [F]–[I] buttons. Press the same button of the selected channel to call up the Style Selection display. Select the desired Style, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the original display. Select the Section and Channel of the selected Style via the [2 ]–[5 ] buttons. Confirm the sound with the newly assigned Source Pattern via the [6 ]–[7 ] buttons. For details, see “Playing the Style During Style Assembly” below. 3-1, 3-2 [A]–[D], [F]–[I] buttons 3-3 3-4 4 3-5 As desired, execute the same operations for another channel. Playing the Style During Style Assembly While you are assembling a Style, you can play back the Style and select the method of playback. Use the [6 ]/[7 ] (PLAY TYPE) buttons in the Style Assembly display to select the playback method. • SOLO: Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. Any channels set to REC in the REC CHANNEL display on the BASIC Page are played back simultaneously. • ON: Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. Any channels set to other than OFF in the REC CHANNEL display on the BASIC Page are played back simultaneously. • OFF: Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. 38 Tyros5 Reference Manual Editing the Rhythmic Feel (GROOVE) By changing the timing of all the notes and velocities, you can edit the rhythmic feel for each channel of the current Section selected on the BASIC page or the panel button. The instructions below apply to Step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 32. 1 3 2 2 1 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 1 In the GROOVE Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu, then edit the data by using the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons. 1 GROOVE This lets you add swing to the music or change the “feel” of the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing (clock) of the Style. The Groove settings are applied to all channels of the Section selected on the BASIC page. [1 ]/ [2 ] ORIGINAL BEAT Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets. [3 ]/ [4 ] BEAT CONVERTER Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting. [5 ]/ [6 ] SWING Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat,” the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced. [7 ]/ [8 ] FINE Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat—but not including the first beat—will be played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect. NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 39 2 DYNAMICS This changes the velocity/volume (or accent) of certain notes in Style playback. The Dynamics settings are applied to each channel or all channels of the Section selected on the BASIC page. 2 [1 ]/ [2 ] CHANNEL Selects the desired channel (part) to which Dynamics is to be applied. The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display. [3 ]/ [4 ] ACCENT TYPE Determines the type of accent applied—in other words, which notes in the part(s) are emphasized with the Dynamics settings. [6 ] STRENGTH Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect. [7 ] EXPAND/COMP. Expands or compresses the range of velocity values. Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% compress it. [8 ] BOOST/CUT Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display. The values which are shown in the STRENGTH, EXPAND/COMP. and BOOST/CUT parameters are expressed as a percentage of the last set value. After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you are not satisfied with the Groove or Dynamics results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. 40 Tyros5 Reference Manual Editing Data for Each Channel (CHANNEL) You can edit recorded data for each channel of the current Section selected on the BASIC page or via the panel buttons. The instructions below apply to Step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 32. 1 5 4 2 1 3 In the CHANNEL Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the particular edit operation. 1 QUANTIZE Same as in the Song Creator (page 70), with the exception of the two additional available parameters below. Eighth notes with swing Sixteenth notes with swing 2 VELOCITY CHANGE Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel, according to the percentage specified here. 3 BAR COPY This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the specified channel. [4 ] TOP [5 ] LAST [6 ] DEST Specifies the first (TOP) and last (LAST) measures in the region to be copied. Specifies the first measure of the destination location, to which the data is to be copied. 4 BAR CLEAR This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel. 5 REMOVE EVENT This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel. 2 Use the [1 ]/[2 ] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited. The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display. 3 4 Use the [4 ]–[8 ] buttons to edit the data. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display. After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you are not satisfied with the results of the edit. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. 5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to execute the Save operation. NOTICE The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Tyros5 Reference Manual 41 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 2 Making Style File Format Settings (PARAMETER) The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment (Style playback) know-how into a single unified format. Setting the SFF related parameters determines how the original notes are converted to the actual sounded notes based on the chord you specify in the Chord area of the keyboard. The conversion flow is shown below. Source Pattern settings • Source Root • Source Chord Determines what key and what chord type are used for playing. Set these parameters before recording. Chord changes during normal performance Note Conversion from the Source Pattern • NTR (Conversion via the Chord Root change) …page 44 • NTT (Conversion via the Chord Type change) … page 44 Octave Setting of the Converted Notes Set these parameters after recording. • High Key (Upper octave limit of the Note Transposition) • Note Limit (Note range between the highest and lowest notes) Others • RTR (How the note pitch changes in response to chord changes) Actual Sounded Notes The instructions below apply to Step 5 of the Basic Procedure on page 32. 1 NOTE In the PARAMETER Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the particular edit operation. For details on the edit operations, see page 43. The parameters you can set here are compatible with the SFF GE format. This is why the Style files created on this instrument can be played back only on instruments which are compatible with SFF GE. 1 4 2 NEXT PAGE 42 Tyros5 Reference Manual 3 2 Use the [1 ]/[2 ] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited. The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display. 3 Use the [3 ]–[8 ] buttons to edit the data. For details on editable parameters, see the explanations following Step 4 below. 4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to execute the Save operation. NOTICE The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. IMPORTANT 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – The parameters here should be set before recording. If you change the settings after recording, the appropriate note conversion cannot be done even when you specify various chord types. 1 SOURCE (PLAY) ROOT/CHORD Before recording, you should set these parameters. They determine what key is used for playing when you record the Source Pattern to the Bass, Chord, Pad or Phrase channel. If you set this to “Fm7,” your recorded original phrase (Source Pattern) will be triggered by specifying Fm7 during normal performance. CMaj7 (Source Chord Root = C and Source Chord Type = Maj7) is set by default. Depending on the settings here, the playable notes (chord notes and recommended scale notes) will differ. For details, see below. When the Source Root is C: C6 CMaj CM 7 #11 CM 7 CM 7 (9) C add9 C 6 (9) C C R C C R C R C C C R Cm Caug R C R Cm 7 (11) C R C C C R C 7 b5 C C C C C C C R C C R C C C C R C C R C C R C C C C 1+5 C C C R C C 7 sus4 C C C 7 (b13) C C C C C C R C C C C R C R C C R C 7 (b9) C C C C R C C C Cm 7 (9) C7 C R C R C Cm add9 R C R C 7 (13) C R C C C C R Cdim 7 C C C R C C 1+8 C 7 aug R C C C C R C Cdim C 7 #11 C CM 7 aug C R C R C C 7 (9) C R C C C C C C Cm 7 b5 C R C C CmM 7 (9) R C C R C Cm 7 C C R C C C R C C R C CmM 7 C C R C Cm 6 C R C R C C R C C C C 7 (#9) R C C C C C C C R C C C R C C Csus 2 Csus 4 R C C C R C C C C C R C C C C R C R C = Chord notes C, R = Recommended notes NOTE When Rhy1 or Rhy2 is selected as Record target, the parameter name here is shown as “PLAY ROOT” instead of “CHORD ROOT.” In this situation, you can confirm the actual sound in response to each Chord type by changing the Chord Root and Type. NOTE The settings here are not applied when NTR is set to GUITAR. Tyros5 Reference Manual 43 2 NTR/NTT The settings here determine how the original notes of the Source Pattern are converted in response to the Chord change during normal performance. [3 ]/ [4 ] NTR (Note Transposition Rule) Determines the relative position of the root note in the chord, when converted from the Source Pattern in response to chord changes. Refer to the list below. [5 ]– [7 ] NTT (Note Transposition Table) Sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Refer to the list below. [8 ] NTT BASS ON/ OFF The channel for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass root note, when on-bass chords are recognized by the instrument. When NTR is set to GUITAR and this parameter is set to ON, only notes which are assigned to the bass will be played back by the bass root note. NTR (Note Transposition Rule) ROOT TRANS (Root Transpose) ROOT FIXED GUITAR When the root note is transposed, the interval between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain melody lines. The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts. When playing a C major chord. When playing an F major chord. When playing a C major chord. When playing an F major chord. This is exclusively for transposing guitar accompaniment. Notes are transposed to approximate the chords played with natural guitar fingering. NTT (Note Transposition Table) When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS or ROOT FIXED BYPASS When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED, the transposition table used does not do any note conversion. When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS, the table used only converts the notes by maintaining the pitch relationship between notes. MELODY Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. CHORD Suitable for chordal parts transposition. Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts. MELODIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for melody channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings. MELODIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source Pattern. HARMONIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings. HARMONIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. NATURAL MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third, sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third, flatted sixth and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords such as in Intros and Endings. NEXT PAGE 44 Tyros5 Reference Manual NATURAL MINOR 5th In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. DORIAN When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords such as in Intros and Endings. DORIAN 5th In addition to the Dorian transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. When NTR is set to GUITAR ALL-PURPOSE This table covers both strummed- and arpeggio-played sounds. STROKE Suitable for strumming sounds of the guitar. Some notes may sound as if they are muted—this is normal when chords are strummed on an actual guitar. ARPEGGIO Suitable for arpeggio-played sound of the guitar, resulting in beautiful four-note arpeggio sounds. 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 3 HIGH KEY / NOTE LIMIT The settings here adjust the octave of the notes converted from the original ones through NTT and NTR. [4 ]/ [5 ] HIGH KEY This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed down to the next lowest octave. This setting is available only when the NTR parameter (page 44) is set to “Root Trans.” Example—When the highest key is F. Root changes Notes played [6 ] NOTE LIMIT LOW [7 ] NOTE LIMIT HIGH CM C3-E3-G3 ♯ ♯ ♯ CM ♯ C 3-E 3-G 3 FM F3-A3-C4 ♯ ♯ ♯ FM ♯ F 2-A 2-C 3 These set the note range (highest and lowest notes) for Voices recorded to the Style channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that the Voices sound as realistic as possible—in other words, that no notes outside the natural range are sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds). Example—When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4. ♯ Root changes CM CM FM ♯ ♯ ♯ Notes played E3-G3-C4 E 3-G 3-C 4 F3-A3-C4 High Limit Low Limit 4 RTR (Retrigger Rule) These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord changes. STOP The notes stop sounding. PITCH SHIFT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord. PITCH SHIFT TO ROOT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord. RETRIGGER The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord. RETRIGGER TO ROOT The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same. Tyros5 Reference Manual 45 Multi Pads 3 – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance – Contents Multi Pad Creating (Multi Pad Creator)....................................................... 46 • Multi Pad—Realtime Recording via MIDI ................................................ 46 • Multi Pad—Step Recording via MIDI ....................................................... 48 Multi Pad Editing............................................................................................. 48 Multi Pad Creating (Multi Pad Creator) This feature lets you create your original Multi Pad phrases, and also allows you to edit existing Multi Pad phrases to create your own. As with Song Creator, Multi Pad Creator features Realtime Recording and Step Recording. However, with Song Creator, each Multi Pad consists of only one channel and convenient functions such as Punch In/Out are not available. Multi Pad—Realtime Recording via MIDI Before starting operation, note the following points: • Since only the Right 1 part performance will be recorded as a Multi Pad phrase, you should select the desired Voice for the Right 1 part beforehand. • The Super Articulation Voices and the Organ Flutes Voices cannot be used for Multi Pad Recording. If one of these Voices is set for the Right 1 part, it will be replaced with the Grand Piano Voice when recording. • Since recording can be done along with and synchronized to Style playback, you should select the desired Style beforehand. However, keep in mind that the Style is not recorded. 1 If you want to create a new Multi Pad in the existing Bank, select the desired Multi Pad Bank. If you want to create a new Multi Pad in an empty new Bank, this step is unnecessary. 2 Call up the operation display. [CREATOR]  [C] MULTI PAD CREATOR 5 4 12 6 14 10 NEXT PAGE 46 Tyros5 Reference Manual 11 3 If necessary, select the desired Voice with the VOICE category selection buttons. After selecting the Voice, press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. 4 If you want to create a new Multi Pad in an empty new Bank, press the [C] (NEW BANK) button. 5 Select a particular Multi Pad for recording by pressing any of the [A], [B], [F] and [G] buttons. 6 Press the [H] (REC) button to enter recording standby status for the Multi Pad selected in step 5. 7 Play the keyboard to start recording. If you want to insert silence before the actual phrase, press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] to start both the Recording and rhythm playback (of the current Style). Keep in mind that the rhythm part of the current Style plays back during recording although it is not recorded. 3 Recommended notes for the Chord Match phrase Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance – If you intend to create a Chord Match phrase, use the notes of C, D, E, G, A and B, or in other words, play the phrase in the key of C major. This ensures that the phrase will stay harmonically constant and match whichever chord you play in the left hand section of the keyboard. C = Chord note C R C 8 C R C C, R = Recommended note Stop recording. Press the [H] (STOP) button or the panel MULTI PAD CONTROL [STOP] button or the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button to stop recording when you’ve finished playing the phrase. 9 10 Listen back to your newly recorded phrase, by pressing the appropriate MULTI PAD button, [1]–[4]. To re-record the phrase, repeat steps 6–8. Turn the Repeat parameter of each pad On or Off by using the [1 ]–[4 ] buttons. If the Repeat parameter is on for the selected pad, playback of the corresponding pad will continue until the MULTI PAD [STOP] button is pressed. When you press a Multi Pad for which Repeat is turned on during Song or Style playback, playback will start and repeat in sync with the beat. If the Repeat parameter is off for the selected pad, playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the phrase is reached. 11 Turn Chord Match of each pad On or Off by using the [5 ]–[8 ] buttons. If the Chord Match parameter is on for the selected pad, the corresponding pad is played back according to the chord specified in the chord section of the keyboard generated by turning [ACMP] on. 12 Press the [D] (NAME) button, then enter the desired name for each Multi Pad. 13 If you want to record other Multi Pads, repeat steps 5–12. 14 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the Multi Pad, then save the Multi Pad data as a Bank containing a set of four Pads. Tyros5 Reference Manual 47 Multi Pad—Step Recording via MIDI Step Recording can be executed in the EDIT page. After selecting a Multi Pad in step 5 on page 47, press the TAB [F] button to select the EDIT page. The EDIT page indicates the Event list, which lets you record notes with absolutely precise timing. This Step Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording (pages 60–63), with the exception of the points listed below: • There is no LCD button for switching channels, since Multi Pads contain data for only a single channel. • In the Multi Pad Creator, only channel events and System Exclusive messages can be entered. Chord and Lyrics events are not available. You can switch between the two types of Event Lists by pressing the [F] button. Multi Pad Editing You can manage (rename, copy, paste and delete) your created Multi Pad Bank and each of the Multi Pads belonging to the Bank. For instructions on managing the Multi Pad Bank, refer to the Basic Operations of the Owner’s Manual. This section covers how to manage each Multi Pad. 1 Select the Multi Pad Bank containing the Multi Pad to be edited. Press the MULTI PAD CONTROL [SELECT] button to call up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display, use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up “PRESET,” “USER” or “USB” (when USB flash memory is connected), then use the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Multi Pad Bank. 2 Press the [7 ] (EDIT) button of Menu 1 to call up the MULTI PAD EDIT display. 3 Select a particular Multi Pad to be edited by pressing any of the [A], [B], [F] and [G] buttons. 4 Edit the selected Pad. [1 ] NAME Changes the name of each Multi Pad. [3 ] COPY Copies the Multi Pad(s). See below. [4 ] PASTE Pastes the Multi Pad(s) copied by the [3 ] button. [5 ] DELETE Deletes the selected Multi Pads. NEXT PAGE 48 NOTE If you select a Preset Multi Pad Bank then edit the Multi Pads, save your edits to “USER” or “USB” (when USB flash memory is connected) as a User Bank. Tyros5 Reference Manual Copying the Multi Pad 1 Press the [3 ] button of Menu 2 in step 4 above. 2 Select the Multi Pad to be copied by using the [A], [B], [F] and [G] buttons, then press the [7 ] (OK) button. The selected Multi Pad is copied to the clipboard. 3 Select the destination location by using the [A], [B], [F] and [G] buttons. If you want to copy the selected Pad to another bank, press the [8 ] (UP) button to call up the Multi Pad Bank Selection display, select the desired bank, press the [7 ] (EDIT) button of Menu 1, then select the destination. 4 Press the [4 ] (PASTE) button of Menu2 button to execute the Copy operation. 5 Save the current Bank containing the edited Multi Pads. Press the [8 ] button to call up the confirmation window, press the [G] (YES) button to call up the USER page, then press the [6 ] (SAVE) button of Menu2 to execute the Save operation. For details, refer to the Basic Operations of the Owner’s Manual. 3 Multi Pads – Adding Musical Phrases to Your Performance – Tyros5 Reference Manual 49 4 Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – Contents Editing Music Notation Settings..................................................................... 51 Editing Lyrics/Text Display Settings .............................................................. 53 Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback................... 54 Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat Settings, Channel Settings, Guide Function) ............................................................................................... 55 • Keyboard and Vocal Practice Using the Guide Function ........................... 56 • Playing Backing Parts with the Performance Assistant Technology ......... 58 Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) ......................................................... 59 • Recording Melodies (Step Recording) ....................................................... 60 • Recording Chords (Step Recording) .......................................................... 64 • Re-Recording a Specific Section—Punch In/Out (Realtime Recording) .. 67 • Editing Channel Events of Existing Song Data.......................................... 69 • Editing Chord Events, Notes, System Exclusive Events and Lyrics .......... 72 • Editing Song Position Markers................................................................... 75 Restrictions for protected Songs To prevent illegal copy or accidental erasure, protection is applied depending on the Song. The protection indication is marked at the upper left of the protected Song name on the display. • Prot.1: Indicates that the Preset Song is saved to the User drive. This type of Song cannot be copied, moved and transferred to external devices such as a USB flash memory and a computer. • Prot.2 Orig: Indicates Yamaha-protection-formatted Songs (commercially available Songs). This type of Song (which cannot be copied) can be only moved and saved to the User drive or USB storage device with ID. • Prot.2 Edit: Indicates the edited “Prot.2” Song. This type of Song (which cannot be copied) can be only moved and saved to the User drive or USB storage device with ID. IMPORTANT Make sure that the “Prot.2 Orig” Song and the corresponding “Prot.2 Edit” Song reside in the same folder. Otherwise, the “Prot.2 Edit” Song cannot be played back. If you move this type of Song, make sure to move both the “Prot.2 Orig” and “Prot.2 Edit” Songs to the same folder. IMPORTANT Never change the “Prot2.Orig” Song name and icon on the display. Otherwise, the corresponding “Prot.2 Edit” Song cannot be played back. 50 Tyros5 Reference Manual Editing Music Notation Settings To view the music notation of the selected Song, press the [SCORE] button. You can change the Score display as desired to suit your personal preferences. The settings here are maintained even when the power is turned off. NOTE You can save the setting here as a part of a Song by accessing [CREATOR]  [A] SONG CREATOR  TAB [E][F] CHANNEL  [A]/[B] SETUP. See page 71. NOTE Depending on the particular commercially available Song, Score display may not be possible. NOTE The score of an Audio Song cannot be shown because the score is created based only on MIDI events. 4 LEFT ON/OFF Enables/disables display of the left-hand notation. Depending on other settings, this parameter may be unavailable and may appear grayed out. If this is the case, go to the detailed setting display (on page 52) and set the LEFT CH parameter to any channel except “AUTO.” Or, go to the display [FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING and set the TRACK 2 parameter to any channel except “OFF” (page 55). RIGHT (next parameter) and LEFT cannot be turned off at the same time. [2 ] RIGHT ON/ OFF Enables/disables display of the right-hand notation. RIGHT and LEFT (above) cannot be turned off at the same time. [3 ] CHORD ON/ OFF Enables/disables display of the chords. If the selected Song does not contain chord data, chords are not displayed. [4 ] LYRICS ON/ OFF Enables/disables display of the lyrics. If the selected Song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. When the Song contains Pedal events, pressing these buttons can display the Pedal events, instead of displaying Lyrics. [5 ] NOTE ON/OFF Enables/disables display of the note name (pitch). The note name is indicated at the left of the note. When the space between the notes is too small, the indication may be moved to the top left of the note. When the Song contains Fingering events, pressing these buttons can display the fingering, instead of displaying note names. [6 ] COLOR ON/ OFF When this is set to ON, the notes in the display appear in color (C: red, D: yellow, E: green, F: orange, G: blue, A: purple, and B: gray). [7 ] SIZE Determines the display zoom level of the notation. [8 ] SET UP Calls up the detailed setting display. See page 52. Tyros5 Reference Manual Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – [1 ] 51 1 Pressing the [8 ] (SET UP) button calls up the detailed setting display. You can set the view type by using the [1 ]–[6 ] buttons, then press the [8 ] (OK) button. [1 ] LEFT CH [2 ] RIGHT CH Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left-hand/right-hand part. This setting returns to AUTO when a different Song is selected. AUTO: The MIDI channels in the Song data for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically—setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is specified in [FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING (page 55). 1–16: Assigns the specified MIDI channel (1–16) to each of the left- and right-hand parts. OFF (Available setting only for LEFT CH): Assigns no channel to the left-hand part. This disables display of the left-hand key range. [3 ]/ [4 ] KEY SIGNATURE This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a Song, at the stopped position. This menu is useful when the selected Song contains no key signature settings for displaying notation. [5 ] QUANTIZE This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure to select the smallest note value used in the Song. [6 ] NOTE NAME Selects the type of the note name indicated at the left of the note in the notation from among the following three types. The settings here are available when the NOTE ON/OFF parameter above is set to ON. A, B, C: Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B). Fixed DO: Note names are indicated in solfeggio, with the note of C fixed to DO. The notes “C, D, E, F, G, A, B” are always indicated as “Do, Re, Mi, Fa, So, La, Ti” when the language is set to English. Note that the note name indication differs depending on the current language (page 56). Movable DO: Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the key of the current Song. When the Song with the D Major key is selected, for example, the notes “D, E, F#, G, A, B, C#” are indicated as “Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Ti” when the language is set to English. Note that the note name indication differs depending on the current language (page 56). 52 Tyros5 Reference Manual Editing Lyrics/Text Display Settings To view the lyrics of the selected Song, press the [LYRICS/TEXT] button. If the selected Song contains lyric data, you can have the lyrics shown in the display. Even if the Song does not contain lyrics data, you can show the lyrics and other text by using a text file (.txt file less than 60KB) created on a computer. NOTE When the lyrics are garbled or unreadable, you may need to change the Lyrics Language setting from the [FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING. NOTE When you create a text file on a computer, make sure to enter line breaks manually. This is necessary because auto line breaks cannot be executed on this instrument. When you find that the text extends beyond the display and cannot be shown properly, revise the text data by manually entering appropriate line breaks. Lyrics display Text display The lyrics in the Song data are shown. The text created on a computer is shown. Press the [1 ] buttons 4 Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – Press the [5 ]/[6 ] button to actually call up the desired text file. [1 ] TEXT/LYRICS Switches the screen between the Lyrics display (lyrics data in the Song is shown) and the Text display (a text file selected via the [5 ]/[6 ] buttons). [5 ]/ [6 ] TEXT FILE Calls up the text File Selection display. After selecting, press the [EXIT] button to return back to the Lyrics/Text display. [7 ]/ [8 ] BACK GROUND Allows changing of the background picture of the Lyrics/Text display. After making the setting, press the [EXIT] button to return back to the Lyrics/Text display. NOTE When the background picture is specified in the Song data, the BACKGROUND setting cannot be changed. NOTE For information on available image files, refer to the MAIN PICTURE parameter on page 130. Tyros5 Reference Manual 53 Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, channels 9-16 in the Song data are replaced with Style channels—allowing you to play the accompaniment parts of the Song yourself. Try playing chords along with the Song playback as shown in the instructions below. 1 Select a Song. 2 Select a Style. 3 While holding down the SONG [J] (STOP) button, press the [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to enable synchronized start of the Song. 4 Press the STYLE CONTROL [ACMP] button to turn on the auto accompaniment function, then press the [SYNC START] button to enable synchronized start of the accompaniment. 5 Press the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button or play chords in the chord section. The Song and Style starts playing. When you play chords, pressing the [SCORE] button and turning CHORD on (page 51) allows you to see the chord information. When the Song playback is stopped, Style playback is also stopped at the same time. 54 Tyros5 Reference Manual NOTE When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, the tempo value set in the Song is automatically used. Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat Settings, Channel Settings, Guide Function) The instrument has a variety of Song playback functions—repeat playback, various guide settings, etc.—which can be accessed in the display below. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING 4 GUIDE MODE [1 ] GUIDE ON/OFF [G] REPEAT MODE Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – [A]/[B] See page 56. Determines the method of repeat playback. OFF: Plays through the selected Song, then stops. SINGLE: Plays through the selected Song repeatedly. ALL: Continues playback through all the Songs in the specified folder repeatedly. RANDOM: Continues playback at random through all the Songs in the specified folder repeatedly. [H] REPEAT FOLDER Determines the directory in which the contained Songs are played in sequence when REPEAT MODE is set to “ALL” or “RANDOM.” Here, the directory refers to the path memorized to each of the SONG [I]–[IV] buttons. CURRENT: Sequentially plays all Songs in the directory containing the currently selected Song, starting with the currently selected Song. ALL: Sequentially plays all Songs in all directories (memorized to the SONG [I]– [IV] buttons). Playback starts with the currently selected Song, then the remainder of the Songs in the current directory, followed by the Songs in the other directories. [I] PHRASE MARK REPEAT This parameter is available only when the current Song contains Phrase Marks, which specify certain locations (of several measures each) in the Song. When this is set to ON, the section corresponding to the Phrase Mark (specified via the SONG [G] (REW) and [H] (FF) buttons) is played back repeatedly. Note that this parameter can be set only when Song playback is stopped. NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 55 [2 ] LEFT CH [3 ] RIGHT CH [4 ] AUTO CH SET When set to “ON,” this automatically sets the proper MIDI channels for the Rightand Left hand parts pre-programmed in the commercially available Song data. Normally, this should be set to “ON.” [5 ]/ [6 ] LYRICS LANGUAGE Determines the language displayed in the Lyrics display. These parameters determine which MIDI channel in the Song data is assigned to the Left- or Right-hand part of the Guide function and the Song Score function. AUTO: When the language is specified in the Song data, the lyrics are displayed accordingly. When the language is not specified in the Song data, the lyrics language is regarded as INTERNATIONAL below. INTERNATIONAL: Handles the displayed lyrics as a western language. JAPANESE: Handles the displayed lyrics as Japanese. [7 ] QUICK START On some commercially available Song data, certain settings related to the Song (such as Voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the first measure, before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the instrument reads all initial non-note data of the Song at the highest possible speed, then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the first note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible, with a minimum pause for reading of data. [8 ] P.A.T. (Performance Assistant Technology) See page 58. Keyboard and Vocal Practice Using the Guide Function With the Guide function, the instrument indicates the timing you need to play notes in the Score display for ease in learning. This instrument also features convenient vocal practice tools that automatically adjust the timing of Song playback to match your vocal performance. 1 Select the desired Song for practicing the keyboard or singing. 2 Call up the Song Setting display. [FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING 3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired Guide function type. 3 4 NEXT PAGE 56 Tyros5 Reference Manual Guide menu for keyboard practice • Follow Lights When this is selected, Song playback pauses, waiting for you to play the notes correctly. When you play the correct notes, Song playback continues. Follow Lights was developed for the Yamaha Clavinova series. This function is used for practicing purposes, with built-in lamps on the keyboard indicating the notes to be played. Even though the Tyros5 does not have these lamps, you can use the same function by following the indications in the displayed notation with the Song Score function. • Any Key With this function, you can play the melody of a Song just by pressing a single key (any key is OK) in time with the rhythm. Song playback pauses and waits for you to play any key. Simply play a key on the keyboard in time with the music and Song playback continues. • Your Tempo The same as Follow Lights, except that Song playback matches the speed at which you play. Guide menu for singing • Karao-Key This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one finger, while you sing along. This is useful for singing to your own performance. Song playback pauses, waiting for you to sing. Simply play any key on the keyboard (playing the keyboard produces no sound) and Song playback continues. 4 Use the [1 ] button to turn the Guide function ON. 4 “G” indication is shown in the Song name box on the Main display. Call up the Score display by pressing the [SCORE] button. 6 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – 5 Practice playing the keyboard or singing, along with the Guide type selected in step 3. 7 Press the [J] (STOP) button to stop playback. NOTE You can save the Guide settings as a part of the Song data (page 71). For Songs to which the Guide settings have been saved, the Guide function will be automatically turned on and the related settings will be recalled when the Song is selected. Tyros5 Reference Manual 57 Playing Backing Parts with the Performance Assistant Technology This feature lets you play your own backing parts on the keyboard along with Song playback, and have them sound perfectly appropriate (even though you might be playing wrong notes). 1 Select a Song containing chord data. The Performance Assistant Technology function can be applied only to Songs containing chord data. To confirm whether the selected Song contains chord data or not, return to the Main display then start playback. If the current Song contains chord data, the Main display shows the current chord type. After stopping playback, go to the next step. 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [B] SONG SETTING 3 Press the [8 ] button to turn P.A.T. (Performance Assistant Technology) on. 4 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start playback. 5 Play the keyboard. Along with Song playback, try playing the bass line with the left hand area while playing various phrases or chords with the right hand area. Even if you do not know what notes should be played, don’t worry and play any keys as desired! Only the harmonically “correct” notes matching the current chord are sounded, regardless of the notes you actually play. Current chord 6 Press the [J] (STOP) button to stop playback. 7 Press the [8 ] button to turn P.A.T. off. NOTE Selecting another Song may reset P.A.T. to OFF. 58 Tyros5 Reference Manual Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) The Owner’s Manual covers how to create an original Song by recording your keyboard performance (called “Realtime Recording”). This Reference Manual shows how to create an original Song by entering notes one by one (called “Step Recording”) and how to improve an already created Song by editing the detailed parameters.  Realtime Recording and Step Recording When creating a Song, these two Recording methods are available. With Realtime Recording, this instrument records the performance data as it is played. With Step Recording, you can compose your performance by “writing” it down one event at a time. This chapter primarily covers the instructions for Step Recording.  MIDI Song Data Structure A MIDI Song consists of 16 MIDI channels. You can create data of a MIDI Song by recording your performance to a specific channel or channels in realtime, or by executing the Step Recording. Song Recording Part (Default settings) Channel 1 Right 1 Channel 2 Left Channel 3 Right 2 Keyboard Performance  Realtime Recording: By default, your keyboard performance will be recorded to MIDI channels 1–4. If you use an Ensemble Voice when recording, the performances of Parts 1, 2, 3 and 4 will be recorded to Channels 2, 1, 3, and 4 respectively. 4  Step Recording: Channel 4 Right 3 Channel 5 Multi Pad 1 Channel 6 Multi Pad 2 Channel 7 Multi Pad 3 Multi Pad playback Channel 8 Multi Pad 4 By default, Multi Pad playback will be recorded to MIDI channels 5–8. Channel 9 Rhythm 1  Step Recording: Channel 10 Rhythm 2 Multi Pad playback events cannot be input via Step Recording. Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – Without specifying the keyboard part, you can input the melodies or notes on the music notation sheet one by one to the desired channel.  Realtime Recording: Channel 11 Bass Style playback Channel 12 Chord 1  Realtime Recording: Channel 13 Chord 2 Channel 14 Pad Channel 15 Phrase 1 Channel 16 Phrase 2 By default, Style playback will be recorded to MIDI channels 9–16.  Step Recording: After inputting the Chord change/Section change events, touch [Expand] to actually record the note data to MIDI channels 9–16. System Exclusive Lyrics  Song Creator Display Structure The Song Creator can be called up via [CREATOR]  [A] SONG CREATOR. There are six Pages (tabs) in the Song Creator display. • REC MODE ........... For re-recording a Song. See page 67. • CHANNEL ............. For editing Channel events. See page 69. • CHORD .................. For recording chords and Sections with precise timing (page 64) or edits them (page 72). • 1-16.......................... For recording melodies (Step Recording; see below) or edits the recorded melodies (page 72). • SYS/EX................... For editing System Exclusive events (tempo, time signature, etc.). See page 72. • LYRICS .................. For inputting/editing a Song name and lyrics. See page 72. Tyros5 Reference Manual 59 Recording Melodies (Step Recording) 1 From the Main display, press the SONG [REC] and SONG [J] (STOP) buttons simultaneously. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. 2 Call up the operation display. [CREATOR]  [A] SONG CREATOR  TAB [E][F] 1-16 3 4 3 Press the [F] button to select the channel for recording. 4 Press the [G] (STEP REC) button to call up the STEP RECORD display. 5 To execute Step Recording, use the [A]–[J] buttons and [1 ]–[8 ] buttons, as well as the keyboard. Refer to the example on page 62 for specific instructions. When a note is input, the location (bar: beat: clock), note name, velocity and length are listed in succession. NEXT PAGE 60 Tyros5 Reference Manual [A]/[B]/ [C] For moving the cursor through the event list. [G] Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to be entered. The velocity value can be specified within a range from 1 to 127. The higher the velocity value, the louder the sound becomes. KBD.VEL: Actual resulting velocity fff: 127 ff: 111 f: 95 mf: 79 mp: 63 p: 47 pp: 31 ppp: 15 [H] Determines the gate time (actual length) of the note to be entered. Normal: 80% Tenuto: 99% Staccato: 40% Staccatissimo: 20% Manual: The gate time can be set to any desired percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. [I] DELETE Deletes the data of the current line. [1 ] BAR [2 ] BEAT Sets the position of the note to be entered. Note that a quarter note has a resolution of 1,920 clocks. [3 ] CLOCK Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – [J] [4 ]– [8 ] 4 Determines the note type to be entered: normal, dotted or triplet. Determines the note length to be entered: whole-note, half-note, quarter-note, eighth-note or sixteenth-note. 6 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button (or press the [C] button) to return to the top of the Song, then play back the newly entered Song by pressing the [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button. 7 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Recording display. 8 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to execute the Save operation. NOTICE The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 61 Example of Step Recording—Melodies (detailed instructions of Step 5 on page 60) 1 2 3 4 * The numbers shown in the illustration correspond to the following operation step numbers. In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps (Step 4) involves holding down a key on the keyboard while executing the operation. Before executing the instructions below, select the desired Voice on the STEP RECORD display. Note that only the Voice selection and Note input are possible during Step Recording. 1 NOTE Since the actual note length (determined via the Gate Time) may differ from the note length on the notation, the Score of the Song recorded here may be different from the notation above. Enter the first and second notes with a slur. 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 Press the [G] button to select “f.” Press the [H] button to select “Tenuto.” Press the [I] button to select the “dotted” note type. Select the dotted quarter-note by using the [6 ] buttons. Play the C3 key. This enters the first note. 1-6 Press the [I] button to select the “normal” note type. 1-7 Press the [7 ] button to select the eight-note length. 1-8 Play the D3 key. This enters the second note. 2 Enter the next notes and apply staccato. 2-1 Press the [H] button to select “Staccato.” 2-2 Press the [6 ] button to select the quarter-note length. 2-3 Play the keys E3 and F3 in order. This completes the first measure. 3 To enter a quarter-note rest, press the [6 ] button again. To enter the rest, use the [4 ]–[8 ] buttons. (Press the button once to select the rest value, and once again to actually enter it.) The BAR:BEAT:CLOCK indication at the lower left lets you confirm that a rest having the specified note length has been entered. NEXT PAGE 62 Tyros5 Reference Manual 4 Enter the next notes and apply a tie. 4-1 Press the [G] button to select “mp.” 4-2 Press the [H] button to select “Normal.” 4-3 While holding G3 key on the keyboard, press the [6 ] button. This operation advances the input position from the current 2nd beat to the next 3rd beat. Do not release the G3 key yet. Keep holding it while executing the following steps. 4-4 While holding the G3 key, press the C4 key. Do not release the G3 and C4 keys yet. Keep holding the notes while executing the following step. 4-5 While holding the keys G3 and C4, press the [5 ] button. After pressing the button, release the keys. This enters the notes G3 and C4 notes have been entered as shown in the notation on the previous page. 5 4 Tyros5 Reference Manual Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – To play back your newly entered Song, press the SONG [J] (STOP) button (or press the [C] button) to return to the top of the Song, then press the [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button. 63 Recording Chords (Step Recording) In Step Recording, you can record the precise change timing of chords and Sections (such as Intro, Main and Ending) of the current Style on the single display. After the operations are finished, the recorded events or settings will be converted to `actual MIDI notes or Song data. 1 From the Main display, press the SONG [REC] and SONG [J] (STOP) buttons simultaneously. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. 2 Select the Style you want to use in the Song. 3 Call up the operation display. NOTE Selecting a blank Song initializes the panel settings. [CREATOR]  [A] SONG CREATOR  TAB [E][F] CHORD 4 Press the [G] (STEP REC) button to call up the STEP RECORD display. 5 Execute Step Recording by using the [A]–[J] buttons and [1 ]–[8 ] buttons. Refer to the example on page 65 for specific instructions. For details on these functions, refer to page 61. 6 Press the SONG [J] (STOP) button (or press the [C] button) to return to the top of the Song, then play back the newly entered Song by pressing the [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button. NEXT PAGE 64 Tyros5 Reference Manual 7 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Recording display. 8 Press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the recorded data to actual MIDI notes (Song data). 9 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to execute the Save operation. NOTICE The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Example of Step Recording—Chord (detailed instructions of Step 5 on page 64) 1 2 3 MAIN A BREAK MAIN B 4 C F G F G7 C Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – * The numbers shown in the illustration correspond to the following operation step numbers. Before executing the instructions below, make sure that the [AUTO FILL IN] button is turned off since no Fill in is included in the notation example above. 1 NOTE This example uses a Style in 4/4 time. Enter the chords for the Main A section. 1-1 Press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN A] button. 1-2 Press the [5 ] button to select the half-note length. 1-3 Play the chords C, F and G in the chord section of the keyboard. C 1-1 F G 1-2 1-3 NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 65 2 Enter the chords for the Break section. NOTE 2-1 Press the STYLE CONTROL [BREAK] button. 2-2 Press the [6 ] button to select the quarter-note length. 2-3 Play the chords F and G7 in the chord section of the keyboard. If you want to record a Fill In Section, turn on the [AUTO FILL IN] button, then press one of the MAIN VARIATION [A]– [D] buttons. 2-1 F G7 2-2 3 2-3 Enter the chords for the Main B section. 3-1 Press the STYLE CONTROL [MAIN B] button. 3-2 Press the [4 ] button to select the whole-note length. 3-3 Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard. 3-1 3-3 C 3-2 66 Tyros5 Reference Manual Re-Recording a Specific Section—Punch In/Out (Realtime Recording) When re-recording a specific section of an already-recorded Song, use the Punch IN/OUT function. In this method, only the data between the Punch In point and the Punch Out point is overwritten with the newly recorded data. Keep in mind that the notes before and after the Punch In/Out points are not recorded over, although you will hear them play back normally to guide you in the Punch In/Out timing. 1 Select the desired Song for re-recording. 2 Call up the operation display. [CREATOR]  [A] SONG CREATOR  TAB [E][F] REC MODE 3 Determine the settings for recording. 4 REC START (Punch In) Determines the Punch In timing. Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – [1 ]– [3 ] NORMAL: Overwrite recording starts when the Song playback is started via the SONG [F/ K]] (PLAY/PAUSE) button or when you play the keyboard in the Synchro Standby mode. FIRST KEY ON: The Song plays back normally, then starts overwrite recording as soon as you play the keyboard. PUNCH IN AT: The Song plays back normally up to the beginning of the indicated Punch In measure, then starts overwrite recording at that point. You can set the Punch In measure by pressing the [3 ] button. [4 ]– [6 ] REC END (Punch Out) Determines the Punch Out timing. REPLACE ALL: This deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped. PUNCH OUT: The Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as the Punch Out point. This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped. PUNCH OUT AT: Actual overwrite recording continues until the beginning of the specified Punch Out measure (set with the corresponding display button), at which point recording stops and normal playback continues. This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped. You can set the Punch Out measure by pressing the [6 ] buttons. [7 ]/ [8 ] PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT When this is set to ON, you can use Foot Pedal 2 to control the Punch In and Punch Out points. While a Song is playing back, pressing (and holding) Foot Pedal 2 instantly enables Punch In recording, while releasing the pedal stops recording (Punch Out). You can press and release Foot Pedal 2 as often as you want during playback to punch in/out of overwrite recording. Note that the current function assignment of the Foot Pedal 2 is cancelled when the Pedal Punch In/Out function is set to ON. NOTE Pedal Punch In/Out operation may be reversed depending on the particular pedal you’ve connected to the instrument. If necessary, change the pedal polarity to reverse the control (page 134). NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 67 4 While holding the SONG [REC] button, select the desired channel from 1–16 on the display via the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons. 5 Press the SONG [F/ K] (PLAY/PAUSE) button to start Punch In/Out recording. According to the settings in Step 3, play the keyboard between the Punch In and Punch Out points. Refer to the examples of various settings illustrated below. 6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to execute the Save operation. NOTICE The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Examples of re-recording with various Punch In/Out settings This instrument features several different ways you use the Punch In/Out function. The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded. REC START setting REC END setting Original data 1 2 3 4 5 Start overwrite recording *1 NORMAL REPLACE ALL 1 2 1 3 2 4 5 1 2 Play back original data FIRST KEY ON REPLACE ALL 3 4 5 1 2 FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT 1 FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT AT=006 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 4 7 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 6 5 8 7 8 Deleted Stop recording *2 5 6 7 8 Stop overwrite recording/play original data 5 6 7 8 Stop recording *2 5 Deleted Stop recording *2 5 Start overwrite recording 2 6 Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording Play back original data PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT AT=006 5 Start overwrite recording Play back original data PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT 4 Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording Play back original data PUNCH IN AT=003 REPLACE ALL 3 Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording Play back original data Deleted *1 If you want to re-record from the 3rd measure in this setting, move the Song position to the 3rd measure then start Recording to avoid overwriting measures 1–2. *2 To stop recording, press the [REC] button at the end of measure 5. Stop overwrite recording/play original data Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording Play back original data 8 Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording *1 NORMAL PUNCH OUT AT=006 7 Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording *1 NORMAL PUNCH OUT 6 6 7 8 Stop overwrite recording/play original data 5 6 7 8 Previously recorded data Newly recorded data Deleted data 68 Tyros5 Reference Manual Editing Channel Events of Existing Song Data You can apply various useful functions to already recorded data, such as Quantize and Transpose, on the CHANNEL page. 1 3 2 1 Select a Song to be edited. 2 Call up the operation display. 4 Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – 1 [CREATOR]  [A] SONG CREATOR  TAB [E][F] CHANNEL 3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu, then edit the data by using the [1 ]– [8 ] buttons. For details of the edit menu and available settings, see page 70. 4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation for the current display. After the operation (with the exception of the SETUP menu) is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you are not satisfied with the operation results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. 5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to execute the Save operation. NOTICE The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Tyros5 Reference Manual 69 1 QUANTIZE The Quantize function allows you to align the timing of all the notes in a channel. For example, if you record the musical phrase shown at right, you may not play it with absolute precision, and your performance may have been slightly ahead of or behind the precise timing. Quantize is a convenient way of correcting for this. [2 ]/ [3 ] CHANNEL Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is to be quantized. [4 ]– [6 ] SIZE Selects the quantize size (resolution). For optimum results, you should set the Quantize size to the shortest note value in the channel. For example, if eighth notes are the shortest in the channel, you should use eighth note as the Quantize size. After 1/8 note quantization Quarter-note length Settings: 1/4 note 1/8 note 1/16 note 1/32 note 1/16 note+ 1/8 note triplet* 1/4 note triplet 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note triplet 1/8 note+ 1/8 note triplet* 1/16 note+ 1/16 note triplet* The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time. For example, when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are contained in the same channel, if you quantize by the straight eighth notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to straight eighth notes—completely eliminating any triplet feel. However, if you use the eighth note + eighth note triplet setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly. [7 ]/ [8 ] STRENGTH Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100% produces exact timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved toward the specified quantization beats according to the specified percentage. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel in the recording. Quarter-note length Original data (assuming 4/4 meter) Quantizing strength =100 Quantizing strength =50 70 Tyros5 Reference Manual 2 DELETE You can delete the data of the specified channel in the Song. Select the channel whose data to be deleted by using the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons, then press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation. 3 MIX This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another. [2 ]/ [3 ] SOURCE 1 Determines the MIDI channel (1–16) to be mixed. All MIDI events of the channel specified here are copied to the destination channel. [4 ]/ [5 ] SOURCE 2 Determines the MIDI channel (1–16) to be mixed. Only note events of the channel specified here are copied to the destination channel. In addition to the values 1–16, there is a “COPY” setting that allows you to simply copy the data from Source 1 to the destination channel. [6 ]/ [7 ] DESTINATION Determines the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed. 4 CHANNEL TRANSPOSE NOTE This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments. CH 1–8/CH 9–16 Toggles between the two channel displays: Channels 1–8, and Channels 9–16. [G] ALL CH To simultaneously set all channels to the same value, adjust the Channel Transpose for one of the channels while holding down this button. 5 SETUP NOTE The current settings of the Mixing Console display and other panel settings can be recorded to the top position of the Song as the Setup data. The Mixing Console and panel settings recorded here are automatically recalled when the Song starts. [1 ]– [7 ] 4 Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – [F] Make sure not to transpose channels 9 and 10. In general, Drum Kits are assigned to these channels. If you transpose the channels of Drum Kits, the instruments assigned to each key will be changed. SELECT Before executing the Setup operation, move the Song position to the top of the Song by pressing the SONG [] (STOP) button. Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected Song. The items selected here can be recorded only to the top position of the Song, except for the KEYBOARD VOICE. SONG: Records the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console. KEYBOARD VOICE: Records the panel settings, including the Voice selection of the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2, and LEFT) and their on/off status. Panel settings recorded here are same as the ones memorized to the One Touch Setting. This can be recorded at any point in a Song. SCORE SETTING: Records the settings in the Score display. GUIDE SETTING: Records the settings of the Guide functions including the Guide ON/OFF setting. LYRICS SETTING: Records the settings in the Lyrics display. VH/MIC: Records the microphone and the Vocal Harmony settings. For details about the parameters, refer to the Parameter Chart in the Data List. [8 ] MARK ON [8 ] MARK OFF Add or remove a checkmark to the selected item. Checked items are recorded to the Song. Tyros5 Reference Manual 71 Editing Chord Events, Notes, System Exclusive Events and Lyrics You can edit chord events, note events, System Exclusive events and lyrics in the same manner on the corresponding displays: CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX and LYRICS. These are called “Event List” displays because the recorded events are shown in a list view. NOTE After you edit events in the CHORD tab display, press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the data into Song data. Event List display NOTE Chord section data recorded with Realtime Recording cannot be indicated and edited on this display. Indicates the location (position) of the corresponding event. Indicates the event value. Indicates the event type. See page 73. 72 [A]/[B] Moves the cursor up/down and selects the desired event. [C] Moves the cursor to the top (beginning of the Song). [D]/[E] Moves the cursor left/right and selects the desired parameter of the highlighted event. [H] FILTER Calls up the Filter display (page 74), letting you select only the events you wish to be shown in the event list. [I] SAVE Press to save the edited Song. [J] MULTI SELECT Holding this button while using the [A]/[B] buttons lets you select multiple events. [1 ] BAR [2 ] BEAT Determines the position (bar/beat/clock) of the data. One clock is equal to 1/1920th of a quarter note. [3 ] CLOCK [4 ]/ [5 ] DATA ENTRY Adjusts the event value. For coarse adjustment, use the [4 ] buttons. For fine adjustment, use the [5 ] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial. [6 ] CUT Executes the cut/copy/delete/paste operation. [7 ] COPY [7 ] DELETE [8 ] PASTE [6 ] INS (INSERT) Adds a new event. [8 ] CANCEL Cancels editing and restores the original value. Tyros5 Reference Manual Chord Events (CHORD Page) Style Style Tempo Tempo Chord Chord root, Chord type, On Bass Chord Sect Style Section (Intro, Main, Fill In, Break, Ending) OnOff On/off status for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style CH.Vol Volume for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style S.Vol Overall volume of the Accompaniment Style Note Events (1-16 Page) An individual note within a Song. Includes the note number which corresponds to the key which was played, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played, and the gate time value (note length). Ctrl (Control Change) Settings to control the Voice, such as volume, pan, filter and effect depth (edited via the Mixing Console described in chapter 8), etc. Prog (Program Change) MIDI program change number for selecting a Voice. P.Bnd (Pitch Bend) Data for changing the pitch of a Voice continuously. This event is generated by controlling the PITCH BEND wheel. A.T. (After Touch) This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played. 4 Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – Note System Exclusive Events (SYS/EX. Page) ScBar (Score Start Bar) Determines the top measure of a Song. Tempo Determines the tempo value. Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature. Key (Key signature) Determines the key signature, as well as the major/minor setting, for the music score shown on the display. XGPrm (XG parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the XG parameters. For details, refer to the “MIDI Data Format” in the Data List, available at the Yamaha website. SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. Lyrics Events (LYRICS Page) Name Allows you to enter the Song name. Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics. Code CR: Enters a line break in the lyrics text. LF: Clears the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics. Tyros5 Reference Manual 73 Displaying Specific Types of Events In the Event List displays, various types of events are shown. It may sometimes be difficult to pinpoint the ones you want to edit. This is where the Filter function comes in handy. It lets you determine which event types will be shown in the Event List displays. 1 Press the [H] (FILTER) button in the CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX. or LYRICS displays. 2 Checkmark the desired item to be displayed. [C] MAIN Displays all main types of events. [D] CTRL. CHG Displays all types of Control Change message events. [E] STYLE Displays all types of Style playback related events. [H] ALL ON Checkmarks all event types. [I] NOTE/ALL OFF/ CHORD “NOTE” (shown when [C] (MAIN) is on) selects only the NOTE data. “CHORD” (shown when [E] (STYLE) is on) selects only the CHORD data. “ALL OFF” (shown when [D] (CTRL.CHG) is on) removes all checkmarks. [J] INVERT Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously unchecked and vice versa. [2 ]– [5 ] Select and event type to be checked or unchecked. [6 ]/ [7 ] MARK ON [6 ]/ [7 ] MARK OFF Enters/removes the checkmark for the selected event type. The checked event types can be shown on the CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX or LYRICS pages. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to execute the settings. 74 Tyros5 Reference Manual Editing Song Position Markers This section covers two additional Marker-related features and details. For basic information on using the Markers for jump playback and loop playback, refer to the Owner’s Manual.  Jump Markers The Markers explained in the Owner’s Manual are also called “Jump Markers.” In the Event List display (page 72), they are indicated as “SPJ-01”–“SPJ-04.” In the Event List, they can be moved freely to other positions and can even copied to create identical Marker numbers at other positions. When the same Marker number is contained at different locations in the Song, the latest occurring one is used as a “Loop End Marker” (below).  Loop End Marker Loop End Markers can be used for putting additional Markers in Song data, providing even greater versatility. Creating a Loop End Marker is done within the Event List (and not with the [SP 1]–[SP 4] buttons on the panel), by simply copying one “SPJ” Jump Marker event to another position in the Song. For basic information on loop playback between successive Jump Markers, refer to the Owner’s Manual. The examples below show how Loop End Markers can be used in Song playback. Example 1 Copied within the Event List. Top of the song [SPJ-01] (1) [SPJ-02] [SPJ-03] [SPJ-04] End of the song Songs – Recording Your Performances as MIDI Songs – [SPJ-01] 4 Copied event becomes Loop End Marker (2) (1) If the Song is playing back between the two SPJ-01 points, turning on [LOOP] will result in a playback loop between those points. (2) If the Song is playing back between the second SPJ-01 and SPJ-02 and [LOOP] is turned on, playback jumps back to the first SPJ-01 and loops between two SPJ-01 points. Example 2 Copied event becomes Loop End Marker Copied within the Event List. Top of the song (2) [SPJ-01] [SPJ-02] (2) [SPJ-01] (1) [SPJ-03] [SPJ-04] End of the song (3) (1) If the Song is playing back between SPJ-02 and the second SPJ-01, turning on [LOOP] will result in a playback loop between those points. (2) If the [LOOP] button is turned on while the Song is playing back between the top of the Song and SPJ-02, playback will loop between SPJ-01 and SPJ-02. (3) If the Song is playing back between the second SPJ-01 and SPJ-03 and [LOOP] is turned on, playback jumps back to SPJ-02 and loops between SPJ02 and the second SPJ-01 (Loop End Marker). In the examples above, the actual data of the Loop End Marker is identical to the event it was copied from—only the location of the copied Marker provides it with this different function. In Song playback, the markers formatted as “SPJ-xxxxx” (xxxxx: any character except 01–04 and any number of letters is OK) are handled as Loop End Markers. Since the Event List in the Song Creator function does not let you freely name Markers, the instructions above are recommended for creating new Markers. However, with sequence software on a computer, you can create new Markers and assign appropriate names to them. By naming Markers in this way, you can easily distinguish between Loop End Markers and Jump Markers in the Event List. NOTE Loop playback problems may occur if successive Markers are too close to one another. NOTE When the effect settings of the jump destination (the position you’re jumping to) differ from those at the jump source, glitches or drop-outs in the sound may result. This is because of limitations in the effect processors of the Tyros5. NOTE When using the Guide function (page 56) with jump playback, keep in mind that the Guide indication may not be able to stay in time with the jumps. Tyros5 Reference Manual 75 Audio Recorder/Player 5 – Recording and Playback Audio Files – Contents Recording Your Performance ......................................................................... 76 • Multi Track Recording ............................................................................... 76 Converting a file ............................................................................................... 80 • Converting an Audio File (.wav/.mp3) to a Multi Track recording file (.aud) ....... 80 • Converting a Multi Track Recording File (.aud) to an Audio File (.wav) ............. 81 Editing the Recorded Data (Multi Track Recording File) ........................... 82 • (1) Normalize ............................................................................................. 83 • (2) Adjusting the Volume Balance ............................................................. 83 • (3) Deleting a Track.................................................................................... 83 Re-recording the Multi Track Recording File............................................... 84 • NORMAL REC / NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK) ......................... 84 • PUNCH IN OUT / PUNCH IN OUT (MERGE) ....................................... 85 Setting the Start/End Points of the Audio (Multi Track Recording File) ... 87 Playlist Mode .................................................................................................... 88 • Creating a Playlist ...................................................................................... 88 • Playing a Playlist ........................................................................................ 88 • Playlist Controls ......................................................................................... 89 Recording Your Performance With Multi Track recording, you can record your performance several times to make up the complete song. For example, 1) record your keyboard performance to the Main track, 2) record your vocal via the microphone to the Sub track. Multi Track File formats that can be used: Mode Multi Track Available location File extension Recording .aud (Tyros5 original: 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution, stereo) Playback .aud (Tyros5 original: 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution, stereo) Internal HDD Various recording methods (Bounce, Punch In/Out, etc.) Yes Multi Track Recording This section covers the basic procedure of Multi Track recording. The operation steps can be summarized as follows: 1) Record your keyboard performance to the Main track, 2) record your vocal sound to the Sub track. 1 Up to 80 minutes can be recorded continuously in a single recording operation. Make the necessary settings such as Voice/Style selection and the microphone connection (if you want to record your vocal). NEXT PAGE 76 NOTE Tyros5 Reference Manual 2 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button, repeatedly if necessary, to call up the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER display. 3 Press the [F] (MULTI TRACK) button to call up the Multi Track Recorder display. 4 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [REC] and [STOP] buttons simultaneously. This operation will create a new empty audio file named “M_Audio_***.AUD.” Record to the Main track. If the TRACK SELECT [F3] is not selected “MAIN” in the display, press the [F] button to select the “MAIN” as destination. 5-1 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording. 5-2 When your performance is finished, press the [STOP] button to stop record- Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files – 5 5 NOTICE The data is automatically saved in the internal HDD, but you may want to backup your data from time to time. Copying is the easiest way to do this. However, since copying within a folder in the HDD is not possible, you need to create a new folder. For details on file management, refer to the Owner’s Manual. ing. 5-3 To hear your new recording, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Undo/Redo If you’ve made a mistake or you’re not completely satisfied with your performance, you can press the Undo function to erase the take and try again. 1 Press the [G] (UNDO) button. The latest recording that you made is cancelled. If you want to restore the operation, press the [G] (REDO) button. 2 Press the [REC] button to enable recording. 3 Start again with Step 4 in “Multi Track Recording”. NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 77 Next, let’s record your singing to the Sub track. You can record your vocals while listening to playback of the Main track. 6 Practice the part (sing into the microphone) to check the level and adjust the recording volume on the REC MONITOR meter by using the [1 ] buttons or sliders. Adjust so that the volume doesn’t constantly go into the “red” and light up the indicator. If it does, you may have to turn the microphone input level down a bit. 7 NOTE • Press the 1’s [] and [] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the recording volume to 90. • If you call up a different display, press the [MODE] button to return to the Multi Track Recorder display. Record to the Sub track. 7-1 Press the [F] (TRACK SELECT) button to select “SUB” as destination. NOTE Make sure that the RECORDING MODE (upper left of the display) is set to “NORMAL REC” here. 7-2 Press the [REC] button to enable recording. 7-2 7-4 7-3, 7-5 7-3 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording. Immediately after this operation, start singing along with the Main track playback. 7-4 When your performance is finished, press the [STOP] button to stop recording. 7-5 To hear your new recording, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Adjusting the volume balance On the TRACK PLAY meter, you can adjust the volume of Main and Sub tracks separately. Use the [4 ]/ [6 ] buttons or sliders to adjust the Main/Sub track volume. By using the [3 ]/[5 ] buttons, you can also mute the Main/Sub tracks. NEXT PAGE 78 Tyros5 Reference Manual Next, mix all data from the Main track and Sub track to one track (Main track). This procedure (below) is called Bounce recording. 8 Press the [B] (REC MODE), and then use the [B]/[C] buttons to select “BOUNCE.” After selection, press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. 9 NOTE When the Recording Mode is set to “BOUNCE,” the selected track is automatically changed to Main. Press the [REC] button then press the [G] (YES) button. If you do not want to delete the recorded data of the Sub track, press the [H] (NO) button instead of the [G] (YES) button above. 10 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start Bounce recording. All data in Main and Sub tracks are mixed and recorded to the Main track. When playback of the Main and Sub tracks is finished, Bounce recording automatically stops. 11 To hear your new recording, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. If you did not delete the recorded data of the Sub track in Step 9, the data of Sub track is recorded to both Main and Sub tracks. To avoid duplicate playback of Sub track, press the [5 ] (MUTE) button in the Multi Track Recorder display. 12 Press the [EXIT MULTI TRACK] button, then press the [G] (YES) button to exit from the Multi Track Recorder display. At this point, the recorded data have not been processed with the Mixdown operation (converting a Multi Track recording file to a Simple recording file). If Mixdown is necessary, refer to the “Converting a Multi Track Recording File (.aud) to an Audio File (.wav)” on page 81. 5 NOTE Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files – The Sub track is now empty, you can continue recording another part to the Sub track, repeating Steps 6–7. NOTE If you sing or play the keyboard during Bounce recording, your performance is also recorded to the Main track. • The Multi Track recording file (.aud) can be played back only on the Tyros5. • The .aud file saved with the Multi Track recording can be converted to .wav file format (Simple recording file) by using the Mixdown function. NOTE You can convert the Multi Track recording file (.aud) to a Simple recording file .(wav). For details, see the “Converting a Multi Track Recording File (.aud) to an Audio File (.wav)” on page 81. Tyros5 Reference Manual 79 Converting a file Converting an Audio File (.wav/.mp3) to a Multi Track recording file (.aud) You can convert audio files (.wav/.mp3), such as commercially available samples, loops, sound effects, etc., to a Multi Track recording file (.aud)—allowing you to work with the two tracks or use the various recording methods of the instrument (Bounce, Punch In/Out, etc.). 1 Connect the USB flash memory containing the audio file to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. 2 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button several times to call up AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER display. 3 Press the [A] (FILE) button. 4 Use the TAB [][] buttons to select the USB flash memory, then use the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired audio file. 5 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER display. 6 Press the [F] (MULTI TRACK) button, then press the [F] (YES) button. The conversion of the audio files (.wav/.mp3) to the Main track of the Multi Track recording file (.aud) is completed. 7 80 NOTE The conversion time to a Multi Track recording file depends on the size of the audio file (.wav/.mp3). NOTICE Execute the same operations from Step 7 in “Multi Track Recording” on page 78. Tyros5 Reference Manual If the same file name already exists, a message appears prompting you to overwrite. Selecting [YES] converts the file and overwrites the Main track. The data of Sub track will be deleted. Converting a Multi Track Recording File (.aud) to an Audio File (.wav) You can convert a Tyros5 Multi Track recording file (.aud) to a Simple recording file (.wav)—allowing you to playback on devices other than the Tyros5, and also playback on the Tyros5 from the USB flash memory. NOTE If you want to save the file to a USB flash memory, connect the USB flash memory to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button several times to call up AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER display. 2 Press the [F] (MULTI TRACK) button. 3 Press the [A] (FILE) button. 4 Use the TAB [][] buttons to select the USB flash memory, then use the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired audio file. 5 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER display. 6 Press the [J] (MIXDOWN) button to call up the MIXDOWN display. 7 If necessary, press the [B] (FILE NAME) button, change the file name, then press the [8 ] (OK) button. 8 If necessary, press the [C] (SAVE TO) button, use the TAB [][] and [A]–[J] buttons to select the destination (to which the converted file is to be saved), then press the [8 ] (OK) button. 9 Press the [G] (START) button to start playback. As soon as playback is finished, conversion from .aud to .wav will be started. Tyros5 Reference Manual 5 Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files – 1 81 Editing the Recorded Data (Multi Track Recording File) You can edit the data which is recorded in Multi Track Recording. 1 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button several times to call up the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER display and select the recorded data to be edited. 2 Press the [F] (MULTI TRACK) button to call up the Multi Track Recorder display. 3 Press [A] (FILE) button 4 Select the desired audio file by using [A]–[J] buttons. 5 Press [EXIT] button to return to the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER display. (3) (1) (2) 82 Tyros5 Reference Manual NOTICE The data is automatically saved in the internal HDD, but you may want to backup your data before editing. Copying is the easiest way to do this. However, since copying within a folder in the HDD is not possible, you need to create a new folder. For details on file management, refer to the Owner’s Manual. (1) Normalize Normalize raises the volume of the recorded audio to the optimum level. Use this to make the recorded audio as loud as possible, without distortion. Technically, this operation scans the recorded file for the highest level, then raises the volume of the entire file so that the highest peak is set to the maximum, non-distorting level. Normalization is calculated for the loudest signal found in either channel of the stereo recording and the same gain is applied to both channels. 1 Press the [F] (TRACK SELECT) button to select the track to be normalized. 2 Press the [I] (NORMALIZE) button. 3 At the prompt, press the [G] (OK) button to start normalizing the selected track. To cancel the operation, press the [H] (CANCEL) button. (2) Adjusting the Volume Balance On the TRACK PLAY meter, you can adjust the volume of Main and Sub tracks separately. Use the [4 ]/[6 ] buttons or sliders to adjust the Main/Sub track volume. By using the [3 ]/[5 ] buttons, you can also mute the Main/Sub tracks. NOTE To control overall volume of the audio file, press the [BALANCE] button once or twice to call up the BALANCE (2/2) display, then use the [4 ] slider or buttons. 5 1 Press the [F] (TRACK SELECT) button to select the track to be deleted. 2 Press the [H] (TRACK DELETE) button. 3 At the prompt, press the [G] (OK) button to start deleting the selected track. Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files – (3) Deleting a Track To cancel the operation and leave the track intact, press the [G] (UNDO) button, before executing any other operation. Tyros5 Reference Manual 83 Re-recording the Multi Track Recording File The created Multi Track recording data can be re-recorded in the following five ways. • Replace the whole data: NORMAL REC ........................................................See below • Mix the recorded data: NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK).......................See below • Replace a certain range of the data: PUNCH IN/OUT.................................See page 85 • Overdub a certain range of the data: PUNCH IN/OUT (MERGE) ..............See page 85 • Merge the Main and Sub tracks to the Main track: BOUNCE ............................................................................................. See Multi Track Recording NOTE Re-recording of the data repeatedly will result in deterioration of the sound quality. NOTICE The data is automatically saved in the internal HDD, but you want to backup your data before rerecording. Copying is the easiest way to do this. However, since copying within a folder in the HDD is not possible, you need to create a new folder. For details on file management, refer to the Owner’s Manual. NORMAL REC / NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK) You can replace the whole audio data of a track by NORMAL REC or mix the audio data with the previous one by NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK). The NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK) method does not add any tracks but simply mixes the new recording to the existing data. After stopping recording, any data following the stop point will be erased. NOTE Since you will be overdubbing parts onto this audio, it’s best to keep the first recording simple. For example, you may want to record just a rhythm pattern (such as by playing back a Style) or a simple bass riff over which you can add other parts. 1 Execute Steps 1–5 in “Editing the Recorded Data (Multi Track Recording File)” on page 82 to select the data to be rerecorded. 2 Use the [F] (TRACK SELECT) button to select the track to be re-recorded. 2 3 3 Use the [B]/[C] buttons to select a recording method. • Replace the whole data: NORMAL REC • Mix the recorded data: NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK) 4 If you select “NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK),” play back the recorded audio and practice the part that you want to overdub while the audio is playing. Change the volume settings if necessary. If you wish to add a keyboard-played Voice from the Tyros5, select the desired Voice. If you wish to record your singing voice or an external instrument, connect a microphone or instrument and make the appropriate settings. Adjust the Track Play and Rec Monitor levels here as desired. 5 Press the [REC] button to enable recording. NEXT PAGE 84 Tyros5 Reference Manual 6 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording. NOTE Play the keyboard (or sing, etc.) and record your performance. 7 When finished recording, press the [STOP] button. The playback sound of the other (not yet rerecorded) track is not recorded to the track. After stopping recording, the data will be erased from the stop point. 8 To hear your new recording, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. If you’ve made a mistake or you’re not completely satisfied with your performance, press the [EXIT] button to return to the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER display, then undo the NORMAL REC/NORMAL REC (PLUS PLAYBACK) operation by pressing the [G] (UNDO) button. NOTE The Audio Recorder/Player automatically reduces the level of the previous track by a certain, slight amount to accommodate the new recording. This is done to minimize possible distortion. You can use the Normalize effect to maximize the volume of the overall sound. For details, see page 83. PUNCH IN OUT / PUNCH IN OUT (MERGE) This method of recording can only be used on an existing recording. It allows you to rerecord over a specific part of the already-recorded material. You can replace the original part with the new recording by PUNCH IN/OUT, or keeping the original and mixing it with the new by PUNCH IN/OUT (MERGE). This lets you either correct a mistake in the recording or overdub new parts onto the original recording. Keep in mind that the parts before and after the Punch In/Out section are not recorded over and remain as the original data—they play back normally to guide you in and out of the recording. Start Recording Re-recorded Data Punch In Original Data Punch Out Stop Recording You can re-record over only one range at one time. NOTE The beginning and ending of the recorded data using the Punch In/Out function is faded in/out automatically. This is done to minimize possible noise at the beginning and ending of the recorded data. We recommend that you specify the beginning and ending points at sections in the data where the volume is low. 1 Execute Steps 1–5 in “Editing the Recorded Data (Multi Track Recording File)” on page 82 to select the recorded data to be re-recorded. 2 Use the [F] (TRACK SELECT) button to select the track to be re-recorded. 5 Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files – Original Data NOTE 2 3 3 Use the [B]/[C] buttons to select a recording method. • Replace a certain range of the data: PUNCH IN/OUT • Overdub a certain range of the data: PUNCH IN/OUT (MERGE) NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 85 4 Select the desired Punch In/Out Mode, using the [1 ]/[2 ] (MODE) buttons. 4 • MANUAL ............... This lets you manually execute Punch In/Out recording by using the Audio Recorder/Player transport buttons ([REC], [PLAY/PAUSE], etc.). • PEDAL.................... This lets you manually execute Punch In/Out recording by using a connected footswitch to the FOOT PEDAL 2 jack. • AUTO...................... This lets you specify the Punch In and Out points, allowing automatic Punch In/Out recording (see below). Specifying the recording range in AUTO mode If you select AUTO as the punch in/out recording method, specify the recording range and practice the recording by using the Rehearsal function. 1 Specify the punch in/out range by pressing the [3 ]/[5 ] (SET) buttons at the punch in/out point during the audio song playback. 2 If you move the punch in/out point slightly, use the Nudge function. In this Nudge function, you can move the punch in/out point slightly (even in millisecond units) while listening to the playback. 2-1 Press the [7 ] (NUDGE) button to show the Nudge Play display. 2-2 Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [PREV]/[NEXT] button to move the NUDGE DATA POSITION to the desired punch in/out position while listening to the playback (500 milliseconds loop playback before/after the specified point). The [DATA ENTRY] dial lets you adjust the point in seconds and the [PREV]/[NEXT] buttons lets you adjust in milliseconds. 2-3 Press the [7 ] (MODE) button to select After/Before. “After” repeats 500 milliseconds after the Nudge Data Position and “Before” repeats 500 milliseconds before the Nudge Data Position when you playback the data in the next step. 2-4 Press the [3 ]/[5 ] (SET) button to set the moved point. To reset the point to the start/end point of the data, press the [4 ]/[6 ] (RESET) button. 2-5 Press the [8 ] (CLOSE) button. NOTE The smallest possible range of the Auto punch in/out function is 100 milliseconds. 3 Use the REHEARSAL function to practice the recording before the actual recording. 3-1 Press the [8 ] (REHEARSAL) button. “EXECUTING” is shown above the [8 ] buttons. 3-2 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [REC] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The audio song is played back repeatedly starting four seconds before the punch in point to four seconds after the punch out point. Play the keyboard or sing the desired part in practice. In this rehearsal function, recording is not started. 3-3 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [STOP] button. NOTE Repeat playback of the rehearsal function is automatically stopped after playing back 99 times. NEXT PAGE 86 Tyros5 Reference Manual 5 Record the specific part of the audio song using the one of the methods below. NOTE The playback sound of the other (not yet rerecorded) track is not recorded to the track. Manual Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [REC] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to engage the record mode, then press the [REC] and [PLAY/PAUSE] buttons simultaneously to actually record. To stop recording, press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [STOP] button. Pressing the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [PLAY/ PAUSE] button during recording pauses the recording. Pedal Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [REC] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to engage the record mode, then press and hold the footswitch. The point at which you press the footswitch is the punch in point and the point at which you release the pedal is the punch out point. Auto Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [REC] button and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Recording automatically starts and stops at the specified point in “Specifying the recording range in AUTO mode” on page 86. The audio song playback automatically stops four seconds after the punch out point. 6 To hear your new recording, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. If you’ve made a mistake or you’re not completely satisfied with your performance, press the [EXIT] button to return to the Multi Track Recorder display then undo the Punch In/Out operation by pressing the [G] (UNDO) button. 5 Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files – Setting the Start/End Points of the Audio (Multi Track Recording File) This function lets you set the Start and End points for the audio file. This action is non-destructive and affects only the playback of the data; it does not actually delete any data from the start or end of the file. 1 Execute Step 1–5 in “Editing the Recorded Data (Multi Track Recording File)” on page 82 to select the desired audio data. 2 Press the [C] (START/END POINT) button. 3 Specify the Start/End point. The operation of specifying the Start/End points is same as specifying the punch in/out points. For instructions, see “Specifying the recording range in AUTO mode” on page 86. 4 NOTICE The data is automatically saved in the internal HDD, but you want to backup your data before rerecording. Copying is the easiest way to do this. However, since copying within a folder in the HDD is not possible, you need to create a new folder. For details on file management, refer to the Owner’s Manual. Press the [F] (OK) button to enter the new settings to the file. To cancel the operation, press the [G] (CANCEL) button. Tyros5 Reference Manual 87 Playlist Mode The Playlist is a convenient feature within the Audio Recorder/Player that lets you collect and organize audio files for automatic playback in “jukebox” fashion. The Playlist mode can be active in the background (for example, when the Main display is selected), letting you play the listed files whenever you wish during your performance. The “REPEAT” icon (see page 89) at the upper left of the display shows that the Audio Recorder/Player is set to the Playlist mode (automatic playback of multiple files). Creating a Playlist Once you have a number of audio files on the internal hard disk drive, you can add those files to the Playlist. The files can be put in any order and can be entered any number of times (in other words, a single file can have multiple instances in a Playlist). 1 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button several times to call up the AUDIO PLAYER/RECORDING display. 2 Press [A] (FILE) button, then use the TAB [][] buttons to select the location (HD or USB) of the desired audio file. 3 Add the desired audio file to the Playlist. 3-1 Press the [6 ] (ADD TO PLAYLIST) button. The selected file name is highlighted. You can continue to select additional files here, as many as desired. If multiple pages (P1, P2, ...) are shown at the bottom, you can select files from these displays, too. To select all the files in the current folder, press the [6 ] (ALL) button. NOTE A Playlist can contain a maximum of 500 audio files. NOTE You cannot add the Multi Track (.aud) audio data to the Playlist. NOTE If you want to select all but a few of the files in the folder, a quick method is to use the [6 ] (ALL) button to select all of the files, then use the [A]–[J] buttons to de-select specific files. 3-2 Press the [7 ] (OK) button to confirm the selection. 4 5 Press the [EXIT] button. Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button several times to call up the PLAYLIST display, then check the Playlist to confirm that the files have been added. If the Playlist already has audio files, additional files are automatically put at the end of the list. Added files are also automatically selected (checkmarked) for playback. 6 NOTE If you change the file icon after adding to the Playlist, the audio file cannot be recognized from the Playlist. Save the Playlist. Press the [1 ] (FILES) button, then save the Playlist to the USER drive, internal hard disk drive or USB flash memory. Playing a Playlist Once you’ve created and/or edited a Playlist and you’ve enabled the Playlist mode, you can play back the files in the list—at any time during your performance. Keep in mind that playback of files is not instantaneous. Since the Audio Recorder/Player needs to load each file before playing it, playback pauses roughly one or two seconds between files. 1 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button several times to call up the PLAYLIST display. NEXT PAGE 88 Tyros5 Reference Manual 2 Press the [1 ] (FILES) buttons to call up the PLAYLIST FILE display, then select the desired Playlist by using the [A]–[J] buttons. NOTE The [SELECT] button toggles between the Audio and Playlist displays within the Audio Recorder/Player function. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the PLAYLIST display. 4 Use the [5 ]/[6 ] buttons to select a file for playback, then actually enter it by pressing the [7 ] (SELECT) button. You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to move the cursor and press the [ENTER] button to actually select the song. To have the files play back from the beginning of the Playlist, select the first file. A check mark indicates the file is enabled for playback, a minus sign ( - ) indicates the file will be skipped, and an exclamation mark indicates the file does not contain data. 5 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback of the Playlist from the selected file. While the Playlist mode is active (the indicator at the top left of the display shows the “REPEAT” icon; page 89), the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [PREV]/[NEXT] buttons function as Previous/Next controls for the Playlist. Pressing the appropriate button calls up a pop-up window and selects the previous or next audio file in the Playlist. You can use the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [PLAY/PAUSE] button to pause and resume play at any time during your performance. 6 Press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [STOP] button to stop playback. 5 To disengage the Playlist mode, press the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [MODE] button several times to call up the Audio Recorder/Player display, then select an audio file. Audio Recorder/Player – Recording and Playback Audio Files – Playlist Controls Shown here is a sample Playlist display, with short explanations of the various controls. [A] REPEAT Determines how the audio files will be played back: All files are played in sequence once through to the end (no repeat). All files are played in sequence repeatedly. One selected file is played repeatedly. [B] SORT Determines whether the audio files are sorted in ascending or descending order by name. [C] SHUFFLE Pressing this button randomly rearranges the order of the files. [D] UNDO/REDO Pressing this button (Undo) cancels the last action made to the Playlist. Pressing it again (Redo) restores the cancelled action. Only one level of Undo/Redo is available. [F] PROPERTY Calls up the Property popup window which shows the file name and path of the audio song at the cursor position. Tyros5 Reference Manual 89 [G]–[J] Playlist navigation controls. [G]: Moves cursor/selection to the top of the list. [H]: Moves cursor/selection one page up (when there are multiple pages). [I]: Moves cursor/selection one page down (when there are multiple pages). [J]: Moves cursor/selection to the bottom of the list (just below last entered file). [1 ] FILES Opens the PLAYLIST FILE display. From this display, you can rename, copy, delete or save the playlists. [2 ] MOVE Up/Down Use these buttons to move the selected file to another location in the list. [3 ] CUT [3 ] INSERT These operations let you copy or cut and paste individual list entries. Keep in mind that these have no effect on the actual audio data, but just entries in the list. [4 ] COPY Cut and Insert 1 Press the [3 ] (CUT) button. 2 Select the desired file entry by using the [5 ] buttons and press the [6 ] button to actually select it. Then press the [8 ] (OK) button. The entry is deleted. 3 Move the cursor to the desired location in the list (with the [5 ]/[6 ] buttons) and press the [3 ] (INSERT) button. Copy and Insert 1 Press the [4 ] (COPY) button. 2 Select the desired file entry by using the [5 ] buttons and press the [6 ] button to actually select it. Then press the [8 ] (OK) button. The entry is copied. 3 Move the cursor to the desired location in the list (with the [5 ]/[6 ] buttons) and press the [3 ] (INSERT) button. 90 [4 ] DELETE Deletes files from the Playlist. Keep in mind that this does not affect the actual audio data, but simply deletes an entry of the file from the list. [5 ]/ [6 ] Up/Down Use these buttons to move the cursor in the list. Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to quickly move the cursor (red border) through the entries and press the [ENTER] button. [7 ] SELECT Actually selects the file at the cursor position. [8 ] MARK Adds or removes the checkmark to/from the selected data. Only the checkmarked files will be played. Holding this button adds (or removes) the checkmark to (or from) all files. Tyros5 Reference Manual 6 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Settings for Your Performance – Contents Creating a Set of Favorite Records ................................................................ 91 Editing Records................................................................................................ 92 • Deleting the Record.................................................................................... 93 Saving the Records as a Single File (Music Finder File) .............................. 93 • Calling up the Records from a Music Finder file....................................... 94 Creating a Set of Favorite Records Even though the Search function lets you efficiently look for Music Finder Records, you may want to create a custom “folder” of your favorite Records—so you can quickly call up the panel settings, Song data and Style data you use frequently. 1 Select the desired Record from the MUSIC FINDER display. 2 Press the [H] (ADD TO FAVORITE) button, then press the [G] (YES) button to add the selected Record to the FAVORITE page. 6 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Settings for Your Performance – 3 2 3 Select the FAVORITE page by using the TAB [E][F] buttons, and check to see if the Record has been added. As with the ALL page, you can select the Record in the FAVORITE page then start your performance. Deleting Records from the FAVORITE Page 1 Select the Record you want to delete from the FAVORITE page. 2 Press the [H] (DELETE FROM FAVORITE) button, then press the [G] (YES) button to actually delete the Record. Tyros5 Reference Manual 91 Editing Records You can create your original Record by editing an existing Record. Your edits can be replaced with those of the current Record, or can be saved as a new separate Record. 1 Select the desired Record to be edited in the MUSIC FINDER display. 2 Press the [8 ] (RECORD EDIT) button to call up the EDIT display. 3 Edit the Record. [A] MUSIC For entering the music title. Pressing the [A] button calls up the display for entering the music title. [B] KEYWORD For entering the keyword to be used when executing the Search operation. Pressing the [B] button calls up the display for entering the keyword. [C] STYLE/SONG/ AUDIO Changes the Style. Pressing the [C] button calls up the Style Selection display. After selecting the desired Style, press the [EXIT] button to return back to the EDIT display. For SONG or AUDIO Records, this field cannot be edited. [D] BEAT Changes the beat (time signature) of the Record for search purposes. For SONG or AUDIO Records, this field cannot be edited. NOTE Keep in mind that the Beat setting made here is only for the Music Finder search function; this does not affect the actual Beat setting of the Style itself. [E] FAVORITE Selects whether the edited Record is added to the FAVORITE page or not. [1 ] TEMPO Changes the Tempo. For SONG or AUDIO Records, this field cannot be edited. [2 ] SECTIONS Selects the Style sections that are called up as a set when the Record is selected. You can start the Record with the section selected by the [2 ] buttons. When the section finishes, Style playback automatically shifts to the section selected by the [4 ] buttons. For SONG or AUDIO Records, this field cannot be edited. [5 ]/ [6 ] GENRE Selects the desired genre. [7 ] GENRE NAME Creates a new genre. [4 ] To cancel and quit the Edit operation, press the [8 ] (CANCEL) button. NEXT PAGE 92 Tyros5 Reference Manual 4 Save the edited Record. When creating a new Record Press the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. The Record is added to the ALL page. When overwriting an existing Record Press the [8 ] (OK) button. Deleting the Record By executing the Delete operation, you can delete the desired Record from all pages (ALL, FAVORITE and SEARCH 1/2). 1 Select the Record to be deleted from the MUSIC FINDER display. 2 Press the [8 ] (RECORD EDIT) button to call up the EDIT display. 3 Press the [I] (DELETE RECORD) button. To cancel the Delete operation and return to the MUSIC FINDER display in Step 1, press [G] (NO); to return to the EDIT display in Step 2, press [H] (CANCEL). 4 Press the [F] (YES) button to delete the current Record. 6 Saving the Records as a Single File (Music Finder File) Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Panel Settings for Your Performance – The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and additionally created Records as a single Music Finder file. Keep in mind that individual Records (panel settings, Song, audio and Style files) cannot be handled as separate files. 1 Press the [7 ] (FILES) button in the MUSIC FINDER display to call up the File Selection display. 2 Press the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the location for saving (USER/HD/USB). 3 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button. 4 Press the [8 ] (OK) button to actually save the file. All Records are saved together as a single Music Finder file. Tyros5 Reference Manual 93 Calling up the Records from a Music Finder file By selecting a Music Finder file, you can recall the Records saved to the User, Hard disk or USB drive as a file. 1 Press the [7 ] (FILES) button in the MUSIC FINDER display to call up the File Selection display. 2 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to select the location to which the file is saved. 3 Press the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Music Finder file. A message appears, prompting you to select one of the following options. [F] REPLACE All Music Finder Records currently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the Records of the selected file. NOTICE Selecting “REPLACE” automatically deletes all your original Records from internal memory. Make sure that all important data has been archived to another location beforehand. 94 [G] APPEND The Records called up are added to the Records currently in the instrument. [H] CANCEL Cancels the file selection operation. Tyros5 Reference Manual 7 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – Contents Editing a Registration Memory ...................................................................... 95 Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) ................................................... 96 Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration Sequence) .......................................................................................................... 97 • Saving the Registration Sequence Settings ................................................ 98 • Using the Registration Sequence................................................................ 99 Editing a Registration Memory You can edit (rename and delete) each of Registration Memories contained in the Bank. 1 Select the Registration Memory Bank containing the Registration Memory to be edited. Press the REGISTRATION BANK [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously to call up the Registration Bank Selection display, then press one of the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired Bank. Make sure the MENU 1 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display. 3 Press the [7 ] (EDIT) button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT display. 4 Select a particular Registration Memory to be edited by pressing any of the [A]–[D] and [F]–[I] buttons. 5 Press the [1 ] button to rename or the [5 ] button to delete the selected Registration Memory. 7 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 2 For details on the Rename and Delete operations, refer to the Basic Operations of the Owner’s Manual. 6 Save the current Bank containing the edited Registration Memories. Press the [8 ] button to call up the Registration Memory Selection display. Change MENU 1 to MENU 2 by pressing the [8 ] button, then press the [6 ] (SAVE) button to execute the Save operation. Tyros5 Reference Manual 95 Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single button press. However, there may be times that you want certain items to remain the same, even when switching Registration Memory setups. When you want to switch the Voice settings but still maintain the Style settings, for example, you can “freeze” only the Style settings and have those Style settings remain, even when you select another Registration Memory number. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET  TAB [E][F] FREEZE 2 Use the [2 ]–[7 ] buttons to select the desired item, then use the [8 ] buttons to enter or remove the checkmark. Items having checkmarks will be frozen when [FREEZE] is turned on. 3 4 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display. Press the [FREEZE] button on the panel to turn the Freeze function on. With this operation, you can “freeze” or maintain checkmarked items, even when you select another Registration Memory number. To turn off the Freeze function, press the [FREEZE] button again. 96 Tyros5 Reference Manual NOTICE Settings in the REGISTRATION FREEZE display are automatically saved to the instrument when you exit from this display. However, if you turn the power off without exiting from this display, the settings will be lost. Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration Sequence) As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are, there may be times during a performance when you want to even more easily switch between settings. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the eight setups in any order you specify, by simply using the TAB [E][F] buttons (in the Main display) or the pedal as you play. 1 If you intend to use a pedal or pedals to switch the Registration Memory number, connect the optional pedals to the appropriate FOOT PEDAL jacks. For instructions, refer to Chapter 11 of the Owner’s Manual. 2 In the REGISTRATION BANK display, select the desired Bank to be programmed. 3 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [E] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE/VOICE SET  TAB [E][F] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE 4 If you use a pedal, specify here how the pedal will be used—to advance or to reverse through the sequence. Use the [C] or [D] button to select the pedal for advancing or reversing through the Registration Sequence. For example, if two pedals are connected, Pedal 1 is used for advancing while Pedal 2 is used for reversing. Note that the pedal settings here (other than OFF) will take priority over the settings in the FOOT PEDAL display (page 133). If you want to use the pedal for a function other than Registration Sequence, make sure to set this to OFF. Indicates the name of the currently selected Registration Memory Bank. 7 7 5 Program the Sequence order, from left to right. Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons on the panel, then press the [6 ] (INSERT) button to input the number. Indicates the Registration Memory numbers, in the order of the current Registration Sequence. NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 97 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 4 6 [1 ]– [4 ] CURSOR Moves the cursor. [5 ] REPLACE Replaces the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number. [6 ] INSERT Inserts the number of the currently selected Registration Memory number to the cursor position. [7 ] DELETE Deletes the number at the cursor position. [8 ] CLEAR Deletes all numbers in the sequence. 6 Use the [E] (SEQUENCE END) button to determine how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence. • STOP ......................Pressing the TAB [F] button or the “advance” pedal has no effect. The sequence is “stopped.” • TOP ........................The sequence starts again at the beginning. • NEXT BANK .........The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory Bank in the same folder. 7 Press the [F] (REGISTRATION SEQUENCE ENABLE) button to turn the Registration Sequence function on. 8 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display. After the confirmation message appears, press the [G] (YES) button to store the Registration Sequence program temporarily. Saving the Registration Sequence Settings The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END) are included as part of the Registration Memory Bank file. To store your newly programmed Registration Sequence, save the current Registration Memory Bank file. 98 NOTICE Keep in mind that all Registration Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory Banks, unless you’ve saved it with the Registration Memory Bank file. 1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display. 2 Make sure the MENU 2 is shown at the bottom right corner of the display. 3 Press the [6 ] button to save the Bank file. Tyros5 Reference Manual Using the Registration Sequence 1 Select the desired Registration Bank. 2 At the upper right of the Main display, confirm the Registration Sequence. The Registration Sequence is indicated at the upper right of the Main display, letting you confirm the currently selected numbers. 3 Press the TAB [E] or [F] button, or press the Foot Pedal to select the first Registration Memory number. The box appears around the left-most number, indicating that this Registration Memory number is currently selected. 4 Use the TAB buttons or Foot Pedal during your keyboard performance. To return to the status in which no Registration Memory number is selected, press the [E] and [F] buttons simultaneously in the Main display. NOTE The pedal can be used for Registration Sequence no matter which display is called up (except for the REGIST SEQUENCE display). 7 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – Tyros5 Reference Manual 99 8 Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing – Contents Vocal Harmony and Talk Setting ................................................................. 100 Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk)........................ 101 • Saving the Microphone Settings............................................................... 101 • VOCAL Page............................................................................................ 102 • TALK Page ............................................................................................... 103 Setting and Editing Vocal Harmony Types ................................................. 104 • Setting up the Vocal Harmony Control Parameters.................................. 104 • Editing the Vocal Harmony Types............................................................ 106 Editing the Synth Vocoder Types ................................................................. 111 • Editing the Overview Tab Parameters ...................................................... 112 • Editing the Detail Tab Parameters............................................................ 114 Vocal Harmony and Talk Setting q w r t e q [VOCAL HARMONY] button Turns on or off the Vocal Harmony. w [VOCAL EFFECT] button Turns on or off the Vocal Effect which can be set on the display called up via [VH TYPE SELECT] [8 ] (EDIT). For details, refer to page 104. e [TALK] button Switches the microphone setup between the Vocal setup (used during microphone performance) and Talk setup (used during talk or between a certain performance and the next performance). When set to ON, only the Talk settings are active. When set to OFF, only the Vocal Harmony settings are active. r [VH TYPE SELECT] button For selecting the desired Vocal Harmony type. t [MIC SETTING] button For setting various microphone-related parameters, for Vocal Harmony and Talk independently. 100 Tyros5 Reference Manual Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk) This section explains how to make and save the detailed settings for the microphone. Connect the microphone, press the [MIC SETTING/VOCAL HARMONY] button to call up the operation display, then press the [F] button to set the MIC to ON. This lets you talk into the microphone and hear the changes made while setting the parameters. 2 Select the desired page, VOCAL or TALK, by using the TAB [E][F] buttons. NOTE 2 The settings on the TALK page are microphone settings that are active when the Talk function is on. 3 4 3 Use the [A]–[E] buttons to select the specific row (or group) of parameters to be adjusted. 4 Set the value of specific parameters in the row by using the [1 ]–[6 ] buttons. For information on each parameter, see pages 102–103. NOTICE After setting, go to the Mic Setting Memory display by pressing the [H] (USER MEMORY) button and save the settings (see page 102). The settings will be lost if you exit from this display or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing – 1 8 Saving the Microphone Settings All the settings (VOCAL/TALK pages) are saved together as a single file. Up to ten files can be saved. 1 On the MIC SETTING display (in step 3 above), press the [H] (USER MEMORY) button. 2 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button to save the file to USER. For details on the naming and deleting procedures, refer to the Basic Operations section in the Owner’s Manual. Calling Up the Microphone Settings Saved to USER 1 [MIC SETTING] button  [H] USER MEMORY 2 Press the [A]–[J] buttons to select the desired setting file. NOTE The microphone setting file can be saved only to internal USER drive. If you want to save this setting USB flash memory, save the User Effect file on the display called up via [FUNCTION]  [H] (UTILITY)  SYSTEM RESET  [H] (USER EFFECT). Tyros5 Reference Manual 101 VOCAL Page 3-BAND EQ (selected by [A]/[B] buttons) EQ (Equalizer) is a processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands which can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. This instrument features a high-grade three-band (LOW, MID and HIGH) digital equalizer function for the microphone sound. [1 ]/ [3 ]/ [5 ] Hz Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band. [2 ]/ [4 ]/ [6 ] dB Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB. NOISE GATE (selected by [C]/[D] buttons) This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level. This effectively cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired signal (vocal, etc.) to pass. [1 ] SW (Switch) Turns the Noise Gate on or off. [2 ] TH. (Threshold) Adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open. COMPRESSOR (selected by [C]/[D] buttons) This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level. This is especially useful for smoothing out vocals that have widely varying dynamics. It effectively “compresses” the signal, making soft parts louder and loud parts softer. For a maximum compression effect, set RATIO to a high setting and adjust the OUT parameter for optimum volume. [3 ] SW (Switch) Turns the Compressor on or off. [4 ] TH. (Threshold) Adjusts the input level above which the Compressor is applied. [5 ] RATIO Adjusts the compression ratio. Higher ratios result in a more compressed sound, with a reduced dynamic range. [6 ] OUT Adjusts the final output level. PITCH DETECT (selected by [E] button) Determines how this instrument detects or recognizes the pitch of the microphone sound you input during performance. [1 ]/ [2 ] VOCAL TYPE Set this to obtain the most natural vocal harmony, depending on your voice. LOW: Setting for lower voices. This setting is also appropriate for growling and shouting. MID: Setting for mid-range voices. HIGH: Setting for higher voices. This setting is also appropriate for singing close to the microphone. FULL: Setting for vocalists having a wide range, from low to high. [3 ]/ [4 ] BACKGROUND NOISE CUT THRU, 200Hz, 300Hz, 400Hz, 500Hz: This allows you to filter out low noises that would interfere with the Vocal Harmony effect. A setting of “THRU” turns the noise filter off. [5 ]/ [6 ] SPEED 1 (SLOW) – 4 (NORMAL) – 15 (FAST): Adjusts the response of the Vocal Harmony effect, or how quickly harmonies are generated in response to your voice. NOTE When the Vocal Harmony’s Pitch Detect Speed of one or both parts of Lead and Harm. are set to “as Mic Setting” in the Detail tab (page 110), this parameter is effective. In other settings, the setting of the Vocal Harmony’s Pitch Detect Speed is effective. 102 Tyros5 Reference Manual TALK Page The settings here are for your speech or announcements (NOT your singing performance), and are active when the TALK (page 100) is set to ON. All indications and parameters (with the exception of TALK MIXING below) are the same as in the VOCAL page. However, the settings are independent from those in the VOCAL page. [1 ] VOLUME Determines the output volume of the microphone sound. [2 ] PAN Determines the stereo pan position of the microphone sound. [3 ] REVERB DEPTH Determines the depth of the reverb effects applied to the microphone sound. [4 ] CHORUS DEPTH Determines the depth of the chorus effects applied to the microphone sound. [5 ]/ [6 ] REDUCTION LEVEL Determines the amount of reduction to be applied to the overall sound (excepting the microphone input)—allowing you to effectively adjust the balance between your voice and the overall instrument sound. Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing – TALK MIXING (selected by [E] button) 8 Tyros5 Reference Manual 103 Setting and Editing Vocal Harmony Types Setting up the Vocal Harmony Control Parameters You can set which part controls the Vocal Harmony regardless of the current Vocal Harmony Type. 1 2 Press the [VH TYPE SELECT] button to call up the Vocal Harmony Type Selection display. NOTE Check that the microphone is properly connected (Owner’s Manual, chapter 8) and the settings (Reference Manual, page 101) are adjusted correctly before setting the Vocal Harmony Control parameters here. Press the [8 ] (SETUP) button to call up the Setup display, then set the value by using the [2 ]–[5 ] and [7 ] buttons. For information on each parameter, see page 105. 3 After you finish setting the value, press the [EXIT] button to close the Setup display. NEXT PAGE 104 Tyros5 Reference Manual Setup Parameters VOCODER CONTROL The Vocal Harmony effect in the Vocoder and Vocoder-Mono modes is controlled by the notes you play on the keyboard and/or Song data. [2 ] SONG CHANNEL MUTE/ PLAY When set to “MUTE,” the channel selected below (to control Harmony) is muted (turned off) during Song playback. This enables you to sing a song with harmony, even without backing or accompaniment. [3 ] SONG CHANNEL OFF/1–16 When set to OFF, Song playback does not affect the Vocal Harmony. When set to one of the values 1–16, note data (played from a Song on this instrument or external MIDI sequencer) contained on the corresponding channel is used to control the harmony. [4 ] /[5 ] KEYBOARD OFF: Keyboard performance does not affect the Vocal Harmony. UPPER: Notes played to the right of the Split Point control the harmony. LOWER: Notes played to the left of the Split Point control the harmony. NOTE The separate point of the Keyboard settings (OFF/UPPER/LOWER) is Split Point (L). NOTE When the settings of both keyboard performance and Song data are applied, those settings are merged to control the harmony. [7 ] CHORD In Chordal mode, the following parameters determine which data in a Song is used for chord detection. OFF: Chords are not detected from the Song data. XF: Chords of XF format are used for the Vocal Harmony. 1–16: Chords are detected from note data in the specified Song channel. NOTE The Vocal Harmony may not work properly regardless of the setting here depending on the Song data. This occurs when the selected Song contains no chord data or has insufficient note data for chord detection. Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing – [2 ]– [5 ] 8 Tyros5 Reference Manual 105 Editing the Vocal Harmony Types This section explains briefly how to create your own Vocal Harmony types, and lists the detailed parameters for editing. A sum total of sixty types can be created and saved. 1 Press the [VH TYPE SELECT] button to call up the Vocal Harmony Type Selection display. 2 Select a Vocal Harmony type to be edited by using the [A]–[J] buttons. To call up the other display pages for further selections, press one of the [1 ]–[5 ] buttons. 4 2 5 2 3 4 3 Press the [8 ] (EDIT) button to call up the Vocal Harmony Edit display. 4 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the desired tab, then edit the Vocal Harmony by using [A]–[G] buttons and [1 ]– [8 ] buttons. There are three tabs in the Vocal Harmony Edit display; refer to pages 107–110 for editing each tab. NOTICE The settings here will be lost if you change to another Vocal Harmony type or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation. • OVERVIEW...........Edits basic parameters for Vocal Harmony type, includ- ing Mode, Chordal Type and Vocal Effect, etc. • PART ......................Adjusts volume and panning, etc. for each of the harmony notes (Harm.1, 2, 3 and Lead). • DETAIL .................Detailed editing for Vocal Harmony type. 5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Vocal Harmony type. For details on the Save operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual, Basic Operations. 106 Tyros5 Reference Manual NOTE The edited Vocal Harmony Type can be saved only to internal USER drive as a file. If you want to save this to USB flash memory, save the User Effect file on the display called up via [FUNCTION]  [H] (UTILITY)  SYSTEM RESET  [H] (USER EFFECT).  Editing the Overview Tab Parameters 1 2 3 1 Set the value by using the [A]–[C] buttons, [1 ] and [3 ]–[8 ] buttons. For information on each parameter, see page 108. 2 Press the [F] (HARMONY ASSIGN) button to set how the Vocal Harmony is applied to your singing voice. For information on each parameter, see page 108. 3 Press the [G] (VOCAL EFFECT EDIT) button to edit the Vocal Effect. Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing – 1 On the display called up via this operation, use the [3 ]–[5 ] buttons to select the parameter then use the [6 ]–[7 ] buttons to set the value. If necessary, you can change the Effect Type from the one selected in Step 1 also on this display via the [1 ]/[2 ] buttons. For information on each parameter, refer to the Data List (Vocal Harmony Parameter List) on the website. 8 NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 107 Overview Tab Parameters [A] MODE Determines the mode of the Vocal Harmony effect: Chordal, Vocoder or VocoderMono. Chordal is for conventional vocal harmonies, while Vocoder and VocoderMono are for Vocoder effects. (Vocoder-Mono is for single-note melodies.) When Vocoder or Vocoder-Mono is selected, the Chordal Type parameter below is not available. [B]/[C] CHORDAL TYPE Determines the particular notes and voicings used for generating the vocal harmonies. The harmony and lead notes are also shown as notation in the display. For a list of the Chordal Types, refer to the Data List (Vocal Harmony Parameter List) on the website. [1 ] BALANCE Lets you set the balance between the lead vocal (your own voice) and Vocal Harmony. Raising this value increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal. When this is set to L<H63 (L: Lead Vocal, H: Vocal Harmony), only the Vocal Harmony is output; when it is set to L63>H, only the lead vocal is output. [3 ]– [6 ] VOCAL EFFECT Determines the Vocal Effect type and the amount of the effect applied to the lead and harmony vocal sounds. [3 ] –[4 ] TYPE Determines the specific Vocal Effect type applied to the lead and harmony vocal sounds. A wide range of reverb, delay, modulation, distortion and other special effects are available. For a list of the effect types, refer to the Data List (Vocal Harmony Parameter List) on the website. [5 ] LEAD Determines the amount of Vocal Effect that is applied to the lead vocal sound. [6 ] HARM. (Harmony) Determines the amount of Vocal Effect that is applied to the harmony vocal sound. [7 ] REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the overall Vocal Harmony sound, both lead and harmony. [8 ] CHORUS Determines the amount of chorus effect applied to the overall Vocal Harmony sound, both lead and harmony. HARMONY ASSIGN For detailed information on each parameter, refer to the Data List (Vocal Harmony Parameter List) on the website. [1 ]/ [2 ] TRANS. (TRANSPOSE) MODE Determines the amount by which the harmony parts are transposed. A setting of “0” results in no transposition, while the “Auto” setting results in automatic transposition. When the mode is set to Vocoder or Vocoder-Mono, this parameter is available. Settings: 0, Auto, -3 – +3 [3 ]/ [4 ] SESSION TABLE Determines how the harmonies will be voiced, or what type of chord will be used in creating the harmonies, according to different musical styles. This parameter is available only when the mode is set to Chordal and the type is set to something other than ScaleDiatonic or Parallel. Settings: Normal, Simple, R&R, UrbanA, UrbanB, Blues7, UrbanC [5 ]/ [6 ] KEY ROOT Determines the root key for the transposition. Use this in combination with Key Type below to enable modal scale harmony transposition. When the Chordal Type parameter is set to ScaleDiatonic, this parameter is available. Settings: C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B [7 ]/ [8 ] KEY TYPE Determines the scale type for the transposition. Use this in combination with Key Root above to enable modal scale harmony transposition. When the Chordal Type parameter is set to ScaleDiatonic, this parameter is available. Settings: Maj, Min (Natural), Min (Harmonic) 108 Tyros5 Reference Manual  Editing the Part Tab Parameters The parameters are arranged in a matrix. For information on each parameter, see below.  TRANSPOSE (selected by [A] button) Determines the pitch transposition for each part. The range for all parts is the same; however, the lead vocal sound can only be adjusted in octaves. When the Chordal Type is set to ScaleDiatonic, this parameter changes to Degree. When Pitch Correct is set to Off, the Lead part is not available. When the Vocoder or Vocoder-Mono mode is selected, the Harmony parts are not available. TRANSPOSE Settings Lead: -3 octaves – +3 octaves Harmony 1, 2, 3: -36 semitones – +36 semitones DEGREE Settings Lead: -3 octaves – +3 octaves Harmony 1, 2, 3: -3 octaves (-22 scale degrees) – Unison – +3 octaves (+22 scale degrees) Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing – Use the [A]–[E] buttons to select the desired parameter, then edit each of the Vocal Parts including the Harmony notes (Harm.1, 2, 3) and Lead voice (your own voice) via the [3 ]–[8 ] buttons. 8  DETUNE (selected by [B] button) Determines the fine pitch setting for each part. Adjust this to produce a warm chorusing effect, or to achieve a natural, less-than-perfect vocal sound. When Pitch Correct is set to Off, the Lead part is not available. Settings: -50 cents – +50 cents  FORMANT (selected by [C] button) Determines the formant setting for each part. This parameter can be used to finely change the character of the vocal sound. The higher the value, the more “feminine” the harmony voice becomes. The lower the value, the more “masculine” the voice. When Pitch Correct is set to Off, the Lead part is not available. Settings: -62 – +62  PAN (selected by [D] button) Determines the pan position setting for each part. Setting each vocal part to a different pan position, with the lead vocal at center, for example, results in a naturally wide stereo sound. Settings: L63 (Left) – C (Center) – R63 (Right)  VOLUME (selected by [E] button) Determines the volume setting for each part. Use this to adjust the relative level balance among the vocal parts. Settings: 0–127 Tyros5 Reference Manual 109  PITCH CORRECT MODE (set by [7 ]–[8 ] buttons) Determines how Pitch Correct affects your voice. For information on each parameter, refer to the Data List (Vocal Harmony Parameter List) on the website. Settings: OFF, SOFT 1, SOFT 2, HARD  Editing the Detail Tab Parameters Use the [2 ]–[5 ] buttons to select the desired parameter, then set the value of the selected parameter by using the [6 ]/[7 ] buttons. For information on each parameter, refer to the Data List (Vocal Harmony Parameter List) on the website. 110 Tyros5 Reference Manual Editing the Synth Vocoder Types NOTE For information on “Editing the Vocal Harmony Types,” refer to page 106. 1 Press the [VH TYPE SELECT] button to call up the Vocal Harmony Type Selection display. 2 Use the TAB [][] buttons to select the Synth Vocoder tab. 2 5 3 6 4 5 Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing – This section explains how to create your own Synth Vocoder types, and lists the detailed parameters for editing. A sum total of sixty types (Synth Vocoder and Vocal Harmony types) can be created and saved. 8 3 Select a Synth Vocoder type to be edited by using the [A]–[J] buttons. 4 Press the [8 ] (EDIT) button to call up the Synth Vocoder Edit display. 5 Use the TAB [][] buttons to call up the desired tab, then edit the Synth Vocoder by using [A]–[E], [G] and [J] buttons and [1 ]–[8 ] buttons or sliders. There are two tabs in the Synth Vocoder Edit display; refer to pages 112–114 for editing each tab. NOTICE The settings here will be lost if you change to another Synth Vocoder type or you turn the power off without executing the save operation. • OVERVIEW........... Edits basic parameters for Synth Vocoder type, including Carrier, Vocoder Attack/Release and HPF (High Pass Filter), etc. • DETAIL .................. Detailed editing for Synth Vocoder type. 6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save your edited Synth Vocoder type. Tyros5 Reference Manual 111 Editing the Overview Tab Parameters 2 1 Use the [A]–[E] (or [J]) buttons to select the parameter to be adjusted, then set the value by using the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons or sliders. For information on each parameter, see page 113. 2 Press the [G] (VOCAL EFFECT EDIT) button to edit the Vocal Effect. Use the [1 ]–[5 ] buttons to select the desired effect type and parameter, then set the value of the selected parameter by using the [6 ]/[7 ] buttons. For information on each parameter, refer to the Data List on the website. NEXT PAGE 112 Tyros5 Reference Manual CARRIER (set by [A]/[B] buttons) Selects the musical instrument sound used as the source (Carrier) for the Synth Vocoder. (The Carrier serves as the basic sound over which the vocal characteristics are applied.) VOCODER parameters (selected by [C]/[D] buttons) ATTACK Determines the attack time of the Synth Vocoder sound. The higher the value, the slower the attack. Settings: 1ms – 200ms [2 ] RELEASE Determines the release time of the Synth Vocoder sound. The higher the value, the slower the decay. Settings: 10ms – 3000ms HPF (High Pass Filter) parameters (selected by [C]/[D] buttons) [3 ] FREQ. (Frequency) Determines the HPF cutoff frequency for the microphone input sound. Setting this to a low value results in a minimally processed input sound—in other words, close to the original. Setting this to higher values emphasizes the higher frequency consonant and sibilant sounds (making words easier to understand). Settings: Thru, 500Hz – 16kHz [4 ] LEVEL Determines the level of the microphone sound output from the HPF. Settings: 0 – 127 FORMANT parameters (selected by [C]/[D] buttons) [5 ] SHIFT Determines the amount (in BPF) by which the cutoff frequency value of the BPFs (for the Inst Input) is shifted. This parameter can be used to change the character of the Vocoder sound. Settings: -2, -1, +0, +1, +2 [6 ] OFFSET Adjusts the cutoff frequencies of all BPFs (for the Inst Input) finely. This parameter can be used to finely change the character of the Vocoder sound. Microphone – Adding Harmony Vocals and Synth Vocoder to Your Singing – [1 ] Settings: -63 – +0 – +63 8 CARRIER parameters (selected by [E]/[J] buttons) [1 ] VOLUME Determines the level of the Carrier for the Synth Vocoder sound. Settings: 0–127 [2 ] OCTAVE Determines the octave setting of the Carrier for the Synth Vocoder sound. Settings: -2 – +2 [3 ] NOISE Determines the noise level which is input to the Synth Vocoder. This can be used to emphasize sibilant and plosive sounds, and make the speech-like characteristics more pronounced. Settings: 0 – 127 EFFECT parameters (selected by [E]/[J] buttons) [4 ]/ [5 ] TYPE Determines the specific type of effect applied to the lead Synth Vocoder sound. A wide range of reverb, delay, modulation, distortion and other special effects are available. You can edit the vocal effect by pressing the [G] (VOCAL EFFECT EDIT) button (step 2 on page 112). For a list of the effect types, refer to the Data List on the website. [6 ] DEPTH Determines the amount of effect applied to the overall Synth Vocoder sound. [7 ] REVERB Determines the amount of reverb applied to the overall Synth Vocoder sound. [8 ] CHORUS Determines the amount of chorus effect applied to the overall Synth Vocoder sound. Tyros5 Reference Manual 113 Editing the Detail Tab Parameters Use the [B]–[E] buttons to select the BAND PASS FILTER 1–5 or 6–10, then set the value by using the [1 ]–[5 ] buttons or sliders. NOTE Feedback (howling) may result depending on the setup settings. Be careful especially when you increase values. BAND PASS FILTER 1–10 parameters Determines each output gain of the BPF 1 – 10 for the Inst Input (keyboard performance sound). The BPF 1 corresponds to the lowest Formant while the BPF 10 corresponds to the highest Formant. Settings: -18dB – +18dB 114 Tyros5 Reference Manual 9 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – Contents Regarding the Mixing Console, the Reference Manual covers detailed descriptions of each parameter while the Owner’s Manual covers the basic instructions including the Save operation. You can edit various parameters for the Parts called up via the [MIXING CONSOLE] button, then save your edits for future recall. Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters ................................................................ 115 Editing FILTER Parameters ........................................................................ 116 Editing TUNE Parameters............................................................................ 117 Editing EFFECT Parameters ....................................................................... 118 • Adjusting the Effect Depth for Each Part................................................. 118 • Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block ................................................. 118 • Editing and Saving Your Original Effect Type......................................... 120 Editing EQ Parameters ................................................................................. 122 • Editing and Saving Your Original Master EQ Type................................. 123 Editing Master Compressor Settings ........................................................... 123 Line Out Settings ........................................................................................... 124 Block Diagram ............................................................................................... 125 9 [C]/[H] VOICE Allows you to re-select the Voices for each part. NOTE • Note the following operation limitations. • For each Style part, you can select the Voices for recording (pages 34 and 35). • For each Style or Song channel, you cannot select Voices in the User drive. • For each Multi Pad, you cannot change the Voice. • When a GM Song is selected, only a Drum Kit Voice can be selected for channel 10 (in the SONG CH916 page). NOTE For a Style or Song channel, calling up a rhythm/percussion Voice (Drum Kit, etc.) will replace the channel settings with those for the new Voice. In such a case, the original settings may not be restored even if you re-select the original Voice. To restore the original sound, select the same Style or Song again without executing the Save operation. [D]/[I] PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected part (channel). [E]/[J] VOLUME Determines the volume of each part or channel, giving you fine control over the balance of all the parts. Tyros5 Reference Manual 115 Editing FILTER Parameters 116 [D]/[I] HARMONIC CONTENT Allows you to adjust the Resonance (page 14) for each part. [E]/[J] BRIGHTNESS Determines the brightness of the sound for each part by adjusting the Cutoff Frequency (page 14). Tyros5 Reference Manual Editing TUNE Parameters PORTAMENTO TIME Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. Higher values result in a longer pitch change time. Setting this to “0” results in no effect. This parameter is available only when the selected keyboard part is set to Mono. [C]/[H] PITCH BEND RANGE Determines the range of the PITCH BEND wheel for each keyboard part. The range is from “0” to “12” with each step corresponding to one semitone. [D]/[I] OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down for each keyboard part. The value set here is added to the setting made via the OCTAVE []/[+] buttons. [E]/[J] TUNING Determines the pitch of each keyboard part in cents. NOTE In musical terms a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone. (100 cents equal one semitone.) [1 ]– [3 ] TRANSPOSE Allows you to set transposition for overall sound of the instrument (MASTER), Song playback (SONG), or keyboard pitch (KBD), respectively. Please note that the “KBD” setting also transposes the pitch of Style playback and the Multi Pads (since these are also affected by keyboard play in the left-hand section). Tyros5 Reference Manual Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – [A]/[B]/ [F]/[G] 9 117 Editing EFFECT Parameters This instrument features eleven Effect Blocks, giving you powerful tools to richly enhance the sounds of the instrument or completely transform them. The Effects are divided into the following groups:  Reverb, Chorus The Effects of these Blocks are applied to the overall sound or all Parts. In each of these Effect Blocks, you can select only one Effect Type at a time and adjust the Send Level (Depth) for each Part as well as the Return Level for all Parts.  DSP1 When the Connection is set to “System” on the EFFECT PARAMETER EDIT display (page 120), the Effects of this Block are applied only to the Style and Song sounds. In this status, you can select only one Effect Type at a time and adjust the Send Level (Depth) for each Part as well as Return Level for all Parts. When the Connection is set to “Insertion” on the EFFECT PARAMETER EDIT display, the Effect of this Block is applied to a specific channel of the Style and Song.  DSP2-9 The Effects of these Blocks are applied to a specific Part or Channel, with the exception of the Multi Pads and microphone input. Different Effect Types can be selected for each of the available Parts or Channels. Adjusting the Effect Depth for Each Part Use the [B]–[E] or [G]–[J] buttons to select the desired Effect Block, then use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to adjust the Effect Depth for each Part. Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block This section covers how to change the Effect Type of each Effect Block. The settings here can be saved to a Registration Memory, Song or Style. 1 Call up the desired page from PANEL, SONG or STYLE via the [MIXING CONSOLE] button. NEXT PAGE 118 Tyros5 Reference Manual 2 In the EFFECT page, press the [F] (TYPE) button to call up the Effect Type Selection display. 3 6 4 Press the [A] button. 4 Use the [1 ]/[2 ] buttons to select the Effect Block. 5 7 Effect Block Effect-applicable parts Effect characteristics REVERB All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club. CHORUS All parts Produces a rich, “fat” sound as if several parts are being played simultaneously. In addition, other type effects (such as reverb, delay, etc.) can also be selected in this effect block. DSP1 STYLE PART, SONG CHANNEL 1–16 This effect is applied only to Style/Song parts. DSP2, DSP3, DSP4, DSP5, DSP6 RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, RIGHT 3, LEFT, SONG CHANNEL 1–16 Any unused DSP blocks are automatically assigned to the appropriate parts (channels) as needed. Only one DSP block can be assigned to each keyboard or Song part. DSP7 Microphone sound, SONG CHANNEL 1–16 This effect is applied to the MIC input (in addition to the Vocal Harmony effect)/Song parts. DSP8, DSP9 STYLE PART These effects are applied only to Style parts. Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 3 5 9 Use the [3 ]/[4 ] buttons to select the Part to which you want to apply the effect. Note that a Part cannot be selected if “REVERB,” “CHORUS,” or “DSP1” is selected. This is because only one of the Effect Types can be selected to be commonly applied to all available Parts. 6 Press the [B] button. 7 Use the [1 ]/[2 ] buttons to select the Category then use the [3 ]–[5 ] buttons to select the Effect Type. Note that the Reverb Block is not divided into any Categories. If you want to edit detailed Parameters of the selected Effect Type, press the [H] (DETAIL) button. For details, refer to the next section. 8 Save the Effect Settings to a Registration Memory, Song or Style. For instructions, refer to the Owner’s Manual. Tyros5 Reference Manual 119 Editing and Saving Your Original Effect Type You can edit detailed parameters of the selected Effect Type. The parameter settings can be saved as your original Effect Type as well as to a Registration Memory, Style or Song as described in the previous section. This section covers how to save the settings as an original Effect Type. 1 Once you’ve selected an Effect Block and Effect Type above, press the [H] (DETAIL) button to call up the display for editing the effect parameters. 2 Use the [4 ]/[5 ] buttons to select a parameter then use the [6 ]/[7 ] buttons to edit the value. When Reverb, Chorus, or DSP1 is selected as the Effect Block, you can adjust the Return Level via the [8 ] button. If you want to change the Effect Block and Type, use the [1 ]–[3 ] buttons. 3 4 2 3 If DSP 2–9 is selected as the Effect Block, edit the Variation parameter if desired. Press the [E] button to move the cursor to the Variation parameter, then edit the value via the [6 ]/[7 ] buttons. This parameter is effective only when the [VARIATION] button lamp lights on the panel. To move the cursor to the normal parameters, press the [B] button. NEXT PAGE 120 Tyros5 Reference Manual 4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the User Memory menu. 6 5 Use the [3 ]–[6 ] buttons to select the destination for saving the settings as a User Effect. 6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button again to execute the Save operation. In the Naming window called up via this operation, assign the name to the User Effect Type then press the [8 ] (OK) button to save the User Effect Type. If you want to call up the User Effect Type saved here, select the corresponding Effect Block and “USER” Category in the Effect Type Selection display. Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 5 9 Tyros5 Reference Manual 121 Editing EQ Parameters Equalizer (also called “EQ”) is a sound processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands that can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound from speakers to match the special character of the room. For example, you can cut some of the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too “boomy,” or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes. As shown below, this instrument possesses a high grade five-band Master EQ which is applied to the entire sound. You can select one of five preset EQ types and create two User Master EQ types by editing the related parameters. In addition to the Master EQ, Part EQ is available, letting you boost/cut the high band or low band for each Part. Q (also called “Bandwidth” or “Shape”) GAIN 0 FREQ (Frequency) 5 bands  EQ1 (Low) EQ2 (Low Mid) EQ3 (Mid) EQ4 (High Mid) EQ5 (High) The parameters of this diagram correspond to those edited in Steps 3–4 on the next page. MASTER EQ [B]/[C] TYPE Selects the desired Master EQ type. This affects the overall sound of the instrument. [F] EDIT For editing the Master EQ. See page 123. [D]/[I] EQ HIGH Boosts or attenuates the high EQ band for each part. [E]/[J] EQ LOW Boosts or attenuates the low EQ band for each part. PART EQ 122 Tyros5 Reference Manual Editing and Saving Your Original Master EQ Type 1 Press the [F] (EDIT) button in the EQ Page. The MASTER EQ EDIT display is called up. 2 5 2 3 Use the [B]/[C] buttons to select a preset EQ type. The set parameters of the selected EQ type are automatically shown at the bottom of the display. 3 Use the [3 ]–[7 ] buttons to boost or cut each of the five bands. Use the [8 ] buttons to boost or cut all the five bands at the same time. 4 If desired, adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the band selected in step 3. To adjust the bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”), use the [1 ] buttons. The higher the value of Q, the narrower the band width. To adjust the FREQ (center frequency), use the [2 ] buttons. The available FREQ range is different for each band. 5 Press the [H] or [I] (STORE 1 or 2) button to execute the Store operation. In the Naming display called up via this operation, assign the name then press the [8 ] (OK) button to store your settings as a User Master EQ Type, which can be called up via the [B]/[C] buttons. Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 4 9 Editing Master Compressor Settings For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual. Tyros5 Reference Manual 123 Line Out Settings PANEL Page DRUM & PERCUSSION Page Press [A] button [A] DRUM&PERC./ PANEL Switches the displayed menu: PANEL parts or DRUM & PERCUSSION instruments. [F] SUB3–4/AUX OUT Switches the displayed menu: SUB3–4 or AUX OUT. This also actually switches the role of the LINE OUT SUB [3]–[4] jacks or AUX OUT jacks accordingly. [1 ]– [3 ] PART (PANEL Page) Selects the desired part/drum instrument. [1 ]/ [2 ] INSTRUMENTS (DRUM & PERCUSSION Page) [3 ] DEPENDS ON PART (DRUM & PERCUSSION Page) When this is checked, the selected drum instrument will be output via the jacks set from the PANEL page at left. [4 ] MAIN When this is checked, the selected part/drum instruments will be output from LINE OUT MAIN jacks, PHONES jacks, LOOP SEND jack, and optional speaker. [5 ] SUB1 When one of these columns (jacks) is checked, the selected part/drum instruments will be output from only the selected SUB jack(s). NOTE 124 [6 ] SUB2 [7 ] SUB3 [8 ] SUB4 Tyros5 Reference Manual Only the DSP 2–9 and Vocal Harmony effects can be applied to the sound output from the SUB jacks. Other effects (Reverb, Chorus and DSP 1) will not be applied. (If the “Connection” parameter of DSP 1 is set to “Insertion,” DSP 1 will also be applied.) Block Diagram Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 9 125 Tyros5 Reference Manual 10 Utility – Making Global Settings – Contents CONFIG 1 ...................................................................................................... 126 CONFIG 2 ...................................................................................................... 128 MEDIA............................................................................................................ 129 OWNER .......................................................................................................... 130 SYSTEM RESET........................................................................................... 131 • Factory Reset—Restoring the Factory Programmed Settings.................. 131 • Custom Reset—Backup/Restore .............................................................. 132 CONFIG 1 Select the desired parameter: 1 Fade In/Out 2 Metronome 3 Parameter Lock 4 Tap 5 Auto Power Off 1 Fade In/Out These parameters determine how Style or Song playback is faded in/out when using the [FADE IN/OUT] button. [3 ] FADE IN TIME Determines the time it takes for the Style/Song volume to fade in, or go from minimum to maximum (range of 0–20.0 seconds). [4 ] FADE OUT TIME Determines the time it takes for the Style/Song volume to fade out, or go from maximum to minimum (range of 0–20.0 seconds). [5 ] FADE OUT HOLD TIME Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out (range of 0–5.0 seconds). 2 Metronome 126 [2 ] VOLUME Determines the volume of the metronome sound. [3 ]– [5 ] SOUND Determines whether a bell accent is sounded or not at the first beat of each measure. [6 ]/ [7 ] TIME SIGNATURE Determines the time signature of the metronome sound. Tyros5 Reference Manual 3 Parameter Lock This lets you lock or maintain the settings of specific parameters (such as Effect and Split Point), even when the panel setups are changed by Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, etc. To set this function, use the [1 ]– [7 ] (SELECT) buttons to select the desired parameter then use the [8 ]/[8 ] (MARK ON/OFF) buttons to enter or remove the checkmarks. Repeat this step as desired. Items having checkmarks will be locked. 4 Tap This allows you to set the percussion sound and the velocity which sounds when the [TAP TEMPO] button is tapped. [2 ]– [4 ] PERCUSSION Selects the percussion sound. [5 ]/ [6 ] VELOCITY Sets the velocity. 5 Auto Power Off For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual. Utility – Making Global Settings – 10 Tyros5 Reference Manual 127 CONFIG 2 1 Line Out (MAIN) / Screen Content [3 ]/ [4 ] LINE OUT (MAIN) Determines whether or not the sound is output via LINE OUT (MAIN). HEADPHONE SW: LINE OUT (MAIN) sounds normally, but is cut off when headphones are inserted to the PHONES jack. ON: Sound is output via LINE OUT (MAIN), even if headphones are connected. OFF: LINE OUT (MAIN) sound is off. [5 ]/ [6 ] SCREEN CONTENT Selects display contents for the external monitor. For details, refer to the Owner's Manual. 2 Display-related settings / Voice Category Button Options [1 ] STYLE TEMPO Selects whether or not the default tempo of each preset Style is displayed above the preset Style name in the Style Selection display. [2 ] VOICE NUMBER Determines whether or not the Voice bank and number are shown in the Voice Selection display. This is useful when you want to check which bank select MSB/LSB values and program change number you need to specify when selecting the Voice from an external MIDI device. NOTE The numbers displayed here start from “1.” Accordingly the actual MIDI program change numbers are one lower, since that number system starts from “0.” NOTE For the GS Voices, the Display Voice Number is not available (the program change numbers are not shown). [3 ] TIME STAMP Determines whether or not the Updated Date and Updated Time are shown on the File Selection display. [5 ]/ [6 ] VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS Determines how the Voice Selection display is opened when one of the VOICE buttons is pressed. OPEN & SELECT: Opens the Voice Selection display with the previously selected Voice in the Voice category automatically selected (when one of the VOICE buttons is pressed). OPEN ONLY: Opens the Voice Selection display with the currently selected Voice (when one of the VOICE buttons is pressed). [7 ]/ [8 ] POPUP DISPLAY TIME Determines the time in which the popup windows close. (Popup windows are displayed when you press buttons such as TEMPO, TRANSPOSE or UPPER OCTAVE, etc.) 3 S.Art2 Auto Articulation Determines whether articulation is added to S.Art2 Voices automatically. 128 Tyros5 Reference Manual NOTE This affects not only S.Art2 Voices of your keyboard performance, but also the S.Art2 Voices in Songs or Styles. MEDIA You can set or execute important media-related operations for the Tyros5. The word “media” refers to both the USB storage device and internal hard disk drive. [A]/[B] DEVICE LIST Selects the desired media for which you want to check the remaining memory (see “PROPERTY” below) or format the media (see the Owner’s Manual). [F] PROPERTY Opens the Property display of the media selected by [A]/[B] buttons. You can check the amount of remaining memory on the media. The displayed remaining memory value is an approximate value. [H] FORMAT Formats the media selected by [A]/[B] buttons. Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 11. [1 ]/ [2 ] HARD DISK SLEEP TIME The hard disk unit will go into a “sleep” mode after a specified time of inactivity, both to maximize the lifetime of the hard disk and to minimize unnecessary mechanical noise. This parameter determines the sleep time. NOTE When using the Audio Recorder/Player function or the Audio Link Multi Pad, make sure to set this to “NEVER.” [3 ]/ [4 ] SONG AUTO OPEN Turns the Song Auto Open function on or off. When this is set to “ON” and the media selected in the Device List above is inserted, the Tyros5 automatically calls up the first Song in the media. Utility – Making Global Settings – NOTE 10 Tyros5 Reference Manual 129 OWNER [C] BACKUP Lets you backup all data on the instrument to a USB flash memory. For instructions, refer to the Basic Operation section in the Owner’s Manual. [D] RESTORE For loading backup files from the USB flash memory. For instructions, refer to the Basic Operation section in the Owner’s Manual. [E] EXPORT INSTRUMENT INFO For exporting identification information of the instrument, which is necessary for purchasing Expansion Contents, to the root directory of the USB flash memory device. The exported file is named “TYROS5_InstrumentInfo.n27.” [H] OWNER NAME Lets you enter your name as the owner. The Owner name is indicated on the opening display when you turn the power on. For instructions, refer to the Basic Operation section in the Owner’s Manual. [I] MAIN PICTURE Lets you select a background picture for the Main display. You can select a picture from among various pictures provided on the Preset Page. After selecting, press the [EXIT] button to close the Selection display. If you want to use an original picture, prepare the desired file (a bitmap “.BMP” file no greater than 320 x 240 pixels) in the USB flash memory, copy it from the USB flash memory to the USER page, then select it from the USER page. Due to access speed limitations, it is not recommended to select the desired file from the USB flash memory. NOTE The explanation about picture compatibility above applies also to the background of the Song Lyric display (page 53). 130 [1 ]/ [2 ] PANEL LOCK For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual. [4 ]/ [5 ] LANGUAGE Determines the language used for the display messages. Once you change this setting, all messages will be shown in the selected language. [7 ]/ [8 ] VERSION Displays the program version and the hardware ID of this instrument. Tyros5 Reference Manual SYSTEM RESET In this display, you can execute one of two reset methods: Factory Reset and Custom Reset. Factory Reset lets you call up the default initial settings for each item while Custom Reset lets you call up your original settings with a single touch. Custom Reset (Backup/Restore; see page 132) Factory Reset (see below) Factory Reset—Restoring the Factory Programmed Settings This function lets you restore the status of the instrument to the original factory settings. Use the [1 ]–[3 ] buttons to select the desired item, then press the [4 ] buttons to enter or remove the checkmark. When an item is checkmarked, the corresponding parameters will be reset as described below: SYSTEM SETUP Resets the System Setup parameters to the original factory settings. Refer to the Data List (Parameter Chart) for details about which parameters belong to System Setup. MIDI SETUP Resets the MIDI settings including the MIDI Setups on the USER tab display to the original factory status. USER EFFECT Resets the current Effect settings and the following data: • User Effect Types............................................................................................... page 120 • User Master EQ Types....................................................................................... page 123 • User Compressor Types .................................................................................... page 123 • User Vocal Harmony Types .............................................................................. page 106 • User Microphone Settings ................................................................................. page 101 MUSIC FINDER Resets the Music Finder data (all Records) to the original factory settings. FILES & FOLDERS Deletes all files and folders including the Expansion folder stored in the HD1 tab display. REGIST Turns off all the Registration Memory [1]–[8] lamps, indicating that no Registration Memory Bank is selected although all the Registration Memory Bank files are maintained. In this status, you can create Registration Memory setups from the current panel settings. Utility – Making Global Settings – 1 10 NOTE The same operation can be done by turning the power on while holding the highest key. In this case, you can create Registration Memory setups from the default panel settings. 2 Press the [D] (FACTORY RESET EXECUTE) button to execute the Factory Reset operation for all checkmarked items. Tyros5 Reference Manual 131 Custom Reset—Backup/Restore For the items below, you can save your original settings to USER or USB drive as a single file for future recall. 1 Make all desired settings on the instrument. 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [H] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] SYSTEM RESET 3 Press one of the [F]–[I] buttons to call up the relevant display for saving your data. [F] SYSTEM SETUP FILES Parameters set on the various displays such as the [FUNCTION]  [H] UTILITY and microphone setting display are handled as a single System Setup file. Refer to the Data List (Parameter Chart) for details on which parameters belong to System Setup. [G] MIDI SETUP FILES The MIDI settings including the MIDI Setups on the USER tab display are handled as a single file. [H] USER EFFECT FILES The following data can be managed as a single file. • User Effect Types........................................................................................page 120 • User Master EQ Types................................................................................page 123 • User Compressor Types ............................................................................. page 123 • User Vocal Harmony Types ....................................................................... page 106 • User Microphone Settings ..........................................................................page 101 [I] MUSIC FINDER FILES All the preset and created Records of the Music Finder are handled as a single file. 4 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to select one of the tabs (USER or USB) to which your settings will be saved. 5 Press the [6 ] (SAVE) button to save your file. 6 To recall your file, press the desired [F]–[I] buttons in the SYSTEM RESET display, then select the desired file. When the file is selected, a message is displayed according to the content of the file. Press the desired button. 132 Tyros5 Reference Manual Connections 11 – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – Contents Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings Assigning a Specific Function to Each Pedal The functions of the foot pedals connected to the ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL 1/2/3 jacks can be changed individually from the default settings (sustain, etc.)—for example, letting you use the footswitch to start/stop Style playback, or use the foot controller to produce pitch bends. 1 NOTE For information on how to connect a foot pedal or what kinds of pedals can be connected, refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 11. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [D] CONTROLLER  TAB [E][F] FOOT PEDAL 2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select one of the three foot pedals to which the function is to be assigned. On the display, the numbers 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the FOOT PEDAL jacks 1, 2 and 3 respectively. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings............................................................. 133 • Assigning a Specific Function to Each Pedal........................................... 133 MIDI Settings ................................................................................................. 136 • MIDI System Settings .............................................................................. 138 • MIDI Transmit Settings............................................................................ 139 • MIDI Receive Settings ............................................................................. 140 • Bass Note Settings for Style Playback via MIDI Receive ....................... 141 • Chord Type Settings for Style Playback via MIDI Receive..................... 141 MFC10 Settings.............................................................................................. 142 Connecting to a Network (Bundled USB Wireless LAN Adaptor) ........... 144 • Displaying Available Networks and Making Connections ...................... 144 • Entering the SSID, Security and Password Settings in Manual Setup. .... 145 • Starting WPS from the Tyros5 ................................................................. 146 • Manually Setting the Access Point Mode ................................................ 146 • Setting the Time Zone .............................................................................. 147 11 2 3 5 4 NEXT PAGE Tyros5 Reference Manual 133 3 Use the [C]/[D] buttons to select the function to be assigned to the pedal specified in step 2. For information on available functions, see pages 134–135. 4 Use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to set the details of the selected functions (the part for which the function is applied, etc.). The available parameters differ depending on the function selected in step 3. 5 NOTE You can also assign other functions to the pedal—Punch in/out of Song (page 67) and Registration Sequence (page 97). If you assign multiple functions to the pedal, the priority is: Punch in/out of Song  Registration Sequence  Functions assigned here. If necessary, set the polarity of the pedal by using the [I] button. Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the particular pedal you’ve connected to the instrument. For example, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on, while pressing a different make/brand of pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this setting to reverse the operation. Assignable Pedal Functions For functions indicated with an asterisk (*), use only a foot controller; proper operation cannot be done with a footswitch. ARTICULATION 1/2 When you use a Super Articulation Voice that has an effect assigned to the pedal/footswitch, you can enable the effect by pressing the pedal/footswitch. You can turn this function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller to control the volume. You can turn this pedal function on or off for each part on this display. SUSTAIN Allows you to use a pedal to control the sustain. When you press and hold the pedal, all notes played on the keyboard have a longer sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. You can turn this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. SOSTENUTO Allows you to use a pedal to control the Sostenuto effect. If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. However, all subsequent notes will not sustain. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato. You can turn this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. NOTE This function will not affect any of the Organ Flutes and only some of the Super Articulation Voices, even if this has been assigned to the foot pedals. SOFT Allows you to use a pedal to control the Soft effect. Pressing this pedal reduces the volume and changes the timbre of the notes you play. This is effective only for certain appropriate Voices. You can turn this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. GLIDE When the pedal is pressed, the pitch changes, and then returns to normal pitch when the pedal is released. The following parameters can be set for this function on this display. UP/DOWN: Determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered). RANGE: Determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones. ON SPEED: Determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is pressed. OFF SPEED: Determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is released. LEFT, RIGHT 1, 2, 3: Turns this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part. PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The portamento time can also be adjusted form the Mixing Console display (page 117). You can turn this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. NOTE This function affects only certain Voices, especially synth lead and some bass Voices. It will not affect any of the Organ Flutes, Super Articulation 2 Voices and only some of the Super Articulation Voices, even if the function has been assigned to the Foot Pedals. PITCH BEND* Allows you to bend the pitch of notes up or down by using the pedal. The following parameters can be set for this function on this display. UP/DOWN: Determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered). RANGE: Determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones. LEFT, RIGHT 1, 2, 3: Turns this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part. NEXT PAGE 134 Tyros5 Reference Manual Applies vibrato and other effects to notes played on the keyboard. You can turn this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. MODULATION (ALT) This is a slight variation on MODULATION above, in which the effects (waveform) can be switched on/off by each press of the pedal/footswitch. The modulation effect is alternately turned on and off each time the pedal/footswitch is pressed. You can turn this function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. DSP VARIATION Same as the [DSP VARIATION] button on the panel. PEDAL CONTROL (WAH) Allows you to use a foot controller to control the Pedal Wah effect. HARMONY/ECHO Same as the [HARMONY/ECHO] button. VOCAL HARMONY Same as the [VOCAL HARMONY] button. VOCAL EFFECT Same as the [EFFECT] button. TALK Same as the [TALK] button. SCORE PAGE +/- While the Song is stopped, you can turn to the next/previous score page (one page at a time). LYRICS PAGE +/- While the Song is stopped, you can turn to the next/previous lyrics page (one page at a time). TEXT PAGE +/- You can turn to the next/previous text page (one page at a time). AUDIO PLAY/PAUSE Same as the AUDIO RECORDER/PLAYER [PLAY/PAUSE] button. SONG PLAY/PAUSE Same as the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE CONTROL [START/STOP] button. TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button. SYNCHRO START Same as the [SYNC START] button. SYNCHRO STOP Same as the [SYNC STOP] button. INTRO 1–3 Same as the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons. MAIN A–D Same as the MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] buttons. FILL DOWN Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the previous Main section (that of the button on the immediate left). FILL SELF Plays a fill-in. FILL BREAK Plays a break. FILL UP Plays a fill-in, followed by the next Main section (that of the button on the immediate right). ENDING1–3 Same as the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons. FADE IN/OUT Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button. FINGERD/FING ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 27). BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed during Style playback. If the fingering is set to “AI FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work. PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4 ]–[8 ] buttons. You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – MODULATION* 11 NOTE When you select the percussion instrument by pressing a key on the keyboard, the velocity with which you press the key determines the percussion volume. RIGHT 1 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button. RIGHT 2 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button. RIGHT 3 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 3] button. LEFT ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button. OTS +/- Calls up the next/previous One Touch Setting. Tyros5 Reference Manual 135 MIDI Settings In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. The Tyros5 gives you a set of ten pre-programmed templates that let you instantly and easily reconfigure the instrument to match your particular MIDI application or external device. Also, you can edit the pre-programmed templates and save up to ten of your original templates to USER memory. 1 NOTE You can save all your original templates as a single file to internal memory (User drive) or a USB flash memory: [FUNCTION]  [H] UTILITY  TAB [E][F] SYSTEM RESET  [G] MIDI SETUP FILES. See page 132. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION]  [G] MIDI 2 6 2 3 Select a pre-programmed template from the Preset page (page 137). If you have already created your original template and saved it to the User page, you can also select that template from the User page. 3 To edit the template, press the [8 ] (EDIT) button to call up the MIDI display. 4 Use the TAB [E][F] buttons to call up the relevant page, then set various parameters to edit the current MIDI template. • SYSTEM ...................MIDI System Settings (page 138) • TRANSMIT ..............MIDI Transmit Settings (page 139) • RECEIVE .................MIDI Receive Settings (page 140) • BASS .........................Bass Note Settings for Style Playback via MIDI Receive (page 141) • CHORD DETECT ....Chord Type Settings for Style Playback via MIDI Receive (page 141) • MFC10 ......................Settings for a connected MFC10 MIDI Foot Controller (page 142) 136 5 When you’ve finished editing, press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIDI template Selection display. 6 Select the User page by using the TAB [E][F] buttons, then press the [6 ] (SAVE) button to save the edited template. Tyros5 Reference Manual Pre-programmed MIDI Templates Transmits all parts including the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2, 3, LEFT), with the exception of the Song parts. KBD & STYLE Basically the same as “ALL PARTS” with the exception of how keyboard parts are managed. The right-hand parts are handled as “UPPER” instead of RIGHT 1–3 and the left-hand part is handled as “LOWER.” Master KBD1 In this setting, the Tyros5 functions as a “master” keyboard, for playing and controlling one or more connected tone generators or other devices (such as a computer/sequencer). Master KBD2 Basically the same as “Master KBD1” above, with the exception that After Touch messages are not transmitted. Clock Ext. A Playback or recording (Song, Style, Multi Pad, etc.) synchronizes with an external MIDI clock instead of the Tyros5’s internal clock. This template should be used when you wish to set the tempo on the MIDI device connected to the Tyros5. Playback or recording of the Tyros5 synchronizes with an external clock received via MIDI A. MIDI Accord 1 MIDI accordions allow you to transmit MIDI data and play connected tone generators from the keyboard and bass/chord buttons of the accordion. This template lets you play melodies from the keyboard and control Style playback on the Tyros5 with the left-hand buttons. MIDI Accord 2 Basically the same as “MIDI Accord1” above, with the exception that the chord/bass notes you play with your left hand on the MIDI Accordion are recognized also as MIDI note events. MIDI Pedal 1 MIDI pedal units allow you play connected tone generators with your feet (especially convenient for playing single note bass parts). This template lets you play/control the chord root in Style playback with a MIDI pedal unit (connected to MIDI B only). MIDI Pedal 2 This template lets you play the bass part for Style playback by using a MIDI pedal unit (connected to MIDI B only). MIDI OFF No MIDI signals are sent or received. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – All Parts 11 Tyros5 Reference Manual 137 MIDI System Settings The explanations here apply to the SYSTEM page in step 4 on page 136. Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the parameters (below), then set the ON/OFF status by using the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons.  1 Local Control Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the instrument controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal Voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the instrument’s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the instrument’s internal Voices, and use the instrument keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator.  2 Clock setting, etc. CLOCK Determines whether the tempo of the Songs, Styles, etc. are controlled by the instrument’s own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device. INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting when the instrument is being used alone or as a master keyboard to control external devices. If you are using the instrument with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want to synchronize it to that device, set this parameter to the appropriate setting: MIDI, USB 1, or USB 2. In this case, make sure that the external device is connected properly (e.g., to the instrument’s MIDI IN terminal), and that it is properly transmitting a MIDI clock signal. TRANSMIT CLOCK Turns MIDI clock (F8) transmission on or off. When set to OFF, no MIDI clock or Start/Stop data is transmitted even if a Song or Style is played back. NOTE • When CLOCK is set to a value other than INTERNAL, the tempo is indicated as “EXT.” on the Main display. This means that playback of this instrument is controlled only from an external MIDI device or computer. In this condition, Styles, Songs, Multi Pads or the Metronome cannot be played back even if you execute the start operation. • When the Wireless LAN Adaptor is connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, the “WIRELESS LAN” parameter appears. RECEIVE TRANSPOSE Determines whether or not the instrument’s transpose setting is applied to the note events received by the instrument via MIDI. START/STOP Determines whether incoming start and stop messages (FA, FC) affect Song or Style playback.  3 MESSAGE SW (Message Switch) SYS/EX. The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI System Exclusive messages on or off. The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI System Exclusive messages generated by external equipment on or off. CHORD SYS/EX. The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (Chord Detect, root and type) on or off. The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment on or off. 138 Tyros5 Reference Manual MIDI Transmit Settings The explanations here apply to the TRANSMIT page in step 4 on page 136. This determines which parts will be sent as MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent. 1 The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) flash briefly whenever any data is transmitted on the channel(s). NOTE 1 1 2 3 If “WLAN” is shown in the PORT1 line, this instrument can handle MIDI messages received via a Wireless LAN Adaptor connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. When “WLAN” is not shown although the Wireless LAN Adaptor is connected, turn the instrument off then on again. Use the [A]/[B] buttons or [1 ]/[2 ] buttons to select the part for changing transmit settings. UPPER Refers to a keyboard part played on the right side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices (RIGHT 1, 2, and 3). LOWER Refers to a keyboard part played on the left side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices. This is not affected by the on/off status of the [ACMP] button. 2 3 Use the [3 ] buttons to select the channel via which the selected part will be transmitted. Use the [4 ]–[8 ] button to determine the types of data to be sent. The following MIDI messages can be set on the TRANSMIT/RECEIVE display. NOTE (Note events) .........................................page 73 CC (Control Change).......................................page 73 PC (Program Change) .....................................page 73 NOTE If the same transmit channel is assigned to several different parts, the transmitted MIDI messages are merged to a single channel—resulting in unexpected sounds and possible glitches in the connected MIDI device. NOTE Protected Songs cannot be transmitted even if the proper Song channels 1–16 are set to be transmitted. PB (Pitch Bend)................................................page 73 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – The Parts listed on this display are the same as those shown in the MIXING CONSOLE display and CHANNEL ON/OFF display with the exception of the two parts below. 11 AT (After Touch)..............................................page 73 Tyros5 Reference Manual 139 MIDI Receive Settings The explanations here apply to the RECEIVE page in step 4 on page 136. This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channels the data will be received. 1 The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) flash briefly whenever any data is received on the channel(s). NOTE 1 1 2 3 If “WLAN” is shown in the PORT1 line, this instrument can handle MIDI messages received via a Wireless LAN Adaptor connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. When “WLAN” is not shown although the Wireless LAN Adaptor is connected, turn the instrument off then on again. Use the [A]/[B] buttons or [1 ]/[2 ] buttons to select the channel to be received. The instrument can receive MIDI messages over 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) by USB connection. 2 Use the [3 ] buttons to select the part via which the selected channel will be received. The Parts listed on this display are the same as those shown in the MXING CONSOLE display and CHANNEL ON/OFF display with the exception of the following parts. KEYBOARD The received note messages control the instrument’s keyboard performance. EXTRA PART 1–4 These are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument itself. The instrument can be used as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator by using these five parts in addition to the other parts (excepting the microphone sound). 3 Use the [4 ]–[8 ] button to determine the types of data to be received. MIDI transmission/reception via the USB terminal and MIDI terminals The relationship between the [MIDI] terminals and the [USB] terminal which can be used for transmitting/ receiving 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) of the MIDI messages is as follows:  MIDI reception MIDI A IN terminal  MIDI transmission USB connector MIDI B IN terminal Wireless LAN MIDI A OUT terminal USB connector MIDI B OUT terminal Wireless LAN Port handling USB1 Merge MIDI A 01–16 USB2 Merge MIDI B 01–16 MIDI A 01–16 NOTE The USB wireless LAN adaptor may not be included depending on your locale due to local regulations. 140 Tyros5 Reference Manual MIDI B 01–16 Bass Note Settings for Style Playback via MIDI Receive The explanations here apply to the BASS page in step 4 on page 136. These settings let you determine the bass note for Style playback, based on the note messages received via MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the bass note of the chord of Style playback. The bass note will be detected regardless of the [ACMP] or split point settings. When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the bass note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels. 1 2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired row of channels. 2 Use the [1 ]–[8 ] buttons to set specific channels to ON or OFF. You can also set all channels to OFF by pressing the [I] (ALL OFF) button. Chord Type Settings for Style Playback via MIDI Receive The explanations here apply to the CHORD DETECT page in step 4 on page 136. This page lets you select the MIDI channels over which the MIDI data from the external device will be used to detect the Chord Type for Style playback. The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the notes for detecting chords in Style playback. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The chord types will be detected regardless of the [ACMP] or split point settings. When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the chord type is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 1 11 The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the BASS display above. Tyros5 Reference Manual 141 MFC10 Settings The explanations here apply to the MFC10 Page in step 4 on page 136. By connecting an optional MFC10 MIDI Foot Controller to the Tyros5, you can conveniently control a wide range of operations and functions by using your feet—perfect for changing settings and controlling the sound while you perform live. Different functions can be assigned to each of the footswitches and up to five foot controllers (optional) can be connected to the MFC10, for additional sound-shaping possibilities. 1 Connect the MIDI IN terminal of the MFC10 to one of the MIDI OUT terminals of the Tyros5 by using a MIDI cable. MFC10 MIDI IN MIDI OUT If desired, connect additional foot controllers to the MFC10. 2 Set the MFC10 to the normal mode and turn the [FUNCTION] lamp of the MFC10 on. 3 Perform steps 1–4 on page 136 to call up the MFC10 Page. 4 Set the parameters on this display as desired. 4-1 4-5 4-6 5 4-2 4-3 4-4 On this display, two settings (below) can be made: • Each footswitch (F00–F29) on the MFC10 sends a note number to the Tyros5, and the Tyros5 determines how it responds to (which function is executed by) that note number. • Each foot controller on the MFC10 sends control change messages over a specific control change number to the Tyros5, and the Tyros5 determines how it responds to (which parameter is changed by) that control change number. 4-1 Use the [A]/[E] buttons to select “FOOTSWITCH” or “FOOT CONTROLLER.” 4-2 Use the [2 ]/[3 ] buttons to select a footswitch number (F00–F29) or a foot controller number (1– 5) to which the function is assigned. Please note that a note number is assigned to each footswitch and a control change number is assigned to each foot controller beforehand and the settings cannot be changed. NEXT PAGE 142 Tyros5 Reference Manual 4-3 Use the [4 ]–[6 ] buttons to specify the function assigned to the footswitch (actually the note number), or the function assigned to the foot controller (actually the control change number). About the functions which can be assigned to the footswitch or foot controller, refer to page 134. 4-4 (Only for the FOOT CONTROLLER Setting) Determine the part to which the foot-controller assigned function is applied by using the [7 ]/[8 ] buttons. 4-5 Use the [F]/[G] buttons to determine the MIDI port which is to be used when communicating with the MFC10. Here, the USB port (USB1, USB2) can be selected even though the MFC10 does not have a USB connector. This is because a computer can be used instead of the MFC10. (The computer can transmit the same type of data that the MFC10 transmits to the Tyros5. For details, see the bottom of this page.) 4-6 Use the [H] (CH SELECT) button to determine the MIDI channel which is to be used when communicating with the MFC10. 5 6 Press the [I] (SEND MFC10 SETUP) button to send the settings made here to the MFC10. Disconnect the MIDI cable from the Tyros5 and the MFC10, and connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the MFC10 to the MIDI IN terminal of the Tyros5 according to the setting above by using a MIDI cable. NOTE Actually the pair of the footswitch number and the note number, the pair of the foot controller number and the control change number, and the MIDI channel for communication set above are transmitted to the MFC10. MFC10 MIDI OUT MIDI IN Transmitting control change messages 7 Operate the MFC10 to confirm whether you can properly control the Tyros5 from the MFC10 as set in step 4. 8 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIDI Template Selection display and save the settings above to the USER tab. Using a computer or another MIDI instrument instead of the MFC10 Keep in mind that the following two settings on the MFC10 Page are for saving not to the MFC10 but to the Tyros5 as a MIDI template. • Note number/Tyros5 function assignment pairs • Control change number/Tyros5 parameter change assignment pairs Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – Transmitting note messages 11 If you are not using an MFC10, you can have note numbers and control change messages from any other appropriate MIDI device (such as a computer, sequencer or master keyboard) control the Tyros5. Make sure to set the appropriate channel in this display for control by the external device. Tyros5 Reference Manual 143 Connecting to a Network (Bundled USB Wireless LAN Adaptor) The bundled USB Wireless LAN Adaptor lets your Tyros5 connect to a network. This section covers the operations which may be needed to operate the instrument directly on the way of connecting to a network. For connecting with an iPhone/iPad, see both the iPhone/iPad Connection Manual and the following instructions. First, connect the bundled USB Wireless LAN Adaptor to the rear-side [USB TO DEVICE] terminal of Tyros5. NOTE Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Allianceare. NOTE If the USB wireless LAN Adaptor is not recognized by the instrument, [J] (WIRELESS LAN) button will not appear, even if you press the [FUNCTION] button. Displaying Available Networks and Making Connections 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the [J] (WIRELESS LAN) button to call up the available networks in the Wireless LAN display. 4 3 3 5 Confirm that the MODE parameter is set to “INFRASTRUCTURE MODE.” If necessary, use the [1 ]/[2 ] (MODE CHANGE) buttons to set this to “INFRASTRUCTURE MODE.” 4 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired network. 5 Use the [7 ]/[8 ] (CONNECT) buttons to connect to the selected network. If necessary, enter the appropriate password. 144 Tyros5 Reference Manual Entering the SSID, Security and Password Settings in Manual Setup. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the [J] (WIRELESS LAN) button to call up the available networks in the Wireless LAN display. 3 Confirm that the MODE parameter is set to “INFRASTRUCTURE MODE.” If necessary, use the [1 ]/[2 ] (MODE CHANGE) buttons to set this to “INFRASTRUCTURE MODE.” 4 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “Other.” 4 5 5 Use the [7 ]/[8 ] (CONNECT) buttons to call up the Manual Setup display. 6 Enter the SSID, Security and Password settings for the network. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 3 11 Use [B] to select SSID, [C] to select Security and [D] to select Password. 7 Use the [7 ]/[8 ] (CONNECT) buttons to connect to the network. Tyros5 Reference Manual 145 Starting WPS from the Tyros5 Press and hold the button on the bundled USB Wireless LAN Adaptor until a WPS-related message appears on the Tyros5 display. [WPS] button Manually Setting the Access Point Mode When an available access point cannot be found, you can connect the Tyros5 and the smart device directly. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button  [J] (WIRELESS LAN)  [1 ] or [2 ] (MODE CHANGE). 2 Press the [G] (YES) button. This calls up the network information on of the Tyros5. 3 NOTE To change to the Infrastructure Mode. follow Steps 1 and 2 again. If necessary, press the [I] (DETAIL) button and enter the SSID, Security and Password settings. Use the [B] (SSID) button, [C] (SECURITY) button and [D] (PASSWORD) button to enter each setting. 4 Press [7 ] or [8 ] (SAVE) button and follow the onscreen instructions. The Tyros5 is now available as an access point. 146 Tyros5 Reference Manual Setting the Time Zone Once the instrument has accessed the network via the USB Wireless LAN Adaptor, the current time is shown on the display. You can set the Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time for your local time. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button  [J] (WIRELESS LAN)  [I] (DETAIL). 2 Use the TAB [][] buttons to call up the “OTHERS” display. 3 Select your Time Zone and set the Daylight Saving Time. Use [B] to select the Time Zone, and [C] to set the Daylight Saving Time. 3 4 Press one of the [7 ] or [8 ] (SAVE) buttons and follow the onscreen instructions. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 4 11 Tyros5 Reference Manual 147 Appendix Expansion Pack Related Operations Installing an Expansion Pack lets you add a variety of optional contents such as Songs, Styles, Voices and so on to the “Expansion” folder in the HD1 drive. You can install the Expansion Pack in two different ways—using a USB flash memory or via wireless network. This section covers the operations which may be necessary to add new contents to the instrument. For overall general instructions, access the Tyros5 page at the Yamaha Music Soft website: http://www.yamahamusicsoft.com The following two instructions are not necessary when you install the Expansion pack via wireless network. Saving the Instrument Info File to the USB Flash Memory In order to get the Expansion Pack data for the Tyros5, you’ll need to retrieve the Instrument Info file from the Tyros5 as described below. 1 Connect the USB flash memory to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. 2 Call up the OWNER display. [FUNCTION]  [H] UTILITY  TAB[E][F] OWNER 3 Press the [E] (EXPORT INSTRUMENT INFO) button. 4 Follow the onscreen instructions. This saves the Instrument Info file to the root directory in the USB flash memory. Installing the Expansion Pack Data from the USB Flash Memory Follow these instructions to install Expansion Pack data from the USB flash memory. 1 Connect the USB flash memory in which the Pack data are saved to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Press the [I] (PACK INSTALLATION) button. 4 Use the [A]–[J] and [1 ]–[6 ] buttons to select the desired Pack file. 5 Press the [6 ] (INSTALL) button. 6 Follow the onscreen instructions. This installs the selected Pack data to the “Expansion” folder in the HD1. 148 Tyros5 Reference Manual Uninstalling the Expansion Pack data. You can uninstall the Expansion Pack data by Factory Reset FILES & FOLDERS (see page 131). Appendix Tyros5 Reference Manual 149 Index Symbols +Audio .................................................... 25 Numerics 3-BAND EQ (Microphone Setting)........ 102 A A.T. (After Touch) ................................... 73 A*A (Ensemble Voice) ............................ 21 A*D (Ensemble Voice)............................ 21 ACCENT TYPE ...................................... 40 Access Point Mode............................... 146 AEM Technology ...................................... 6 AFTER TOUCH .................................. 7, 14 AI FINGERED......................................... 27 AI FULL KEYBOARD ............................. 27 AMPLITUDE ..................................... 13–14 Any Key .................................................. 57 ARABIC 1/2 ............................................ 10 ASSIGN (Harmony/Echo)......................... 8 ASSIGN / HARMONY (Ensemble Voice) ............................... 20 Assignable Pedal Functions ................. 134 ATTACK ................................................. 14 ATTACK (Voice Set)............................... 14 ATTACK PITCH ADJUST TIME (Ensemble Voice) ............................... 24 ATTACK PITCH RANGE (Ensemble Voice) ............................... 24 Audio File.......................................... 80–81 Audio part ............................................... 31 AUTO...................................................... 86 AUTO mode............................................ 86 Auto Power Off (Utility) ......................... 127 B Backup/Restore .................................... 132 BAR .................................................. 61, 72 BAR CLEAR ........................................... 41 BAR COPY ............................................. 41 BASS (MIDI) ......................................... 136 Bass Note Settings ............................... 141 BEAT ................................................ 61, 72 BEAT CONVERTER............................... 39 BOOST/CUT........................................... 40 BRIGHT (Brightness).............................. 14 C CANCEL ................................................. 72 CARRIER parameters (Synth Vocoder)................................ 113 CH.Vol .................................................... 73 CHANNEL .................................. 40–41, 70 CHANNEL TRANSPOSE ....................... 71 Chord...................................................... 73 CHORD DETECT (MIDI) ...................... 136 Chord Events.......................................... 73 Chord Fingering...................................... 26 150 Tyros5 Reference Manual Chord Fingering Types ...........................27 CHORD NOTE ONLY (Harmony/Echo) ....8 Chord Tutor.............................................26 Chord Type Settings .............................141 Chorus (Mixing Console) ......................118 CHORUS DEPTH (Voice Set) ................15 CLOCK..............................................61, 72 Clock setting (MIDI) ..............................138 Code .......................................................73 COMMON (Voice Set) ............................13 COMPARE..............................................12 CONFIG 1 .............................................126 CONFIG 2 .............................................128 Connections ..........................................133 CONTROLLER ...................................7, 11 CONTROLLER (Voice Set).....................13 Converting...............................................80 Cool! (Voice) .............................................5 COPY................................................72, 90 Copy (Multi Pad) .....................................49 Ctrl (Control Change) ..............................73 CUT...................................................72, 90 D DATA ENTRY .........................................72 DECAY (Voice Set).................................14 DELETE ................................61, 71–72, 90 DETAIL (Synth Vocoder) ......................111 DETAIL (Vocal Harmony) .....................106 DETUNE (Vocal Harmony) ...................109 Displaying Available Networks ..............144 Display-related settings / Voice Category Button Options (Utility) ...............................................128 Drums (Voice) ...........................................5 DSP.........................................................15 DSP DEPTH (Voice Set).........................15 DSP1 (Mixing Console).........................118 DSP2-9 (Mixing Console) .....................118 DYNAMICS .............................................40 E EA (Ensemble Voice) ..............................21 Echo Types (Harmony/Echo) ....................9 Edit (Multi Pad) .......................................48 EFFECT Parameters ............................118 EFFECT parameters (Synth Vocoder) ..113 EFFECT/EQ (Voice Set) .........................15 EG (Voice Set) ........................................14 Ensemble Voice ......................................19 Ensemble Voice Key Assign Status List .21 Ensemble Voice Key Assign Type List ...21 Ensemble Voice Key Assignment Structure..............................................20 Envelope Generator................................14 EQ (Voice Set) ........................................15 EQ Parameters .....................................122 EQUAL (SCALE TUNE) ..........................10 Event List display ....................................72 EXPAND/COMP. ....................................40 Expansion Pack.................................... 148 F F*A (Ensemble Voice) ............................ 21 F*D (Ensemble Voice) ............................ 21 Factory Reset ....................................... 131 Fade In/Out (Utility) .............................. 126 Favorite Record ...................................... 91 FILES...................................................... 90 FILTER ....................................... 13–14, 72 FILTER Parameters.............................. 116 FINE ....................................................... 39 Fine-tuning.............................................. 10 FINGERED ............................................. 27 FINGERED ON BASS ............................ 27 FINGERED*............................................ 27 Follow Lights........................................... 57 FOOTAGES (Organ World).................... 17 Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings...... 133 FORMANT (Vocal Harmony)................ 109 FORMANT parameters (Synth Vocoder)................................ 113 Free Play ................................................ 25 Freeze .................................................... 96 FULL KEYBOARD.................................. 27 G GM............................................................ 6 GROOVE................................................ 39 Guide ...................................................... 55 H HARMO. (Harmonic Content)................. 14 HARMONY (Ensemble Voice)................ 20 Harmony Types (Harmony/Echo) ............. 9 Harmony/Echo.......................................... 8 HI (Ensemble Voice)............................... 21 HIGH KEY .............................................. 45 HPF parameters (Synth Vocoder) ........ 113 HUMANIZE (Ensemble Voice) ............... 24 I INITIAL TOUCH........................................ 7 INS (INSERT) ......................................... 72 INSERT .................................................. 90 Installing the Expansion Pack............... 148 Instrument Info File............................... 148 J Jump Markers......................................... 75 K KBD.VEL ................................................ 61 Key (Key signature) ................................ 73 KEY ASSIGN TYPE ............................... 20 Key Assign Type..................................... 21 Key Assignment Status .......................... 20 Key Assignment Structure ...................... 20 Key off retrigger ...................................... 21 KEYBOARD (Transpose) ....................... 11 KEYBOARD/PANEL........................... 7, 11 KIRNBERGER........................................ 10 L LA (Ensemble Voice).............................. 21 LENG (Length) ....................................... 18 LFO................................................... 13–14 Line Out (MAIN) / Screen (Utility) ......... 128 Line Out Settings .................................. 124 Live! (Voice).............................................. 4 Live! Drums (Voice) .................................. 5 Live! SFX (Voice)...................................... 5 LO (Ensemble Voice) ............................. 21 Local Control (MIDI) ............................. 138 Loop End Marker .................................... 75 Loop Recording ...................................... 33 Lyrics ...................................................... 73 Lyrics display .......................................... 53 Lyrics Events .......................................... 73 M N Name ......................................................73 Network .................................................144 NOISE GATE (Microphone Setting)......102 NORMAL REC ........................................84 Normalize................................................83 Note ........................................................73 Note Events ............................................73 NOTE LIMIT ............................................45 NTR (Note Transposition Rule)...............44 NTT (Note Transposition Table) .............44 O OCTAVE (Ensemble Voice) ....................23 One Touch Setting ..................................30 OnOff ......................................................73 Organ Flutes (Editing Organ Voices) ......17 Organ Flutes (Organ World) ...................17 Organ Flutes! (Voice) ................................5 Organ World............................................17 ORIGINAL BEAT ....................................39 OTS LINK TIMING ..................................28 Overdub Recording.................................33 OVERVIEW (Synth Vocoder)................111 OVERVIEW (Vocal Harmony)...............106 OWNER ................................................130 P P.Bnd (Pitch Bend) .................................73 PAN (Vocal Harmony)...........................109 PANEL SUSTAIN (Voice Set) .................15 PANPOT (Ensemble Voice) ....................23 Parameter Lock (Utility) ........................127 PART (Vocal Harmony) ........................106 PART EQ (Mixing Console) ..................122 PART OCTAVE (Voice Set) ....................13 PART ON/OFF ........................................29 PART ON/OFF (Ensemble Voice) ..........23 Password ..............................................145 PASTE ....................................................72 PEDAL ....................................................86 PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT .........................67 Performance Assistant Technology ........58 PITCH CORRECT MODE (Vocal Harmony) ...............................110 PITCH DETECT (Microphone Setting) .102 PITCH RANGE (Ensemble Voice) ..........24 Playlist.....................................................88 PLUS PLAYBACK...................................84 PORTAMENTO TIME (Voice Set) ..........13 Pro ..........................................................25 Prog (Program Change)..........................73 PROPERTY ............................................89 Prot.1 ......................................................50 Prot.2 ......................................................50 Prot.2 Orig...............................................50 Protected Songs .....................................50 Punch In..................................................67 PUNCH IN OUT ......................................85 Punch In/Out ...........................................67 Punch Out ...............................................67 PURE MAJOR ........................................10 PURE MINOR......................................... 10 PYTHAGOREAN .................................... 10 Q QUANTIZE ....................................... 41, 70 R Realtime Recording .................... 33, 46, 59 Realtime Recording (Multi Pad).............. 46 REC END ............................................... 67 REC START ........................................... 67 RECEIVE (MIDI)................................... 136 Recording Chords (Step Recording) ...... 64 Recording Melodies (Step Recording).... 60 Recording Part........................................ 59 Redo ....................................................... 77 Registration Memory .............................. 95 Registration Sequence ........................... 97 RELES. (Release) (Voice Set) ............... 14 REMOVE EVENT ................................... 41 REPEAT ................................................. 89 Repeat .................................................... 55 RESP (Response) (Organ World) .......... 18 Retrigger................................................. 21 Reverb (Mixing Console) ...................... 118 REVERB DEPTH (Ensemble Voice) ...... 23 REVERB DEPTH (Voice Set)................. 15 Rotary Speaker....................................... 17 RTG (Ensemble Voice)........................... 21 RTR (Retrigger Rule).............................. 45 S S.Art! (Voice) ............................................ 4 S.Art2 Auto Articulation (Utility) ............ 128 S.Art2! (Voice) .......................................... 4 S.Vol ....................................................... 73 SAVE ...................................................... 72 Scale Tune ............................................. 10 Scale types ............................................. 10 ScBar (Score Start Bar).......................... 73 Sect ........................................................ 73 SECTION SET........................................ 29 Security................................................. 145 SELECT............................................ 71, 90 SEQUENCE END................................... 98 Session................................................... 25 SETUP.................................................... 71 SFX (Voice) .............................................. 5 SHUFFLE ............................................... 89 SINGLE FINGER.................................... 27 SIZE........................................................ 70 SOFT (Touch)........................................... 7 Song ....................................................... 50 SONG (Transpose)................................. 11 Song Creator .......................................... 59 Song Position Markers ........................... 75 SORT...................................................... 89 SOUND (Voice Set)................................ 14 SOURCE (PLAY) ROOT/CHORD .......... 43 SPEED (Harmony/Echo) .......................... 8 SSID ..................................................... 145 Staccatissimo ......................................... 61 Staccato.................................................. 61 Start/End Points...................................... 87 Tyros5 Reference Manual Index MANUAL................................................. 86 Manual Setup ....................................... 145 MARK ............................................... 71, 90 MASTER (Transpose) ............................ 11 Master Compressor Settings ................ 123 MASTER EQ (Mixing Console) ............ 122 MEAN-TONE .......................................... 10 MEDIA .................................................. 129 MEGAEnhancer........................................ 5 MegaVoice (Voice) ................................... 5 MERGE .................................................. 85 MESSAGE SW (MIDI) .......................... 138 Meta event.............................................. 73 Metronome (Utility) ............................... 126 MFC10 (MIDI)....................................... 136 MFC10 Settings.................................... 142 Microphone........................................... 100 Microphone Settings............................. 101 MIDI Receive Settings .......................... 140 MIDI Settings ........................................ 136 MIDI Song Data Structure ...................... 59 MIDI Songs............................................. 50 MIDI System Settings ........................... 138 MIDI Templates .................................... 137 MIDI Transmit Settings ......................... 139 MIX ......................................................... 71 Mixing Console ..................................... 115 MODE (Organ World) ............................. 18 MODULATION (Voice Set)..................... 13 MONO/POLY (Voice Set) ....................... 13 MOVE Up/Down ..................................... 90 Multi Assign Type (Harmony/Echo) .......... 9 MULTI FINGER ...................................... 27 Multi Pad................................................. 46 Multi Pad Creator.................................... 46 MULTI SELECT...................................... 72 Multi Track .............................................. 76 Multi Track File ....................................... 76 Music Finder ........................................... 91 Music Finder File .................................... 93 Music Notation ........................................51 151 Step Recording........................... 37, 48, 59 Step Recording (Multi Pad) .................... 48 STOP ACMP .......................................... 28 STRENGTH...................................... 40, 70 Style.................................................. 25, 73 Style Assembly ....................................... 37 Style Creator........................................... 31 Style Data Structure ............................... 31 STYLE TOUCH ...................................... 29 Style Types............................................. 25 Super Articulation (Voice)......................... 4 Super Articulation2 (Voice)....................... 4 Sweet! (Voice) .......................................... 5 SWING ................................................... 39 SYNCHRO STOP WINDOW .................. 28 Synth Vocoder Types ........................... 111 SYS/EX................................................... 73 SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) .................. 73 SYSTEM (MIDI).................................... 136 System Exclusive ................................... 72 System Exclusive Events ....................... 73 SYSTEM RESET.................................. 131 W WERCKMEISTER...................................10 Wireless LAN Adaptor...........................144 WPS......................................................146 X T Talk....................................................... 100 TALK MIXING (Microphone Setting) .... 103 Tap (Utility) ........................................... 127 TEMPO................................................... 29 Tempo .................................................... 73 Tenuto .................................................... 61 Text display ............................................ 53 THRU (Ensemble Voice) ........................ 21 Time (Time signature) ............................ 73 Time Zone ............................................ 147 TIMING (Ensemble Voice)...................... 24 TOUCH LIMIT (Harmony/Echo) ............... 8 Touch Response ...................................... 7 TOUCH SENSE (Voice Set)................... 13 TRANSMIT (MIDI) ................................ 136 TRANSPOSE (Vocal Harmony) ........... 109 TRANSPOSE ASSIGN........................... 11 TREMOLO (Organ World) ...................... 17 TUNE / EFFECT (Ensemble Voice) ....... 23 TUNE Parameters ................................ 117 Tuning..................................................... 10 TUNING (Ensemble Voice) .................... 23 U Undo ....................................................... 77 UNDO/REDO.......................................... 89 Up/Down................................................. 90 USB Wireless LAN Adaptor.................. 144 USER MEMORY (Microphone Setting) ........................ 101 Utility..................................................... 126 V VARIATION (DSP) ................................. 15 VELOCITY CHANGE ............................. 41 VIBRATO (Organ World) ........................ 17 VIBRATO (Voice Set) ............................. 15 VIBRATO SENSITIVITY (Ensemble Voice) ............................... 24 VIBRATO SPEED (Organ World)........... 18 152 Vocal Harmony .....................................100 Vocal Harmony Types...................104, 106 VOCODER parameters (Synth Vocoder) ................................113 VOICE (Ensemble Voice) .......................23 Voice Set.................................................12 Voice Types ..............................................4 VOL (Organ World) .................................18 VOLUME (Ensemble Voice) ...................23 VOLUME (Harmony/Echo)........................8 VOLUME (Vocal Harmony) ...................109 VOLUME (Voice Set) ..............................13 VOLUME / PAN (Ensemble Voice) .........23 Volume Balance................................78, 83 VOLUME&ATTACK (Organ World) ........18 Tyros5 Reference Manual XG.............................................................6 XGPrm (XG parameters) ........................73 Y Your Tempo ............................................57